Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout19920 67TH AVE NE SPC 18_BLD1231_2026 QMANUFACTURED /MOBILE HOME PERMIT APPLICATION Department of Community& Economic Development City of Arlington• 18204 59th Ave NE • Arlington, WA 98223• Phone(360) 403-3551 THIS APPLICATION MUST BE ACCOMPANIED BY TWO (2) SETS OF APPROVED PLANS REVIEWED BY STATE L&L RELOCATED MOBILE HOMES MUST HAVE THE ORIGINAL INSTALLATION MANUAL OR BE INSTALLED PER ANSI A225.1. AND CONTAIN AN APPROVED DATA PLATE FROM STATE L&I. Location of Installation: 19920 67th ave ne #18 arlington wa 98223 ( Mobile Estates ) Client's Name Patsy Long C/O Coach Corral inc Phone Number: 360-424-8448 3906 cedardale Rd Mount vernon wa 98274 Address: City: State: Zip Code: Lot number: 18 Valuation: 99K for home When acting as the general contractor for installing Manufactured Homes/Mobile Homes, the following requirements must be met per the Washington Administrative Codes. WAC 296-150M-0630—Who may install a manufactured home? 1. A manufactured home maybe installed by: • Homeowner • A certified installer • An individual who is supervised by an on-site certified installer;or • A specialty trades person,for certain aspects of installation. 2. A certified installer must be a registered contractor or his or her employee, or an employee of a registered dealership. Contractor's Name: Coach Corral Inc Phone #: 360-424-8448 Address: 3906 cedardale Rd C ty:Mount Vernon State: WA Zip Code: 98274 L&I Number:Coachc*254MJ City Business License #: X Installer's Name:James Wise Phone #: 360-770-9285 Address: 5504 Tenneson Rd City:Sedro Woolley State: WA Zip Code:98284 L&I Number:Wise*J*0551_1 ( wains ) City Business License#: X I hereby certify the above information is correct and that the construction on, and the occupancy and the use of the above described property will be accordance with the laws, rules and regulations of the State of Washington. The applicant will be responsible for providing a method of safely)accessing roof for inspection. �P�'�K,GCCL Ci(/OL 12/07/2016 Applicants Signature Date DeAnna Wohlman Print Applicants Name FOR STAFF USE ONLY Permit# Accepted By Amount Received Receipt# Date Received handrail installed if 4 or more risers handrails 34"to 38"from plane of nosing of stairs to top of handrail 30 Minimum Landing 2x2 gripable handrail installed to !� top member-returns at top and self supporting steps and railings bottom,no sharpe comers, continuous run of stairway �jJ �� hDUse. r,1 T f1,�, 3face Is 30" if walkinggrade MUST Pec-;Sj�` I'I�SI mruG\\ surface is 30"above grade IV1 J lil steps max.rise of 7'/Z high,uniform 2(SE-4j ti B'to within 3 -steps(2)2 x 8 with a 31 8"gap=11 318"width 2'x 2"pickets spaced at less than 4" v ° apart,all openings such that a sphere 8"in diameter cannot pass through min.3W x 38'landin �`� 4"x 4'P L posts ry� r^[ I�I 6IUU e4 7H-e 4x st{�5 Post 2x12 Jack (4)-4 x 4 pressure treated 3 12"to 4 12'tags to attach handrails posts and concrete footings- All wood to be approved pressure treated wood rND WAIL) t V _-- jrlD6- / a P ilc-,0A-20 FAIL' 1N51 NQN�RAIt-> Ede 3y=3$'r JG6�y ZA�Z I y2- I V� R.r' Ct RpM IdC- DCA"--/ r Ozz L k/ i F jjk1 r, IA & �— RDJustA6►� Jp2� pl�R- (31Acx S 4-) LL a� 5�1 to 5'de, Kxjo r. 1 00 � U . �-= w LU f ,� a3 O w 0 O \�J W `f Minor s N o� 3 u o C v U u co O c > uu ii) vCD v o0@� °u U a V � uu 0 0 0 o x v o , u = 0 00 3 U 0 3 G � uGo _ boo F— M M Vl8z CITY OF ARLINGTON 238 N.OLYMPIC AVE-ARLINGTON,WA. 98223 PHONE;(360)403-3551 BUILDING PERMIT Address:19920 67th Ave NE,#18 Permit#:1231 Parcel#:00960007901800 Valuation:99000 00 OWNER APPLICANT CONTRACTOR Name:VACANT SPACE Name:Coach Corral Inc. Name:Coach Corral,Inc Address:19920 67TH AVE NE SPC 18 Address:3906 Cedardale Rd Address:3906 Cedardale Rd City,State Zip:ARLINGTON,WA 98223 City,State Zip:Mount Vernon,WA 98274 City,Stale Zip:Mount Vernon,WA 98274 Phone: Phone:360-424-8448 Phone:360424-8448 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR PLUMBING CONTRACTOR Name: Name: Address: Address: City,State,Zip: City,State,Zip: Phone: Phone: LIC#: EXP: LIC#: EXP. JOB DESCRIPTION PERMIT TYPE: Mlsc CODE YEAR: 2015 STORIES: 1 CONST.TYPE: DWELLING UNITS: j OCC GROUP: BUILDINGS: OCC LOAD: PERMIT APPROVAL I AGREE TO COMPLY WI fH CITY AND STATE LAWS REGULATING CONSTRUCTION AND IN DOING THE WORK AUTHORIZED THEREBY;NO PERSON WILL BE EMPLOYED IN VIOLATION OF THE LABOR CODE OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON RELATING TO WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE:AND RCW 18.27. THIS APPLICATION IS NOT A PERMIT UNTIL SIGNED BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL OR HIS/HER DEPUTY AND ALL FEES ARE PAID. IT IS UNLAWFUL TO USE OR OCCUPY A BUILDING OR STRUCTURE UNTIL A FINAL INSPECTION HAS BEEN MADE AND APPROVAL OR A CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY HAS BEEN GRANTED. IBCI I0/IRCI 10. SAL S A NOTICE:Sales tax relating to construction and construction materials in the City of Arlington must be reported on your sales tax return form and de i f ArI gt 3101. J ignature Print Name Date Re eased By to CONDITIONS Approved as submitted.Call for inspection at 360-403-3417. THIS PERMIT AUTHORIZS ONLY TR WORK NOTED THIS PERMIT COVERS WORK TO BE DONF ON PRIVATE PROPERTY ONLY ANY CONSTRUCI ION ON l'HE PUBLIC DOMAIN(CURBS,SIDEWALKS,DRIVEWAYS.MARQUEES,ETC,)WILL REQUIRE SEPARATE PERMISSION. PERMIT FEES Date Description Fee Amount 12/16/2016 Mobile Home $500.00 Total Due: $500.00 Total Payment: $0.00 Balance Due: $500.00 CALL FOR INSPECTIONS BUILDING(360)403-3417 When calling for an inspection please leave the following information: Permit Number,Type of Inspection being requested,and whether you prefer morning or afternoon CITY OF ARLINGTON INSPECTION REQUEST PROCEDURE To schedule an inspection: Call the Automated Inspection Line @ (360) 403-3417 before 8am the day of inspection request Provide The Required Information: • Give Permit Number (BLD# or PWD#) • Give Inspection Request (Building or Civil) • Give Inspection Time (am or pm) - you may request a specific time. We will do our best to honor the time requested. Building Inspections: • Building • Fire • Mechanical • Plumbing Civil Inspections: • Grading • TECSP • Storm Drainage • Paving, Signage, Markings • Right-of-Way Work DETAIL B o = 6 r� R = 1; C = 15 991- _ N82 27.T jp'W FIVD 04 CONC MON DETAIL A e o POWER PACE 25.00' EASEMENT FOR DANCER TREE RIGHTS AF / 9105200414, P.U.0. / 1 ''''• Of' SNAHOM/-W COUNTY OWN 4 � W I ! SS8776'30"W 149.47' �+ a 2 49.4 7" 50.00' 50.00' 24 73' 58776'300W 46 ( 66-0 tom, Oo qq A N !L8 �, g C2 ~ 1pI - C13 --r �.p 46 N. 19.05 46. C 14 In UTILITY EASEMI 3 t 1 _ J �, aTY of ARCING 7T746.00' 9 Q ,� Q 0 C I 36.91' 46.00 4b.00 JL - -- —^1- -- &Pow tar, �C- 022Z5UU5 _ FKtp2 Der►c 4sk-Paj)5 - - - ---- - — --- -- ----- - i J /1/a/l� /0/r4li/ilr/n��rrrur�nrr -+r,.r��� i � 111�1i arm mr r/I/ii//ir.n,,r.. .�,.. //�/�/////✓r/ir/rYih/iY/�///i '�i��r�///U/i///// {iGe%//'/ N f//�r//ii/i7/m a� ��/fa /a.� f I • • • • J J 0 PFS#05 Conforms to MH Using the Manual ;j H1°5 9CSS This manual is organized into a series of steps that will take you through the entire installation process using only those pages required for the specific home being installed. First, review the entire manual, including the Introduction chapter.As you read it, identify sections of the manual that you will need; identify other documents or information you will need; construct lists of tools and materials required for your particular installation; and make sure you have everything you need before starting work. After reviewing the entire manual, refer to the sequence of installation steps in the table below. Identify the pathway for your installation and follow the arrows downward. Select either Single Section Home or a Multi-Section Home and choose the col- umn corresponding to the home's foundation type, either Pier and Ground Anchor or Load-Bearing Perimeter Wall (see Definitions, p.4).Then complete the work in each of the sections starting with Getting Started. If using an alternative(proprietary)foundation system, the installation process will change from that described in this manual. Consult the system manufacturer directions for instructions. See page 6 for alternative foundation system criteria. SECTIONSINGLE •ME MULTI-SECTION HOME Pier and Ground Anchor Load-Bearing Perimeter Pier and Ground Anchor Load-Bearing Perimeter Wall Wall Getting Started (p. 8) Getting Started (p. 8) Getting Started (p. 8) Getting Started (p. 8) Prepare the Site(p. 13) Prepare the Site(p. 13) Prepare the Site(p. 13) Prepare the Site(p. 13) Install Footings(p. 18) Construct Foundation Install Footings (p. 18) Construct Foundation ♦ (p. 28) ♦ (p. 28) Set the Home(p. 30) ♦ Set the Home (p. 30) ♦ Connect Utilities(p. 77) ♦ Complete Roof and Exte- Install Stabilizing System ♦ Complete Multi-Section rior Walls (p.47) (p. 65) Prepare Appliances and Set(p. 36) ♦ Equipment(p. 86) ♦ Connect Crossovers Connect Utilities(p. 77) ♦ Complete Roof and Exte- (p. 52) ♦ Complete Under the rior Walls(p.47) Prepare Appliances and Home and Site Built ♦ Complete Interior(p. 63) Equipment(p. 86) Structures(p. 96) Connect Crossovers ♦ ♦ (p. 52) Connect Utilities(p. 77) Complete Under the Prepare Home for Occu- Home and Site Built pancy(p. 99) Complete Interior(p. 63) Prepare Appliances and Structures(p. 96) ♦ ♦ Equipment(p. 86) ♦ Complete Installation Install Stabilizing System Prepare Home for Occu- Checklist(p. 100) (p. 65) Complete Under the pancy(p. 99) ♦ Home and Site Built ♦ Connect Utilities(p. 77) Structures(p. 96) Complete Installation Checklist(p. 100) Prepare Appliances and Prepare Home for Occu- Equipment(p. 86) pancy(p. 99) Complete Under the Complete Installation Home and Site Built Checklist(p. 100) Structures(p. 96) Prepare Home for Occu- pancy(p. 99) Complete Installation Checklist(p. 100) Disclaimer The Manufactured Housing Research Alliance,its members,consultants,contractors and representatives make no representations,warranty or guarantee,express or implied,as to the accuracy or appropriateness of any materials or information in this manual for use in a specific home,nor assume any liability for the use of the information, methods,or materials contained herein,or for damages arising from any such use. Copyright©2008 Manufactured Housing Research Alliance ISSN 1529-3424 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 2 PF M - Conforms to HUD MHCSS Introduction 1/15/09 This installation manual contains instructions that must be followed for the proper installation of the home. It complies with the HUD Model Manufactured Home Installation Standards. Please read all instructions and any other documents(includ- ing addendum pages and supplements)that may apply to the specific home prior to commencing site work or installation. This installation manual covers permits and site work through final inspection of the installation. It covers both single and multi-section homes installed over pier and anchor, load bearing crawl space walls and basement foundations. It contains instructions, including specifications and procedures,for the set and hookup of manufactured homes to be used as single- family dwellings. The importance of correct installation cannot be over-emphasized. Correct installation is absolutely essential to home- owner satisfaction and the structural integrity of the home.All instructions must be followed to provide the customer with a safe, quality home. No manual can cover all circumstances that may exist for certain home designs or building sites. For questions,further clarification, or if you encounter conditions at the site or in the design of the home or its foundation not covered by this manual, please contact the manufacturer(see Resources, p.4), a registered engineer, or registered architect. Supplemental addendum pages may be included with this manual. Supplements include requirements not covered in this manual or that supercede the manual instructions. Once the home installation is complete, leave this manual with the home. IMPORTANT NOTICES • The home manufacturer is not responsible for installation or for the materials supplied by the set-up crew at the time of installation. The installer may be responsible for any deviations from the installation instructions of this manual. • To keep the home in compliance with its warranty,the home installation must follow the procedures described in this manual or other procedures approved by the manufacturer. Deviation from the instructions in this manual may void the home's warranty.Any alterations or changes to the home shall be approved by a registered engi- neer or registered architect and may still be subject to warranty violations. • When an installer does not provide support and anchorage in accordance with the approved manufacturer's in- stallation instructions, or encounters site conditions(such as areas that are subject to flood damage or high seismic risk)or other conditions that prevent the use of the instructions provided in this manual, the installer must obtain special site-specific instructions from the manufacturer or use a design approved by a registered engineer or registered architect. • The installer must possess a valid installation license as a manufactured home installer. t/) • If the installer identifies failures of the home to comply with the Federal Manufactured Home Construction and < Safety Standards(the HUD Code), the installer must notify the manufacturer and retailer. E `����wiuuu�q� , Z The Technical Content of the \�.��P0 T.Leq m Manual has been reviewed by F ........... G % n PFS Corporation and found to be 1STF �� in conformance with the Federal ;' PE19600312 Manufactured Home Construction = _= and Safety Standards. S o ` • D ,9 •• STATE OF �Q'` � SAFETY �S`S/ONA���NG\`\`` -rpft z9 oz osooJeffrey T. lt Z There are potential hazards associated with the installation of a manufactured home. Home installers are licensed, and as I experienced professionals, should recognize these hazards, be qualified to work with them, and be capable of providing safe work practices and equipment that minimize the risks of injury. rD Only qualified persons should install a manufactured home.As qualified professionals in the field of manufactured home installation, installers are the experts and must be aware of the hazards and conditions faced.Warnings are published Z throughout this manual as reminders.These reminders may not cover all hazards, all potential hazards, or all possible 3 consequences of improper or unsafe installation practices. > Z Construction crews should be trained in the skills required and be supervised by experienced personnel. Installers should c regularly inspect work performed by crews and subcontractors. Obey OSHA regulations, particularly those related to home construction, such as Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations Part 1926. For copies of OSHA regulations, call (202)512-1800 or visit www.osha.gov on the web. 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 3 PFS#°5 RESOURCES HUD`MHCSS Manufacturer contact information: 1/15/09 Skyline Corporation P.O. Box 743 Elkhart Indiana 46515 (574)294-6521 (574)295-8601 -FAX www.skylinecorp.com Office of Regulatory Affairs and Manufactured Housing US Department of Housing and Urban Development 451 Seventh Street, SW, Room 9164 Washington, DC 20410-8000 Telephone: (202)708-6423 or(800)927-2891 FAX: (202)708-4213 State Administrative Agencies A list of SAAs may be found on the web at www.hud.gov or by contacting the Office of Regulatory Affairs and Manu- factured Housing. FEDERAL PREEMPTION This home was engineered, constructed, and inspected in conformance with the Federal Manufactured Home Construc- tion and Safety Standards (MHCSS)of the US Department of Housing and Urban Development(24 CFR Part 3280, commonly referred to as the"HUD Code") in effect on the date of manufacture.These Standards set forth minimum re- quirements for the design and construction of manufactured homes designed to be used as dwellings. Individual states, counties and cities shall have no authority to establish standards regarding the construction or safety of a manufactured home.A metal certification label is affixed to each section of the home to certify that it has been con- structed and inspected to comply with these Standards. The design plans and in-plant construction of all homes are in- spected by independent third party agencies to assure compliance with the Standards. The installation of the home and any alterations made to the home shall conform to the requirements of the MHCSS and the HUD Model Manufactured Home Installation Standards. These installation instructions are minimum requirements. Applicable local or state laws may have more stringent installation requirements than outlined in this manual and must be followed. Consult with the local authority having jurisdiction (LAHJ)for regulations that may require licenses and/or per- mits or which may affect procedures described in this manual. DEFINITIONS ANCHOR ASSEMBLY.Any device or other means designed to transfer loads to the ground. ANCHORING EQUIPMENT.Ties, straps, cables,turnbuckles, chains, and other approved components, including tension- ing devices that are used to secure a manufactured home to anchor assemblies. ANCHORING SYSTEM.A combination of anchoring equipment and anchor assemblies that will, when properly designed and installed, resist the uplift, overturning, and lateral forces on the manufactured home. BASEMENT.A load-bearing perimeter wall foundation that includes habitable space(finished or unfinished, heated or unheated)partly or completely below grade. CRAWLSPACE.The space underneath the home's floor system, enclosed with either load-or non-load bearing perimeter walls.The ground may be covered with a concrete slab or by a plastic ground cover. Crawlspace walls must be vented. CROSSOVERS. Utility interconnections between sections of multi-section homes, including heating and cooling ducts, electrical circuits, and water pipes, drain plumbing, and gas lines. DATA PLATE.An information sheet located at the main electrical panel, in the utility room, in a bedroom closet, or in a cabinet in the kitchen. It contains a unique identification number and identifies the wind zone, roof load zone, and cli- matic zone for which the home was constructed. DIAGONAL TIE.A tie intended to resist horiz. or shear forces, but which may resist vertical, uplift, and overturning forces. FOOTING.That portion of the support system that transmits loads directly to the soil. GROUND ANCHOR.A specific anchoring assembly device designed to transfer home loads to the ground. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM PFS#°5 4i Conforms to HUD MHCSS H-BEAM. Steel H-beams are often used to support a home over a basement or crawlspace.They span across the foun- lilsio9 dation from sidewall to sidewall,typically with an intermediate support pier and footing (typically in the center point re- sulting in a line of piers under the centerline of a double section home). INFORMATION PACKET.A set of important documents provided with the home including warranties, information on high wind coverage, and other features of the specific home. INSTALLATION LICENSE.The proof that an installer meets the requirements for installing manufactured homes under the HUD-administered installation program. LABELED. Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a certified testing laboratory, inspection agency, or other organization concerned with product evaluation. The label indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine suitable usage in a specified manner. LISTED OR CERTIFIED. Included in a list published by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, inspection agency, or other organization concerned with product evaluation that maintains periodic inspection of production of listed equip- ment or materials, and whose listing states either that the equipment or material meets nationally recognized stan- dards or has been tested and found suitable for use in a specified manner. LOAD-BEARING PERIMETER WALL FOUNDATION.A support system for the home whereby the home is mechanically fastened to a structural wall(s)that transfers gravity, lateral, and uplift loads to the ground. LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION (LAHJ).The state, city, county, municipality, utility, or organization that has local responsibilities that must be complied with during the installation of a manufactured home. MUST. Indicates a mandatory requirement. N/A. Indicates not applicable. PIER.That portion of the support system between the footing and the manufactured home, exclusive of shims.Types of piers include, but are not limited to: (1) manufactured steel stands; (2)pressure-treated wood; (3)manufactured con- crete stands; (4)concrete blocks; and (5)portions of foundation walls. PIER AND GROUND ANCHOR FOUNDATION.A support system for the home that employs piers under the chassis and other locations to support gravity loads and employs ground anchors and tie downs(the stabilizing system)to resist lateral and uplift loads. PERIMETER BLOCKING. Regularly spaced piers supporting the sidewalls and marriage line of the home. Some homes require perimeter blocking in addition to supports under the home's frame. QUALIFIED. Has the necessary knowledge and skills gained from experience and training that will allow performance of the job safely, competently, and in accordance with all applicable codes, standards, rules, and regulations. Meets all necessary qualification tests including any license and certification requirements that may be in effect in the area where the home will be installed. RAMADA.Any freestanding roof or shade structure, installed or erected over a manufactured home or any portion < thereof. r Z SHOULD. Indicates a recommendation that is strongly advised but not mandatory. m n SHALL. Indicates a mandatory requirement. 0 X SITE FOR A MANUFACTURED HOME.A designated parcel of land designed for the accommodation of one manufac- 0 tured home, its accessory buildings or structures, and accessory equipment,for the exclusive use of the occupants of D the home. > SKIRTING.A weather-resistant material used to enclose the perimeter, under the living area of the home,from the bottom 0 Z of the manufactured home to grade. Z STABILIZING SYSTEM.All components of the anchoring and support systems, such as piers,footings,ties, anchoring C/) I equipment, anchoring assemblies, or any other equipment, materials and methods of construction,that support and D secure the manufactured home to the ground. D SUPPORT SYSTEM. Pilings, columns, a combination of footings, piers,foundation walls, caps, and shims and any com- bination thereof that will, when properly installed, support and secure the manufactured home to the ground. Z TIE. Straps, cable, or securing devices used to connect the manufactured home to anchoring assemblies. D UTILITY CONNECTION.The connection of the manufactured home to utilities that include, but are not limited to, electric- Z ity, water, sewer, gas, or fuel oil. y r VERTICAL TIE.A tie intended to resist uplifting and overturning forces. WIND ZONE.The areas designated on the Basic Wind Zone Map, as further defined by the MHCSS. 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 5 PFS#°5 4j Conforms to HUD MHCSS ENGINEER'S STAMP 1/,15/09 Certain pages of this manual display the seal of a registered engineer. Federal guidelines only require the seal from one state to be displayed, but the details herein apply to all states. SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL i , // This icon indicates an important warning. It is critical to heed these warnings. This icon indicates a recommended best practice.While not required,following these practices will result in a superior installation, reducing the chance that cosmetic or dura- bility related complaints might arise. ABBREVIATIONS ABS Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene max. Maximum ANSI American National Standards Insti- MHCSS Manufactured Home Construction and tute Safety Standards APA American Plywood Association min. Minimum ASTM American Society for Testing and Ma- mph Mile(s)per hour terials AWPA American Wood Preservers Associa- NEC National Electric Code tion CFM Cubic feet per minute NFIP National Flood Insurance Program CFR Code of Federal Regulations NFPA National Fire Protection Association DWV Drain,Waste,Vent O.C. On center EMT Electrical metallic tubing OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Admini- stration FEMA Federal Emergency Management oz Ounce(s) Agency ft Foot/feet P. Page ga Gauge psf Pounds per square foot HUD US Department of Housing and Ur- psi Pounds per square inch ban Development in Inch(es) SAA State Administrative Agency LAHJ Local Authority Having Jurisdiction sq ft Square foot/feet lb(s) Pound(s) ALTERNATIVE FOUNDATION SYSTEMS Alternative foundation systems or designs are permitted if they are approved by the home manufacturer and the manufac- turer's DAPIA, and are in accordance with either of the following: • Systems or designs are manufactured and installed in accordance with their listings by a nationally recognized testing agency based on a nationally recognized testing protocol; or • System designs are prepared by a registered engineer or a registered architect or tested and certified by a regis- tered engineer or registered architect in accordance with acceptable engineering practice and are manufactured and installed so as not to take the home out of compliance with the Manufactured Home Construction and Safety Standards. DISPLAY AND STORAGE OF THE HOME WEATHER PROTECTION If the installation is not started immediately upon delivery of the home, the retailer and/or installer has the responsibility to ensure the exterior weather protection covering of marriage walls and the roof of homes with hinged roofs has not been Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM PFS#°5 Conforms to H MHCSS damaged during shipment. Inspect the home immediately upon the delivery and frequently during storage. Promptly repair 1 15/09 tears in the home closure materials to prevent damage from the elements. Inspect and repair roof shingles and siding as needed. SUPPORTING A HOME FOR DISPLAY When a new or used manufactured home is to be displayed at a retail location, temporarily block and support the home. Set up single-section homes with single block piers spaced no further apart than 12 feet o.c. beneath each I-beam.The tire and axle system may be used as one of these required supports, and the hitch jack may be used as another. Locate the first pier no further than two feet from the rear end of the home(Figure 1). Place additional piers along the perimeter on either side of openings greater than four feet(i.e. sliding glass doors, bay windows, etc.). For multi-section homes, locate additional piers along the marriage line under support columns. These locations will be marked by the manufacturer. Figure 1. Supporting a home for display Grade n 12-_0" i 12'_0„ 12,_0„ 12,_0" 1 For all homes, place footings below each pier. Footings may be placed directly on the surface grade without excavation and may be ABS pads, 2 x 10 by 16 inch long pressure treated lumber or 16"x 16"by 4 inch thick concrete pads. SUPPORTING A HOME FOR STORAGE To prevent damage to homes being stored but not on display(i.e. people shall not be permitted inside the home)for a pe- riod exceeding 30 days, locate piers below each I-beam no further than two feet from each end of the home and at the approximate center of the home length. CUSTOMIZATION OF THE MODEL MANUAL This manual is based on a model manufacturer's installation manual used by many different companies. It may have been customized from the model by the manufacturer.The table below lists the locations where this manual differs from the model manual. Section Step Summary of the change Multi-section set Step 3 Revised hinged roof details to Skyline system. Multi-section set Step 6,7&8 Revised mating line connections to conform to Skyline system. Connect cross-overs Step 1 Revised heat duct cross-overs to conform to Skyline systems. Install stabilizing System Step 1 Revise anchor location requirements to conform to Skyline system. N Connect Utilities Step 2 Revise water heater drip pan drainage to Skyline system. r Z m n O X a O X D O Z z D r r D O Z D Z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 7 PFS#°5 Getting • Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Getting Started This chapter covers a few steps that,taken now, will avoid problems later in the installation process. Follow the Steps • - • STEP 1. LOCATE THE DATA PLATE(p. 8) STEP 2. CONFIRM WIND ZONE (p. 8) STEP 3. CONFIRM THERMAL ZONE (p. 9) STEP 4. CONFIRM ROOF-LOAD ZONE (p. 10) STEP 5. CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS (p. 12) STEP 1. LOCATE THE DATA PLATE Locate the data plate inside the home(Figure 2),typically on a wall panel or door face near the electrical panel, or master bedroom closet. _-- = Figure 2. Sample data plate K a s J jThe information on the data plate will be used to verify that the home was designed for Z the proper location. Z STEP 2. CONFIRM WIND ZONE From Table 1, identify the wind zone for the home.Verify that the home conforms to Site Appropriateness. If the J the following rules and any special requirements determined by the LAHJ. site is not accessible, not appro- • No home may be located in a higher wind zone than that indicated on the priate for the planned support < data plate. (Example: a home designed for Wind Zone II cannot be placed in system or cannot be properly U) Wind Zone III.) graded, notify the purchaser,the Z • A home may be located in a lower wind zone than that indicated on the data retailer and HUD with the rea- 1 O plate. (Example: a home designed for Wind Zone II can be placed in either sons why the site is unsuitable. Wind Zone II or I.) Do not install the home until all Homes located within 1,500 feet of the coastline in Wind Zones II and III must issues are remedied. Oa be designed to withstand exposure`D'conditions.This will be indicated on W the data plate. VIf the home does not conform to these rules, contact the manufacturer immediately. w Z J Y co Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 8 FS#°5 ® • • Conforms V. P HUD Ucss IF- 1/15/09 TABLE 1.WIND ZONE BY LOCALITY All areas except those areas listed below as being within Wind Zone II or III •• Counties of Baldwin and Mobile • •. All counties except those listed below as within Wind Zone Ill • . . Counties of Bryan,Camden,Chatham,Glynn,Liberty,McIntosh Parishes of Acadia,Allen,Ascension,Assumption,Calcasieu,Cameron,East Baton Rouge,East Feliciana, Evangeline, Iberia, Iberville,Jefferson Davis,Lafayette, Livingston,Pointe Coupee, St.Helena,St.James,St.John the Baptist,St. Landry,St. Martin,St.Tammany,Tangipahoa,Vermillion,Washington,West Baton Rouge,and West Feliciana Counties of Hancock and Washington Counties of Barnstable, Bristol, Dukes,Nantucket,and Plymouth •• Counties of George, Hancock, Harrison,Jackson,Pearl River,and Stone . • Counties of Beaufort, Brunswick,Camden,Chowan,Columbus,Craven,Currituck,Jones, New Hanover,Onslow, Pamlico, Pasquotank, Fender, Perquimans,Tyrrell,and Washington • Counties of Beaufort,Berkeley,Charleston,Colleton,Dorchester,Georgetown, Horry,Jasper,and Williamsburg Counties of Aransas,Brazoria,Calhoun,Cameron,Chambers,Galveston,Jefferson, Kennedy,Kleberg, Mata- gorda, Nueces,Orange, Refugio, San Patricio,and Willacy 1 Cities of Chesapeake, Norfolk,Portsmouth, Princess Anne,and Virginia Beach Entire state Coastal regions(as determined by the 90 mph isotach on the ANSI/ASCE 7-88 map) • •. Counties of Broward,Charlotte,Collier, Dade, Franklin,Gulf, Hendry, Lee, Martin,Manatee,Monroe, Palm Beach, Pinellas,and Sarasota • Parishes of Jefferson,La Fourche,Orleans,Plaquemines,St.Bernard,St.Charles,St.Mary,and Terrebonne • • Counties of Carteret, Dare,and Hyde • All regions of the U.S.Territories of American Samoa,Guam, Northern Mariana Islands, Puerto Rico,Trust Terri- tory of the Pacific Islands,and the United States Virgin Islands STEP 3. CONFIRM THERMAL ZONE From Figure 3. Thermal(UO)zone map, identify the thermal (UO)zone for the home. N X Verify that the home conforms to the following rules. • No home may be located in an area with a higher thermal zone number than Z that indicated on the data plate. (Example: a home designed for Thermal m Zone 2 cannot be placed in Thermal Zone 3.) n O • A home may be located in a lower thermal zone than that indicated on the X data plate. (Example: a home designed for Thermal Zone 2 may be placed in O either Thermal Zone 2 or 1.). D • In no case may a home designated for installation in the"Humid & Fringe Climate,"as identified on the data plate, be located outside of this region Z (Table 2). Z If the home does not conform to these rules, contact the manufacturer immediately. D r r D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 9 Getting • PFS#°5 Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 WA V1 NH ME Figure 3. Thermal(UO)zone MT NO MN map WY PA T ORIR SD � MI NY RI MA IA C NV NE IL IN DN DE UT CO WV VA J NI 1 2 3 cones u-nme: 0.10 0.096 0.0711 TABLE 2. HUMID AND FRINGE CLIMATE ZONES •. Counties of Baldwin,Barbour,Bullock,Butler,Choctaw,Clarke,Coffee,Conecuh,Covington,Crenshaw, Dale, Escambia,Geneva, Henry,Houston,Lowndes,Marengo,Mobile, Monroe,Montgomery, Pike,Washington,and Wilcox 1 .- All counties and locations . • - Counties of Appling,Atkinson,Bacon,Baker,Ben Hill,Berrien, Brantley,Brooks,Bryan,Calhoun,Camden,Char- leton,Chatham,Clay,Clinch,Coffee,Colquitt,Cook,Crisp,Decatur,Dougherty,Early,Echols, Effingham,Evans, Glynn,Grady, Irwin,Jeff Davis, Lanier,Lee,Liberty,Long,Lowndes,McIntosh, Miller, Mitchell,Pierce,Quitman, Randolph,Seminole,Tattnall,Terrell,Thomas,Tift,Turner,Ware,Wayne,and Worth All counties and locations All counties and locations •. Counties of Adams,Amite,Claiborne,Clarke,Copiah,Covington, Forrest, Franklin,George,Greene, Hancock, Harrison, Hinds, Issaquena,Jackson,Jasper,Jefferson,Jefferson Davis,Jones, Lamar, Lawrence, Lincoln, Marion,Pearl River, Perry,Pike, Rankin,Simpson,Smith,Stone,Walthall,Warren,Wayne,and Wilkinson Counties of Brunswick,Carteret,Columbus, New Hanover,Onslow,and Pender Counties of Beaufort, Berkeley,Charleston,Colleton, Dorchester, Georgetown,and Horry Counties of Anderson,Angelina,Aransas,Atascosa,Austin, Bastrop, Bee, Bexar,Brazoria, Brooks,Burleson, Caldwell,Calhoun,Cameron,Camp,Cass,Chambers,Cherokee, Colorado,Comal, De Witt,Dimmit,Duval, Falls, Fayette, Fort Bend, Franklin, Freestone, Frio,Galveston,Goliad,Gonzales,Gregg,Grimes,Guadalupe,Hardin, Harris, Harrison, Hays, Henderson, Hidalgo, Hopkins, Houston,Jackson,Jasper,Jefferson,Jim Hogg,Jim Wells, Karnes, Kaufman, Kennedy, Kinney, Kleberg, La Salle,Lavaca,Lee,Leon, Liberty,Limestone,Live Oak,Madison, Marion,Matagorda, Maverick, McMullen, Medina,Milam, Montgomery, Morris, Nacogdoches,Navarro,Newton, J Nueces,Orange, Panola,Polk, Rains,Refugio,Robertson, Rusk,Sabine,San Augustine,San Jacinto,San Patri- Q cio,Shelby,Smith,Starr,Titus,Travis,Trinity,Tyler, Upshur, Uvalde,Val Verde,Van Zandt,Victoria,Walker, Z Waller,Washington,Webb,Wharton,Willacy,Williamson,Wilson,Wood,Zapata,and Zavala Q Z STEP 4. CONFIRM ROOF LOAD ZONE O From Table 3, identify the Roof Load Zone for the home.Verify that the home con- forms to the following rules. J • No home may be placed in an area with a higher roof load than that indicated < on the data plate. (Example: a home designed for the South (20 psf) Roof Load Zone cannot be placed in the Middle(30 psf)Roof Load Zone). A home may be located in an area with a lower roof load than that indicated Z on the data plate. (Example: a home designed for the Middle(30 psf) Roof O Load Zone may be placed in the South (20 psf) Roof Load Zone). H There are special high roof load areas(primarily in mountains)not shown on O the map. Contact the LAHJ or SAA for information about these areas.The 0- home's data plate will indicate if the home has been designed for one of these O high roof load areas. U • Ramadas may be used in areas with roof live loads greater than 40 psf. Lu Z Ramadas are to be self-supporting, except that any connection to the home must be for weatherproofing only. Y Cn Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 10 PFRHUDZMHCSS #°5 ® • • nfms to 1/15/09 TABLE 3. ROOF LOADS BY LOCALITY All counties Counties of Aroostook, Piscataquis, Somerset, Penobscot,Waldo. Knox, Hancock,Washington ' • . ..• All counties 1.. . All counties • Counties of: Buena Vista,Butler,Calhoun,Cerro Gordo,Cherokee,Chickasaw,Clay,Dickinson,Emmet, Floyd, Franklin, Hamilton, Hancock, Hardin,Howard, Humboldt, Ida,Kossuth,Lyon, Mitchell,O'Brien,Osceola,Palo Alto, Plymouth, Pocahontas,Sac,Sioux,Webster,Winnebago,Worth,Wright Counties of Androscoggin,Cumberland, Franklin, Kanabec,Lincoln,Oxford,Sagadahoc,York IMassachusetts I County of Essex Michigan Counties of Alger,Alcona,Alpena,Antrim, Baraga, Benzie,Charlevoix,Cheboygan,Chippewa,Crawford,Delta, Dickson, Emmet,Gogebic,Grand Traverse, Houghton, Iron, Kalkaska, Keweenaw, Leelanau,Luce, Mackinac, Marquette,Menominee, Missaukee,Montmorency,Ogemaw,Ontonagon,Oscoda,Otsego,Presque Isle, Ros- common,Schoolcraft,Wexford Minnesota Counties of Aitkin,Anoka,Benton,Blue Earth,Brown,Cass,Carlton,Carver,Chippewa,Chisago,Cook,Cotton- wood,Crow Wing,Dakota, Dodge,Douglas,Faribault,Fillmore,Freeborn,Goodhue,Grant,Hennepin, Hubbard, Itasca, Isanti,Jackson, Kandiyohi,Kanabec,Koochiching,Lac qui Parle, Lake,Le Sueur,Lincoln,Lyon,McLeod, Meeker,Morrison,Millie Lacs,Mower,Martin, Murray,Nicollet,Nobles,Olmsted, Pipestone,Pine,Pope,Ramsey, Redwood,Renville,Rice,Rock,St.Louis,Sibley,Scott,Steele,Sherburne,Swift,Stearns,Stevens,Todd,Wa- dena,Wright,Washington,Wabasha,Winona,Waseca,Watonwan,Yellow Medicine Montana All Counties HampshireNew All Counties New York Counties of Cayuga,Clinton,Essex,Erie, Franklin, Fulton,Genesee, Hamilton, Herkimer,Jefferson,Lewis, Livingston,Madison, Monroe, Montgomery,Niagara,Oneida,Onondaga,Ontario,Orleans,Oswego,St.Lawrence, Saratoga,Schenectady,Seneca,Warren,Washington,Wayne,Wyoming,Yates South Dakota Counties of Brookings,Clay,Codington, Deuel,Grant,Hamlin,Hanson, Hutchinson,Kingsbury,Lake,Lincoln, McCook,Miner,Minnehaha,Moody,Turner,Union,Yankee Utah All Counties VermontCounties of Addison,Caledonia,Chittenden,Essex,Franklin,Grand Isle,Lamoille,Orange,Orleans, Rutland, Washington,Windsor WisconsinCounties of Ashland,Bayfield, Barron, Buffalo, Burnett,Clark,Chippewa, Door, Douglas,Dunn,Eau Claire, Flor- ence, Forest, Iron,Jackson,Langlade, Lincoln, Marathon, Marinette,Menominee,Oconto,Oneida, Pepin, Pierce, Polk,Price, Rusk,St.Croix,Sawyer,Taylor,Trempealeau,Vilas,Washburn W 1 . ' All Counties • The states and counties not listed for the Middle or North roof load zone above are deemed to be within the South m roof load zone. n O X 0 Is the data present and the home placed in the appropriate wind, thermal, X • roof load • D •• to STEP 5, CHECK LOCAL •D O • z z 00, NO, Stop installation• activities• HUD. y r r D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 11 PFS#°5 Getting Stafted Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 STEP 5. CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS Local regulations may set conditions for the siting and installation of a manufactured home. Consult the LAW, state manufactured housing association, and the state SAA (See Resources, p.4)for the specific local requirements, including: Areas subject to flooding. • Building codes that may affect the construction of site built structures and in- The foundation specifica- frastructure. tions contained in this • Local requirements regulating the installation of manufactured homes. manual are NOT intended • Setback requirements for property lines, streets, yards, and courts. to address flood loads. If the home is in the flood • Fire separation distances. plain, consult a registered • Development covenants for the specific property. engineer. • The locations of flood hazard areas and any special foundation requirements for homes installed in those areas. • In some areas, building permits are required to install manufactured homes. Prior to making any alteration to the site and the home, contact the LAW to determine if plan approval and permits are required. 110- .• to • J Q D Z a Z O H Q J J Q H N Z_ Z O Q O a w O U LU Z J Y co Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 12 PFS#05Prepare the Site Conforms to HUD MHCSS P re p a re the Site 1'15/09 A properly prepared site is critical to a good quality installation and the long term structural stability of the home. This chapter explains the process of planning the site, evaluating the soil, and preparing the site for construction of the home's support system. Follow the Stepsbelow: STEP 1. PLAN SITE ACCESS (p. 13) STEP 2. DETERMINE HOME LOCATION AND LAYOUT(p. 13) STEP 3. CLEAR AND GRADE THE SITE (p. 14) STEP 4. DETERMINE SOIL CONDITIONS (p. 14) STEP 5. DETERMINE SOIL BEARING CAPACITY AND FROST LINE (p. 14) STEP 6. DETERMINE GROUND ANCHOR HOLDING CAPACITY(p. 15) STEP 1. PLAN SITE ACCESS Planning the route to the site is typically the responsibility of the retailer or transporta- tion company.Whoever is responsible must secure state permits from the states through which the home will pass. Site Preparation.The home In planning the route, avoid obstructions that might interfere with the passage of the manufacturer has no con- home, such as low hanging wires and trees, low overpasses, and bridges not suitable trol over the site planning for the load. Contact the utility company if wires need to be moved. Do not allow and installation of the home branches, bushes, or other foliage to scrape against the home as the home is moved to unless the manufacturer is the site.Avoid ditches, berms, steep slopes, and soft ground. Identify and fill any holes responsible for the home's and soft spots into which the transporter's wheels may sink.Avoid moving over steep installation. Final responsi- changes in grade(20 degrees or more). bility for site preparation, If required, provide for home storage and staging areas on the site. Plan the delivery including soil stability and and staging of home sections and materials so that after all deliveries are complete, frost heave control, lies with home sections and materials can be accessed for use and installed in the appropriate the installer.An improperly sequence. Orient home sections so they do not have to be rotated or excessively ma- prepared site may result in CA neuvered during the installation process. Plan for temporary needs, such as dump- the denial of a foundation- X sters, portable toilets, crew parking, delivery vehicle drop-offs and concrete mixer de- related warranty claim. liveries. Z m Before moving the manufactured home to the site, inform the LAHJ and make sure the n site is prepared and utilities are available. X a O STEP 2. DETERMINE HOME LOCATION AND LAYOUT The home location may have already been determined by others. If not, plan the home location and layout in compliance with the regulations researched in Getting Started, / Z STEP 5. CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS(p. 8). Contact utilities for Fire separation. Comply Z locations of existing infrastructure, such as underground cables, pipes, and electrical with any LAHJ fire separa- Cn lines. tion requirements or the re- D When planning the site improvements, consider the following: quirements NFPA 501A, D • The home location should be level. 2003 edition (Chapter 6). • Avoid contact with large trees, steep slopes, poorly drained areas, and poten- O Z tial flood zones. 9 • Preserve trees and shrubs for shade, visual screens, and windbreaks. D Z Plan the driveway, parking areas, septic,well, other structures, and utility C lines. 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 13 Prepare the Site 05 4 4 & 0 &;2j Conforms to HUD MHCSS • Consider future additions, such as screen rooms, porches, and awnings. 1f15/09 • Site the home away from natural water paths. STEP 3. CLEAR AND GRADE THE SITE Trim overhanging foliage considering future growth, potential storms, swaying in wind and snow/ice-weighted branches. Remove organic material such as vegetation,wood, / / a roots,twigs, dead branches, grass, and brush from directly under the home. Remove any debris that could become termite infested from the site and surrounding area. Re- Site drainage. Moisture un- move all other debris from the home location, including roots from beneath footing loca- der the home can result in tions. Properly dispose of all items. structural damage to the floor system and other Crown the site (Figure 4)away from the foundation for the first ten feet with a minimum parts of the home. Failure slope of 1/2 inch per foot.Where property lines,walls, slopes, or other physical condi- to provide adequate tions prohibit this slope, provide the site with drains, swales, or grading to drain water slope/drainage can result in away from the structure.Any fill required to grade the site should be inorganic"con- moisture-related problems trolled fill"applied in a maximum of four inch layers, compacted between each layer to such as mold, mildew, and at least 90%of its maximum relative density. Direct runoff away from the site using erosion. ditches and berms(Figure 5). If the home will have skirting, start grading from two feet in from the edge of the home. Figure 4. Crown the soil un- der the home to prevent wa- ter ponding Figure 5. Direct runoff away L from the home `'► House � y � y y yyyy Arrows Indicate direction of water flow. Grade the ground so that water under porches, decks, and recessed entries flows away from the home. If proper grading is not possible, use other methods such as a J drain tile and automatic sump pump system to remove any water that may collect un- der the home. Z < The home is suitable for the installation of gutters and downspouts.When gutters and downspouts are installed, direct runoff away from the home. Z O H Q J Q STEP 4. DETERMINE SOIL CONDITIONS N Examine the soil type under the proposed home location to make sure it is suitable for Z placement of a home. The design of the home's support system, including footing/pier / // Z spacing and size,will in part be determined by the bearing capacity of the soil, and if Soil. Inadequate soil bearing O ground anchors are used, by the soil's withdrawal strength. � capacity or a support sys- The soil under every portion of the support system must meet the following criteria: tem mismatched to the soil 0 • The soil must be firm and undisturbed (not previously excavated)or fill com- characteristics can result in a pacted to at least 90%of its maximum relative density. Uncompacted fill will excessive or differential 0 settlement of the home, settle over time, causing the home to shift and become unlevel. which can cause the home U • Fill must not contain large debris.This too will settle over time. to go out of level, resulting LU Z_ 0 The soil must not be comprised of organic clays or peat. Organic material can in jammed doors and win- decay, causing settlement, and also may harbor pests that can infest the dows, cracks in finishes Yhome. and ruptured plumbing U) connections. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 14 Prepare • The water table must be below the lowest level of the planned support sys- PFS#°5 tem/foundation.A soil's bearingcapacity can be greatly reduced when it is coD MH to p y g y xun Mxcss saturated with water. Note that water tables may vary with seasonal or cli- 1/15/09 mactic conditions. Consult a geologist or the LAHJ if you are unsure of the water table level. • The soil must not be a highly expansive type. Expansive soils can expand when they become saturated with water, causing the home to shift and be- come unlevel. If soils are expansive, contact a registered engineer, or regis- tered architect to assist with the design of the foundation system. Does the soil meet these criteria? 11110- YES, •• to STEP 5, DETERMINE SOIL FROST • 01,- NO, Consult a registered engineer, registered architect, or geologist t determine a suitable soil bearing capacity. STEP 5. DETERMINE SOIL-BEARING CAPACITY AND FROST LINE The soil under a home must be capable of withstanding the loads imposed by the weight of the home, its support system and furnishings, as well as any loads imposed by wind, snow, or other climactic conditions. Soil bearing capacity. Sup- SOIL-BEARING CAPACITY port systems on soils with Determine the soil-bearing capacity in pounds per square foot(psf)before designing a bearing capacities less than support system.The higher the capacity(psf),the more weight the soil can hold without 1,000 psf must be designed unduly compressing.As the soil-bearing capacity increases,footings can be reduced in by a registered engineer or size or spaced farther apart. registered architect and approved by the LAHJ. Use one or more of the following methods to determine the site's soil bearing capacity: Limitations of pocket pene- • Test the soil. Hire a registered geologist, registered engineer, or registered trometers. Pocket pene- architect to determine the soil classification and maximum allowable soil bear- trometers do not work on ing capacity by testing the soil in accordance with generally accepted engi- sand or gravel. Use Table neering practice. 4 to determine allowable • Obtain soil records.The local office of the U.S. Department of Agriculture's pressure for these types of Natural Resources Conservation Service(www.soils.usda.ciov)and/or the soils. If you encounter a N LAHJ may have test results and/or soil analyses on file for the area. layer of gravel, test the soil X under the gravel. Do not • Conduct a pocket penetrometer test. Use a pocket penetrometer to esti- r put the penetrometer on mate allowable soil-bearing capacity as follows: stones larger than its tip as m 1. Select a location that will be under a footing. this will provide an inaccu- 0 2. Clear an area of a minimum of one square foot at least four inches deep rate reading. 0 W or to the depth of the bottom of the planned footing. O 3. Using the instructions provided with the pocket penetrometer,take at W least five readings. > 4. Discard the high and low readings and average the remaining readings. p Round this result down to the nearest soil-bearing value shown in the Z right column of Table 4. Z 5. Confirm that the rounded result matches the soil description on Table 4. D • Determine soil-bearing value by visual examination. If one of the options r above is not available,the values on Table 4 can be used to establish soil- y bearing capacity by visual examination.This method provides lower capacity values than the options above.Accurate soil identification typically requires 0 special training or expertise.An engineer or building code official may be able Z to assist in classifying the soil found on the site. 3 D Z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 15 Prepare TABLE 4.SOIL-BEARING CAPACITY BY SOIL TYPE PFS#°5 Conforms to Soil Type(and classification) Allowable Pressure(psf) HUD MHCSS Rock or hard pan(class 1) 4,000 1/15/09 Sandy gravel and gravel;very dense and/or cemented sands; 2,000 course gravel/cobbles; preloaded silts,clays and coral(class 2) Sand;silty sand;clayey sand;silty gravel; medium dense course 1,500 sands;sandy gravel;very stiff silt,sand clays(class 3) Clay,sandy clay,silty clay,clayey silt(classes 4A and 413) 1,000 Uncompacted fill,peat,organic clays(class 5) Professional testing required Note to table:No allowances made for overburden pressure,embedment depth,water table height,or settlement problems. • Use default capacity. Use an allowable pressure of 1,500 psf, unless site- specific information requires the use of lower values based on soil classifica- tion and type according to Table 4. Note that soil types may vary across a home site. In this case, the soil with the lowest bearing capacity should be assumed when designing the support system. Keep a re- cord of the soil-bearing capacity value; it will be used later to design the home's sup- port system. FROST LINE In climates subject to ground freezing, consult the LAHJ, a registered engineer, or reg- istered architect to determine the depth of the frost line. Figure 6 may be used as a guideline when there is no specific local determination. Keep a record of the frost depth; it will be used later to design the home's support system. 1' 2' Figure 6.Average frost 3 4'5'67' 7' 6'5' penetration depth (in feet) 4' 3. 0' 3' 3' 2' Q — 1' Z Q 0' Z O H Q J J N Z_ Will this installationuse auger-type ground anchors? ZYES, •• to STEP 6, DETERMINE GROUND • ' HOLDING _O 0 • .• • • i ' O a Torque Probe. Before using O STEP 6. DETERMINE GROUND ANCHOR HOLDING CAPAC- the torque probe, check wITY with the utility companies Z for the location of under- ) When using auger-type ground anchors to tie down the home,first, use a torque probe ground cables or pipes to >_ to determine the anchor-holding strength of the soil on the site. avoid contact with the U) Use a torque probe with a shaft of sufficient length to test the soil at the depth of the probe shaft. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 16 Prepare PFSanchor #° helical plate.Augur the probe into the ground, and following the probe manufac- 5 turer's instructions, take the torque wrench reading in the area where the anchors will � be installed and at the depth of the anchor helix. If the soil varies in consistency across Conforms to the site,then use the lowest reading. Based on this reading, consult the anchor manu- HUD MHCss facturer's charts to select the anchor type(s). 1/15/09 What •- of ••• installation 1110- For load-bearing perimeter wall, go to Construct Foundation, (p. 28) 00- For pier and ground anchor, go to Install Footings, (p. 18) X r z m n O X a O X D O z z Cn D r r D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 17 Install Footings Conforms to HUD MHCSS Install Footings 1/15/09 This chapter provides instructions for the design and construction of individual footings that transfer the load from a single pier to the ground.A footing and pier together(discussed in Set the Home)is referred to as a"support."A footing may also be designed to carry the load of multiple piers(often called "strip"footings). The design of strip footings is not cov- ered in this manual. Follow the Steps • • STEP 1. DESIGN POINT LOAD SUPPORTS(p. 18) STEP 2. DESIGN FRAME SUPPORTS(Homes Without Perimeter Blocking)(p. 21) STEP 3. DESIGN FRAME AND PERIMETER SUPPORTS(Homes With Perimeter Blocking)(p.22) STEP 4.SELECT FOOTING MATERIALS(p. 23) STEP 5.SIZE FOOTINGS(p. 23) STEP 6. INSTALL FOOTINGS (p. 26) STEP 1. DESIGN POINT LOAD SUPPORTS All homes will need supports, and therefore footings, under the frame, marriage line (for multi-section homes), exterior wall openings and other heavy point loads. The home manufacturer may have provided a blocking diagram (or tags, labels, paint High roof loads. For roof or other markings under the home) indicating the required locations and/or loads for loads of 40 psf or greater, perimeter, marriage line and/or frame supports specifically for this home. If so,the dia- a registered engineer or gram or tags take precedence over the directions provided in this manual. registered architect must Create a sketch of the home that includes the exterior walls,the frame 1-beams and the determine the maximum marriage line(s), if a multi-section home. The sketch will be used in this chapter to lo- marriage wall opening cate each support, and note the size of the corresponding footing. Figure 7 is an ex- permitted without pier or ample of such a support plan. other supports. Door Piers Figure 7. Example of sup- (i f Blocking Piers Z I-Beam Frame Members(if required) port plan J Q Z Frame Piers Z Q E3 E3 El El El El El El Marriage Wall Piers IR — Q J J t— U) o c I-Beam Frame Frame Piers Z_ Z O El El 13 El El El El 0 Porch Post Piers V Perimeter Blocking Piers d Door Piers IX (if required) O V As the location and load for each support is determined, note it on the sketch. When Lu Z selecting locations for supports, keep In mind that increasing the spacing between su Z g pp p� 9 p 9 p- ports will increase the load on that support and the size of the required footing. Y co Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 18 Install Footings #°5 DETERMINE LOCATIONS PFS Point loads exist where a bearing/structural weight is concentrated and transferred to conforms to the foundation at a specific point. Locate a support under each point load, including the HUD MHCSS following examples: 1n5/09 • Exterior doors on side walls at both sides of each door(blocking is not re- quired at exterior doors on non-bearing end walls). • Other exterior wall openings four feet and greater at both sides of each open- ing (including multiple windows that total four feet wide or more without inter- mediate supports, even if individual windows are less than four feet). • Marriage line openings four feet or greater at both sides of each opening. • Locations where through-the-rim crossover ducts penetrate the rim joist at the marriage line and perimeter blocking is required (not required if the home is constructed with a perimeter frame system). • Marriage line columns. • Load-bearing porch posts. • Under heavy(400 Ibs or greater)items, such as heavy furniture,waterbeds, fireplaces and large fish tanks. Mark the required point load support locations on the sketch. Supports are not required where the manufacturer has reinforced the floor(such as with additional outriggers or floor joists)and so noted in the documentation provided with the home. Figure 8 and Figure 9 identify typical point load support locations. Door Piers Figure 8. Typical point-load I-Beam Frame support locations Marriage Wall Piers N X r_ oc z m n O X U O D Porch Post Piers p Door Piers z Z Cn D r r D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 19 FootingsInstall PF J Conforms to HUD MHCSS—, 1/15/09 Door or opening less Figure 9. Typical point-load than 48"in width Combined span A+B support locations along the Ride Beam marriage line Column post or wall less than 16"in width YITI I�EC� Span D Span C S an B Span A i------L-L 11 .1 if PE19600312 • • ...w.:.,.,':;<.Main :w:.:: . -- "� �;�;�� � ,9' STATE OF '�Q- _________ __ € -Beam __ _ _ P. .o•• D N . for _ IA Footing Footings sized forespectively.r spans(Note C�—=w ~Footings�w Footinzedg w = Footsizeding -- Mry Footing � ......... �sized � _....._.. i� cis ' G \� sized SpanfD wiwallisessthan16"in Spansized for :.................. Span Br Sp nA+B Span fAr /411"3/ONA'tEN\����� ed C+D with a single pier) Q Jeffrey T.Legault /! 2009.01.09 CALCULATE LOADS / 11:26:23-05'00' Use Table 5 to determine the loads on point-load supports. For each support,find the columns with the appropriate roof load zone and section width. Find the row(s)corre- sponding to the span (see Figure 9 for guidance on determining spans). The number in the columns under the"W and "i headings are the loads for supports along the marriage line and perimeter respectively(point loads in the center of a sec- tion, i.e. not along a marriage line or perimeter wall, require the load in the"i column). Interpolation for openings between those shown in the table is permitted. Note the required loads next to each point load support on the sketch. TABLE 5. LOAD ON POINT-LOAD FOOTINGS Roof loacizoneand maximum section width riiiii 1111111111 Jill 11 Jillr 1010 720 1100 770 1200 830 1250 860 1370 930 1500 1000 1490 1000 1640 1090 1800 1180 I�I1720 1130 1900 1240 2100 1350 2200 1410 2440 1560 2700 1700 2670 1690 2970 1870 3300 2050 J I®I 2430 1550 2700 1710 3000 1880 3140 1960 3500 2180 3900 2400 3850 2380 4300 2650 4800 2930 Q ImI3140 -- 3500 -- 3900 -- 4090 -- 4570 -- 5100 -- 5040 -- 5640 -- 6300 -- Z 3850 4300 4800 5040 5640 6300 6220 6970 7800 I� 4560 5100 5700 5980 6700 7500 7400 -- 8300 9300 O J M=Marriage line, P=Perimeter Q H U) Determine from the data plate and/or other documents if the home re- quires perimeter blocking. Z O perimeter blocking • required, •• to STEP 2, DESIGN FRAME SUPPORTS (Homes Without Perimeter Blocking), 121). Ill If perimeter blocking is required, go to STEP 3, DESIGN FRAME d AND PERIMETER SUPPORTS • • • IlY O • L) W Z J Y Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 20 PF S #05 Install . otings conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 STEP 2. DESIGN FRAME SUPPORTS (Homes Without Pe- rimeter Blocking) � , // DETERMINE LOCATIONS All homes require regularly spaced supports along all main frame I-beams. Select spacing between supports and sketch them on the support plan. Keep in mind that Spacing frame supports. frame supports under homes with 8"deep 1-beams may be no more than eight feet There must be a support apart. Those under homes with 10"or 12"deep 1-beams may be no more than 10 feet located near the end of apart. Generally, greater distances between supports will require larger footings. each I-beam such that there is no more than 12 Figure 10 shows typical frame support locations. inches of beam past the edge of the support. Door Piers Figure 10. Typical support I-Beam Frame Members locations for homes not re- quiring regularly spaced pe- rimeter supports 0 w— Frame Piers Marriage Wall Piers o c I-Beam Frame Frame Piers Porch Post Piers \\�����liiiiiirrrr��� Door Piers . EY T:LFQ�j CALCULATE LOADS P � � X Use Table 6 to determine the loads on frame supports. Find the column with the ap- _ PE19600312 _ r— propriate roof load zone and section width. Find the row corresponding to the selected _ i _ Z support spacing.The number in the intersecting cell is the load. STATE OF �Q` m n Loads on all frame supports can be assumed to beequal if support spacing is equal. �'%O� ./NDIAN?::'��' O However, if different support spacings are used then each support with a different ��''�i `SS'/ONAt � spacing should be calculated separately. ��hrrrl���i�11����` O JeffreyT.Legault D Note the location and load required of each support on the sketch. 2009.01.0911:2611- 05,00, TABLE 6. LOAD ON FRAME SUPPORTS FOR HOMES NOT REQUIRING PERIMETER BLOCKING Z Roof load zone and max.section width Z Middlei i Cn r 2460 2720 3000 2740 3030 3350 3020 3350 3700 > 3540 3930 4340 3960 4400 4870 4380 4870 5390 0 4620 5130 5690 5180 5760 6390 5740 6390 7090 Z 1 5700 6340 7030 6400 7120 7910 7100 7910 8780 D Z C D •• to STEP 4. SELECT FOOTING • r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 21 PFS#°5 Install FootingsConforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 STEP 3. DESIGN FRAME AND PERIMETER SUPPORTS (Homes With Perimeter Blocking) DETERMINE LOCATIONS Depending on design and location, some homes require regularly spaced perimeter supports along all of the sidewalls and marriage walls in addition to frame supports. This will be indicated on the data plate and/or documents included with the home. Spacing frame supports. If required, perimeter supports are only needed on bearing walls. Bearing walls are There must be a supportlocated near the end of those walls that support the ends of roof trusses or rafters(typically sidewalls and mar- each I-beam such that riage walls but not end walls of main units or sidewalls of tag units). there is no more than 12 To minimize the number of required perimeter supports, space them evenly between inches of beam past the point load supports as shown in Figure 11 and Figure 12 (but not under spans).These edge of the support. figures identify typical support locations for homes requiring perimeter supports. Door Piers Figure 11. Typical support Perimeter Blocking Piers I-Beam Frame Members locations for homes requiring \\i perimeter supports Frame Piers Marriage Wall Piers o I-Beam Frame Frame Piers V I Porch Post Piers Pe/rim eter Blocking Piers Door Piers QFigure 12. Typical marriage Door or opening less Combined span A+B Z line support locations for than 48"in width homes requiring perimeter QRidge Rearn supports OColumn post or wall _ less than 16"in width Q J Span C Span B f San A QMain 1-1 eam fn Z Z _ -c.V �. ." O _ =; " marriage tine, -= Footings Marriage line Footing Footing _ Footing ._.w ww._.--. Q supports sized for """""""""" support sized for sized for sized for Span C Span B Span A+B Span A O a O CALCULATE LOADS V Use Table 7 to determine the loads on frame and perimeter supports for homes requir- w z ing perimeter blocking. Find the column with the appropriate roof load (Table 3)and section width. Find the group of rows corresponding to the selected support spacing. YThe values in the intersecting cells are the loads for the frame, perimeter, and marriage rn line supports respectively. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 22 PFS#°5 ® Install Footings Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 "pt�uunrpip Loads on supports of a given type (frame, perimeter, or marriage)can be assumed to \`�FPEY T:Le, q�'��,, be equal if support spacing is equal. However, if different support spacings are used 13 ;Q�o�sTFq IS then each support with a different spacing should be calculated separately. PE19600312 '; = Note the location and load required of each support on the sketch. S,9`;; STATE OF �.!NpIANp 'c�� NOS`\ J0M.01. egault \ n 11 25 1.OB NAL �``� F ��:zs:ss-os1oo. TABLE 7. LOAD ON FRAME AND PERIMETER SUPPORTS FOR HOMES REQUIRING PERIMETER BLOCKING Roof load zone and max.section width 0 . 1210 1360 1440 1210 1360 1440 1210 1360 1440 1530 1660 1850 1810 1970 2200 2090 2290 2550 2460 2720 3110 2940 3270 3730 3410 3810 4350 1660 1890 2010 1660 1890 2010 1660 1890 2010 2150 2340 2630 2560 2810 3150 3000 3280 3680 3540 3930 4510 4250 4750 5440 4960 5570 6370 2110 2410 2580 2110 2410 2580 2110 2410 2580 2760 3020 3400 3310 3640 4100 3870 4270 4800 21111 4620 5130 5910 5570 6230 7150 6520 7320 8390 MIIIIII 2560 2940 3150 2560 2940 3150 2560 2940 3150 3370 3690 4180 4070 4480 5050 4760 5260 5930 5700 6340 7310 6890 7710 8860 8070 9070 10410 STEP 4. SELECT FOOTING MATERIAL Select one of the products and materials from Table 8 for the footings. TABLE 8. FOOTING MATERIALS Specification Minimum 6"thick poured-in-place concrete pads,slabs,or ribbons with at least a 28 Poured concrete All soil types day compressive strength of 3,000 psi.Cast-in-place concrete footings may also require reinforcing steel based on acceptable engineering practice,the design N loads,and site specific soil conditions. X Minimum 4"thick nominal precast concrete pads meeting or exceeding ASTM C r Pre-cast concrete All soil types 90-02a,Standard Specification for Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units,without Z reinforcement,with at least a 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi. M Use in accordance with the pad manufacturer's instructions.Must be certified for O ABS plastic Stable soils use in the soil classification at the site,listed and labeled for the required load ca- X pacity. O Proprietary systems Consult system manufac Consult system manufacturer. D turer O z footingsWill Z Cn .. . STEP 5, SIZE FOOTING, D • see footinginstructions. For on—grade r footings, the ground moisture barrier may be installed now—see Complete Exterior Work, STEP 2. INSTALL i , D GROUND • 0 RETARDER • • •• to • Frost protection.When se- Z lecting footing materials, D STEP 5. SIZE FOOTINGS bear in mind the need for z frost protection. Not all foot- C Once the load on the footing and the soil-bearing capacity are known, calculate the ing materials are suitable r size of each footing as follows: for freezing climates. 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 23 Install Footings 1. From Table 9 determine if the pier is to be of single-stack blocks(8 inch x16 PFS#°5 inch)or double-stack blocks(16 inch x 16 inch)pier. Conforms to 2. Locate the group of rows in Table 10 with the soil-bearing capacity deter- HUD MHCSs mined in Prepare the Site, STEP 5. DETERMINE SOIL-BEARING CAPAC- vi5/09 ITY AND FROST LINE(p. 15). Use the next lowest value if the exact value does not appear. 3. Read across the table to determine the minimum required footing area and the minimum footing thickness for the corresponding footing type(single or double-stacked blocks). 4. The required footing size may be changed by selecting another support spac- ing (Table 6 or Table 7). TABLE 9. PIER CONFIGURATION Pier Ioca- Configuration tion ... Pesssn 36 in(except corner Single-stack blocks with long side 8,000 lbs. piers more than 3 blocks high) perpendicular to I-beam Frame Between 36 in and 67 in and cor- Double, interlocked blocks 16,000 lbs. ner piers over 3 blocks high Over 67 in Double,interlocked blocks 16,000 lbs. 54 in or less Single-stack blocks with long side 8,000 lbs. parallel to perimeter rail(rim joist) 54 in or less Single-stack blocks with long side g,000 lbs. perpendicular to the marriage line J Q Z Q Z O H Q J J Q t— U) Z_ Z O Q O a O L) LU Z J Y co Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 24 PFS#°5 Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 TABLE 10. FOOTING DIMENSIONS .. . . Maximum footing capacity(lbs) 256 16 x 16 4 800 4 800 512 16 x 32 4 1600 4 - 1600 324 18 x 18 4 1010 4 1010 400 20 x 20 4 1250 1250 576 24 x 24 4 1800 4 1800 900 30 x 30 4 2810 2810 256 16 x 16 4 1680 4 1680 512 16 x 32 4 3370 3370 324 18 x18 4 2130 4 2130 1000 400 20 x 20 4 2630 ,� 2630 576 24 x 24 4 3800 4 3800 900 30 x 30 4 5930 5930 ;1256 16 x16 4 2570 4 2570 512 16 x 32 4 5150 4 5150 324 18 x 18 4 3260 4 3260 1500 00 20 x 20 4 4020 4 4020 4 1576 24 x 24 4 5800 4 5800 900 30 x 30 6 8000 8910 256 16 x 16 4 3460 4 3460 512 16 x 32 6 6840 6 6840 324 18 x 18 4 4380 4 4380 2000 400 20 x 20 4 5410 4 5410 576 24 x 24 6 7700 6 7700 900 30 x 30 6 8000 6 12030 256 16 x 16 4 4350 4 4350 N 512 16 x 32 6 8000 6 8620 X 324 18 x18 4 5510 4 5510 r 00 Z 400 20 x 20 4 6800 4 6800 rn 576 24 x 24 6 8000 6 9700 n O 900 30 x 30 8 8000 8 15000 X 256 16 x 16 4 5240 4 5240 0 512 16 x 32 6 8000 6 10400 > 324 18 x 18 4 6630 4 6630 0 400 20 x 20 4 8000 4 8190 Z Z 576 24 x 24 6 8000 6 11700 (p 900 30 x 30 8 8000 8 16000 D Note:The capacity values listed have been reduced b the dead load of the concrete footin r gfootingspy p Y 9 y q 9 �� �P��S EFG�''',�' D Design to comply with the following additional requirements: F G • Design each footing at least slightly larger than the base of the pier it sup- pE19600312 = Z ports. • To keep footings directly under 1-beams and other support points, size them S 9';. STATE OF :; Q Z slightly larger than the minimum required area to allow slight adjustment of °�'•.. P.'N��t'�.' C the pier location during home installation. ,'''��s`S�oWAIENG�``�` D • Design footings with a footing extension (projection beyond the base of the Q , Jeffrey T.Legault �F 0 , 09 11:25:36 - /- 05,0000 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 25 Install Footings PFS#°5 Conforms to%00 HUD MHCSS pier)no greater than the footing thickness(Figure 13). Increase footing thick- 1/15/09 ness if necessary. Figure 13. Maximum footing extensions 16"Block 4" 6" 4 T 4= T'p' 24„ Footing Extends Extends By More 16" 16" NO YES By ItsThickness NO Than Its Thickness 24" 16" Or Less Y ES�r5 4" 8" 4" 4" Split Footing Extends 1.� Split Footing Extends YES Less Than One Third NO More Than One Third Its Width I is Width • The footing sizes shown are for square pads and are based on the surface area (square inches) Design non-square footings such that the area and depth is equal to or greater than the area and depth of the square footing shown in Table 10, and the distance from the edge of the pier to the edge of the footing is not more than the thickness of the footing. • For four-inch thick unreinforced precast concrete footings, use the minimum footing size for the six-inch cast-in-place footing from Table 10. STEP 6. INSTALL FOOTINGS Construct the footings as follows: • Maintain the distance between adjacent piers to within 10%of the tabulated / • // spacing and so the average distance between any adjacent spans is equal to Placing Concrete anchors. or less than the tabulated spacing. If anchors will be placed in • Whenever possible, place point load supports directly under the required lo- concrete,follow instructions cations. If plumbing, electrical, mechanical equipment interferes, place sup- in Install Stabilizing Sys- ports no more than 6 inches in either direction of the support point. tem (p. 65)to determine • Recess perimeter blocking supports and perimeter point load supports no anchor layout. Either place more than 10 inches from the edge of the floor with added support as shown anchors immediately after J the concrete has been Q in Figure 14. D poured or drill them in after ZQ the concrete has set. 4x4 Or 2-2x4'S On Edge(Nailed Figure 14. Perimeter sup- Z O Together)Spanning Minimum2 ports Ex*rorWallFloor Joists H Q J J Q H Floor Rim Plate Z Typical FloorJofst Z 0Pier � Pier Q O a O V 10"Max Setback LU From Edge Of Floor Z J Y co Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 26 PF S#°5 ® Install Footing Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 • If footings are rectangular, orient them so that the long side is perpendicular to the home's I-beam. • Place the bottom of footings on undisturbed soil or fill compacted to at least 90%of its maximum relative density. Excavation. If • In freezing climates protect footings from the effects of frost heave in accor- excavation is required, mark dance with any LAW requirements(see Prepare the Site, p. 13). Place the the footing locations on the bottom of the footings below the frost line(insulated foundations and mono- ground with stakes before lithic slabs are other frost protection options not covered in this manual). beginning to dig. • Make sure the top surface of the footing is level,flat, and smooth. • In accordance with the American Concrete Institute publication ACI-308, maintain curing measures before construction or installation onto the concrete footing begins, until a minimum of 70%of the specified 28-day compressive strength has been achieved.The ACI recommended time to attain this level of strength is seven days for ASTM C150 Type 1 mixtures and 10 days for Type II mixtures. Full design live and dead loads may not be applied until the 28- day duration has elapsed for achieving full strength. •• to Set the Home • 1 N X r z m n O X U O D O z z Cn D r r D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 27 ConstructPFS#05 • • • Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Construct Foundation (FOR HOMES WITH LOAD-BEARING PERIMETER WALL) This chapter provides guidelines and recommendations for the design and construction of a basement or crawlspace foundation using a load-bearing perimeter wall.A load-bearing perimeter wall foundation system uses a wall along the outer edge of the home to support the home's outside walls. This perimeter support works with interior supports such as piers, columns, and cross beams that support the home's frame and, if multi-section, marriage line. Follow the Steps • - • STEP 1.OBTAIN A FOUNDATION DESIGN (p. 28) STEP 2. EXCAVATE (p. 28) STEP 3.CONSTRUCT THE FOOTING OR SLAB (p. 28) STEP 4. CONSTRUCT THE PERIMETER WALL(p. 28) STEP 5. INSTALL INTERIOR SUPPORTS(p.29) STEP 6.WATERPROOF FOUNDATION WALL(p.29) STEP 7. BACKFILL AND GRADE(p. 29) STEP 1. OBTAIN A FOUNDATION DESIGN If a load-bearing perimeter wall foundation design has not been provided by the home manufacturer, it is the responsibility of the retailer and/or home owner to provide a de- / /Z sign approved by an engineer or architect, licensed in the state where the home will be installed.The approved design must comply with the LAHJ regulations for foundation Using engineered designs. in- design,waterproofing, and drainage, and the following: This section is NOT tended to provide a com- • The foundation perimeter bearing wall must be supported with a concrete slab plete design for a buildable or continuous strip footing around the perimeter of the home. Interior piers foundation. A complete must be supported by a slab or footings. If footings are used under interior design must be obtained piers,they may be designed as in Prepare Footings, p. 18. that is suitable for the local • Slabs must extend to the edges of the home. area and sealed by a pro- _j • Footings and slabs must be protected from the effects of frost heave by ex- fessional engineer or regis- tered architect, licensed in D tending the footings to or below the frost line or by using a frost protected the state. Z shallow foundation design. Q Foundation ready home. Make sure that homes to z STEP 2. EXCAVATE be installed on a basement O Excavate for the foundation, properly disposing of the earth that is not needed for H or a crawlspace have been Q backfill or site-grading purposes. ordered with a recessed J frame or as foundation- STEP 3. CONSTRUCT THE FOOTINGS OR SLAB ready, where the frame is ZConstruct the foundation according to the approved design, including the perimeter designed to avoid interfer- foundation wall, drainage system,footing(s), and/or slab. ence with the foundation Z wall. O STEP 4. CONSTRUCT THE PERIMETER WALL Checking the water table. W Unless the approved design requires otherwise, construct the perimeter wall with mor- For basements, check for a O tared and reinforced concrete blocks or reinforced poured-in-place concrete. Install re- high water table.The water a table may vary seasonally W inforcement according to the approved design or LAHJ. Install ventilation and access O openings according to the approved design, or if not specified, according to the re- 0 quirements in Complete Under the Home, STEP 3 INSTALL SKIRTING (p. 97). tions.A geologist can per- w form an algae test to de- Z When constructing pockets for an H-beam system, measure the beam depth and lo- termine the water table J cate the pockets carefully. It is critical that when the home's frame rests on top of the level. The foundation de- H-beam,the perimeter of the floor rests squarely on the foundation wall sill plate Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 28 PFS#05 Construct Conforms to Foundation HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 (Figure 15). Leave room for a two-inch nominal, pressure treated wood spacer on top sign must account for a of the wall pockets(to prevent corrosion,the steel beams must not be in direct contact high water table. with concrete). Leave at least one inch for thermal expansion at the ends of the beams Level the wall. Make sure and maintain a minimum of two inches of bearing area for the beams in the pockets the foundation is level and (yielding a minimum pocket depth of three inches). straight with no more than a Bolt a pressure treated wood sill plate (minimum 2 x 6)to the top of the foundation 1/4 inch vertical variation wall. If the home's siding cannot be nailed through, use a 2 x 10 sill plate that extends over the entire foundation into the foundation 1-1/4 inches(Figure 16).The home can then be connected to the and no more than 1/8 inch foundation by fastening the sill plate into the floor joists from below. Connect the home vertical variation over any to the foundation according to the approved design. Recess nuts into the sill plate and two-foot length. cut off the ends of bolts so they do not project above the sill plate and interfere with the Check for Plates.When us- placement of the home. ing an H-beam system, check and compensate for reinforcement plates that add thickness to the chas- sis beam at axle locations. 77711 Figure 15. H-beam installa- tion Floor Floor Joist Figure 16. Connection using Pressure 2 X 10 sill late Treated /� Chassis Sill Plate ..in I-Beam - 2 x 10 a. Sill Plate TransvJPlate . _ H-bea Fastener Limits of exca- P a vation.When a crane will Treat8 x 8 x 18-inchConcrete Block - - be used, excavate no more a - Foundation Wall than two feet outside the 4" foundation perimeter. Un- excavated ground will pro- STEP 5. INSTALL INTERIOR SUPPORTS vide a more stable base for the crane. Install piers, columns and H-beams to support the interior of the home according to the approved design. Footing heights. Pour foot- ings to a height that will re- STEP 6. DAMP PROOF FOUNDATION WALL duce the need to cut blocks or shim when building peri- Damp proof the foundation wall no less than up to the height of the planned backfill. meter walls and piers. U) X Is this a basement foundation? V&OZZA m • •• to . Backfilling. Backfill against O basement walls only after 0 the home is connected to 0 STEP 7. BACKFILL AND GRADE the foundation or the 0 Backfill against the foundation wall to the height of the damp proofing.Take care to not basement walls may deflect D damage the drainage system. Grade the fill as per Prepare the Site(p. 13). inward or collapse. O z Does the approved foundation design call for groundZ . CD . • .. • r D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 29 Set the Home PFS#�5 Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Set the Home This chapter describes the process of installing the first section of the home(for single section homes this is the only sec- tion)onto the foundation. Follow the Steps • • STEP 1. PREPARE FOR SET(p. 30) STEP 2. POSITION HOME SECTION (p. 30) STEP 3. LIFT HOME(p. 30) STEP 4.CONSTRUCT PIERS(p. 32) STEP 1. PREPARE FOR SET Before beginning the home set, complete the following: • Confirm that the site is properly cleared and graded (see Prepare the Site, p. / • / A 13. Clearances under the • Ensure that the footings are in place and properly located. home.After the home is • Install any utilities that will be difficult to install (e.g.those below grade be- leveled,the resulting dis- neath the home)after the home is in place. tance between the bottom of the entire chassis main • Secure or remove from the home and properly store all ship loose items(refer frame beam and the to shipping documents for items shipped with the home). ground must be no less • Inspect the home interior, exterior and all provided materials, appliances, and than 12 inches. equipment. Immediately report any damage or shortages to the manufacturer. Utilize proper cribbing. • The ground moisture retarder may be installed now or after the home is com- Manufactured homes plete. See Complete Exterior Work, STEP 2. INSTALL GROUND MOIS- weigh several tons. No TURE RETARDER(p. 96)for requirement and then return here. one should be under the home (whether it is mov- For perimeter bearing wall foundations: ing or stationary)unless • Check that the length and width of the home match with the foundation walls. proper cribbing is in place (Figure 17). Failure to util- • Check that the two main diagonal measurements of the foundation are equal. ize proper cribbing may • Check that the foundation walls and other support points are within 1/4 inch of result in serious injury or Q level overall and within 1/8 inch of level within any four foot distance. death. Z9 For multi-section homes, check that each pair of diagonal measurements for each portion of the foundation corresponding to a home section are equal. Z 9 For multi-section homes,find the electrical bonding lugs on the front or rear p outriggers. Reverse them to the inside of the outrigger using star washers so Qthey will be accessible after the home is placed on the foundation walls. J If using an H-beam system, remove the frame's shackle hanger if it will inter- @Leveling during Q fere with proper placement of the beam. jacking. Keep the home's floor as level as possible co ? STEP 2. POSITION HOME SECTION during jacking. Twisting or warping Position the home section in its final location (if possible, move the heaviest section of warping the floor can dam- p age the structure and finish- the home into place first).Then place materials needed to construct support piers near ing. Use as many jacks as Q their final locations under the home as determined in Prepare Footings, (p. 18). necessary to keep the floor a flat and level. STEP 3. LIFT HOME p There are three primary methods available to place the home on the foundation:jack- C) ing, rolling and craning. Jacks, often with roller systems, are typically used for pier and w anchor foundations; roller systems are commonly used for crawlspace foundations with Z t load-bearing perimeter walls; and cranes are most commonly used for basement foun- >_ dations. Y co Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 30 Set the Home JACKS J AMP bA"SFj #05 If jacks are to be used, comply with all jacking safety precautions and the procedure below. Lifting the home with jacks involves potential risks and must be done with ut- conforms to most care and caution. Failure to follow jacking warnings and procedures may result in xun MIfcss serious injury or death. Please read the Jacking Safety Precautions before lifting the 1/15/09 home with jacks. PRECAUTIONSJACKING SAFETY • No one should be under the home's I-beams while the jacks are being oper- ated or while the home is supported only on the jacks. • Use jacks only for raising the home. Do not rely on the jacks to support the home. • If possible, raise the home only on one side so that the other side is in contact with the ground. Leave the hitch connected to the vehicle or other stabilizing equipment. • Obey all OSHA regulations. • Make sure adequate safety cribbing (Figure 17)is in place whenever the home is placed on jacks. • Use a minimum of two commercial quality jacks, each with a rating of at least 12 tons. • Jack only on the main chassis I-beam, centering jacks directly under the beam. • Do not jack on a seam (joint between flanges of twin 1-beams). • To distribute the concentrated loads from jacks to I-beam, place a minimum 3/8-inch thick steel plate, a C-channel, a 1'h-inch thick hardwood block or a commercial jacking plate, between the main chassis I-beam and the jack head. • Locate the jack base on firm ground. Never jack on freshly disturbed soil or where an underground sewer pipe may be located. • Use a firm support under the jack base to prevent tipping or settling of the jack. A minimum 16"x 16"or larger wood or rigid fiberglass pad is recommended. Never use concrete blocks as a support for a jack. Follow the jacking sequence outlined below to avoid overstressing structural members: 1. Block wheels. Block the wheels so the house does not roll. 2. Install cribbing. Install safety cribbing (Figure 17). 0 Figure 17. Stack 4"x 6"by 5' long timbers as shown to form r safety timbers. Place safety m timbers under home behind n axle area and under hitch. p X a O NIP L— — — — — — — — X 3. Level lengthwise. Locate one jack at the hitch and level the section length- p wise(such that the front and rear of the section are at the same height). Z 4. Locate frame jacks. Place a minimum of one jack just forward of the first Z spring hanger and another just behind the last spring hanger of the I-beam on D the side of the home that is lowest(making sure not to place jacks where the r piers will go). Place jacks no more than 20 feet apart and no more than 20 rD feet from each end of the I-beam. > 5. Lift the home.Operating the jacks simultaneously(or sequentially in very small increments), lift the home section until it is slightly higher than the final Z Z desired pier height. D Z ROLLER SYSTEMS D When using a roller system, comply with the equipment manufacturer's directions and r the following sequence: 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 31 Set the Home 1. Establish staging area. Establish a staging area directly adjacent to one or #OS both sides of the foundation. 2. Setup rollers.Set up the roller system according to the equipment manufac- conforms to HUD MHCSS turer's directions. 1n5i09 3. Fasten bump blocks.Temporarily fasten wooden bump blocks on the sill plates at the ends of the foundation to stop the home from rolling at the de- sired location. 4. Roll home. Roll the home into place over the foundation. 5. Remove bump blocks. Remove the blocks before installing the next section of a multi-section home. CRANES When using a crane,follow these guidelines: • Position the home section(s)and crane(taking the boom reach into consid- eration)such that they do not have to be repositioned during the set. • Use enough properly sized straps to maintain balance of the home and to prevent damage to the structure. • Place straps under walls or posts, including temporary posts used to support the opening. Do not position lifting straps under marriage wall openings. • Use a properly sized spreader bar to maintain a vertical lift,to avoid placing compression forces on the eaves and to reduce any tendency to slip. • Connect a rope to at least one point on the home so it can be controlled while aloft. • Make provisions to retrieve the straps/cables after the home is set. If using a cradle system, notch the sill plate where the straps will fall. For a sling sys- tem, notch and reinforce the home's rim joist to keep the strap from slipping and allow the strap to be removed after the home is set. • Always set the home section farthest from the crane first so that subsequent section(s)need not be lifted over previously set sections. Have the interior foundation supports already been designed and installed as part of an approved load-bearing perimeter wall foundation? •• to • or •• to Connect • for • - section homes. • •• to STEP 4. CONSTRUCT • J Q Z STEP 4. CONSTRUCT PIERS Q For the side of the home section that is up on jacks, place piers on footings or pads fol- lowing the home manufacturer's blocking plan (or tags). If no plan was provided, use / , / A Z the support plan developed in Install Footings(p. 18). Start at one end of the home Designing piers. Incorrect � section and work toward the other noting the required pier material specifications and Q procedure described below. size, location or spacing of J piers may result in serious QConstruct piers so as to provide a stable foundation for the home using materials listed structural damage to the in the specifications box below and based on the location of the pier and its height as home. Install piers at all re- Zmeasured from the top of the footing or pad to the top of the cap. See Table 12 for pier quired locations. Failure to do Z construction requirements. so may lead to sagging O floors,walls, and roofs, and H could void the home's war- ranty. O a Q: O CU Lu Z J Y co Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 32 P CS ®#°5Set the Conformto • HUD MHCSS 1/15/119 TABLE 11. PIER MATERIAL MINIMUM SPECIFICATIONS Component Specification Concrete Block Nominal dimensions of at least 8"x 8"x 16";minimum load 8,000 lbs;confirming to ASTM designation C90,grade N. Solid masonry(nominal 4"x 8"x 16"pre-cast concrete without reinforcement);pressure treated lumber (nominal 2"x 8"x 16");or steel(minimum 1/2"thick,corrosion protected by a min.of a 10 mil coating of an exterior paint or equivalent). Nominal 2"thick boards. (alsoShims Hardwood,minimum 4"width by minimum 6"length by maximum 1"thick(nominal);plastic must be listed .• with maximum load capacity;used in pairs. Available in various sizes stamped with maximum load capacity and listed or labeled for the required verti- • cal load capacity,and where required by design,for the appropriate horizontal load capacity. Metal or te cast concrete • other manufactured piers must be provided with protection against weather deterioration and corrosion at least equivalent to that provided by a coating of zinc on steel of.30 oz per sq.ft of surface coated. Pressure treated oo? With a water borne preservative,in accordance with AWPA Standard U1-04 for Use Category 4B ground contact applications. TABLE 12. PIER CONSTRUCTION MortarConfiguration Maximum offset - .. to .. Less than 36 in(except Single-stack blocks with long corner piers more than 3 side perpendicular to I-beam /2 8,000 lbs. Not required blocks high) Between 36 in and 67 in 1"('/2"up to 36" and corner piers over 3 Double,interlocked blocks high) 16,000 lbs. Not required blocks high Over 67 in Designed by a registered engineer or registered architect Single-stack blocks with long '/2'up to 36"high, 54 in or less* side parallel to perimeter rail 1"over 36"high 8,000 lbs. Not required (rim joist) Single-stack blocks with long ,/2"up to 36"high, 54 in or less* side perpendicular to the 1"over 36"high 8,000 lbs. Not required marriage line * Construct perimeter and marriage line piers over 54 inches according to the requirements for frame piers of the same height. 1. Prepare footing surface. Make sure the footing surface upon which the pier 0 sits is flat and smooth. Before placing the pier on the footing, clean dirt, rocks, X or other material off the surface of the footing. For cast-in-place concrete foot- r ings, if the footing surface is uneven, create a level,flat surface by placing a Z treated board on the footing and mortaring on the first block(or manufactured m pier base), or by placing the first block(or manufactured pier base)on a layer p of premix dry sand mortar. X 2. Stack blocks. Stack concrete blocks with their hollow cells aligned vertically. O When piers are constructed of blocks stacked side-by-side, orient each layer D at right angles to the previous one(Figure 18)and plan blocks so that split I caps will be perpendicular to the blocks they rest on and to the I-beam. O Z Z D r r D O Z D Z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 33 oFS#°5 Set the Home Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Figure 18. Frame pier con- struction Main I-Beam Wood Shims to Fill Gaps Up to 1'Max Main I-Beam Wood Shims to Fil Optional(2)2x6or Gaps Up to 1"Max (1)2x12 Spacer O ptlona I2x6 / 4x8x16 Concrete Cap Spacer 4x8x16 Concrete Typical 8x8x16 Cap or 2x 8x 16 P.T. Concrete Block or Hardmod Cap Typical 8x8x16 € Z.Concrete Block Typical Footing - - - Typical F..- - - 3. Cap piers. Place a cap on hollow block piers to evenly distribute the structural load. Use caps the same length and width as the piers they rest upon. When using split caps on double-stacked block piers, install the caps with the long dimension perpendicular to the joint in the blocks below and to the main (- beam. Curing time of mortar. Where wet mortar is used to 4. Install shims. Use shims to level the home and fill any gaps between the construct or level piers, al- base of the I-beam and the top of the pier cap.Always use shims in pairs low it to cure to at least 80% (Figure 19). Drive them in tightly so they do not occupy more than one inch of of strength capacity(usually vertical space. When the space to be shimmed is greater than one inch and requiring 96 hours)before less than the minimum thickness of available caps or concrete blocks, use setting the home. hardwood dimensional lumber(two inches maximum thickness)or 2"or 4" thick concrete block. For split caps, install shims and dimensional lum- ber/blocks over each individual cap. Figure 19. Correct shim QI-Beam placement D Z Q Shims — Z Spacer Dimensions of O masonry perimeter walls. < cap If using a masonry perimeter _J enclosure, calculate pier < heights so that the enclo- U) sure can be built using stan- Z dard unit dimensions(with- O out cutting). Q 5. Set up level.Set up a water level with the fluid level at the desired height of the main piers. Carefully lower the side of the section down onto the leveled a piers, adjusting the final height with shims. 0 USING A WATER LEVEL V A water level is a standard device for leveling the home.The level LU Z consists of the following components: } 0 One container(five gallon bucket or one gallon jug). Y 150 feet of 1/2 inch diameter plastic tubing. Level the home.The home is y p g' adequately leveled if there is I Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 34 PFS#°5 (a Set the Home Conforms to HUD MHCSs 1/15/09 • Fittings for container to tubing. no more than 1/4 inch differ- Valve for terminal end of tubing. ence between adjacent pier supports (frame or perime- • Liquid for system: colored water in warm climates,windshield ter)and the exterior doors washing fluid in cold climates. and windows of the home do va not bind and can be properly aze hs operated. ------wee""------ - - Water level operation.To operate the water level pi., properly, both ends of the system must be open to the atmosphere and there must be approximately the same amount of fluid in the tubing at all times(within a few inches). How to use a water level a. Position level. Position the level such that it can reach all piers. b. Place container. Place the container so that the fluid in the con- tainer is at the same level as the desired level of the top of the supports under the home, allowing for any bracing below the level of the I-beams. c. Uncoil tubing. Uncoil the tubing and fill with fluid,taking care not to introduce bubbles into the hose. Never allow anything to crimp or crush the tubing so as to impede the free flow of fluid. d. Bleed air. Hold the valve below the level of the water container; open the valve to bleed out any air and close the valve. e. Establish height. Locate the tubing adjacent to a pier that is set to the desired final height. Position the valve above the pier and open the valve. Move the water container up or down to where the water level is at the desired final height of the pier. Maintain the water container in that position and close the valve. f. Level piers. Move the tubing to the next pier. Hold the valve above the pier and open it. Set the pier height to the level of the water in the tubing and close the valve. Repeat this step until all piers are at the same level. X 6. Complete the opposite side.Jack the other side of the section up and install r piers following the instructions above.At the completion of this step, the sec- Z tion should be level from front to rear and from side to side. m 7. Install perimeter and marriage line piers. Install perimeter piers and for p multi-section homes, marriage line piers. Position marriage line piers to pro- X vide equal bearing for both mating sections. O 8. Remove running gear. Remove and store, recycle or properly dispose of the D hitch, axles, and wheels.These items are the property of the homeowner unless other contractual arrangements have been made. O z Is this a single-section • - Z •• to • D • •• to • r r D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 35 CompletePFS#°5 Section Set Conforms to HUD MHCSS Complete Multi-Section Set 1,t5/09 This chapter covers the preparation and installation of additional home sections, including the structural connections be- tween units, raising and fastening hinged roofs, and fastening the home to a load-bearing perimeter wall foundation. Follow the Steps • • STEP 1. INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE ANCHORS(p. 36) STEP 2. REMOVE PROTECTIVE SHIPPING MATERIALS(p. 36) STEP 3. COMPLETE HINGED ROOF(p. 36) STEP 4. CHECK MARRIAGE LINE GASKET(p. 37) STEP 5. POSITION ADDITIONAL HOME SECTIONS (p. 38) STEP 6.CONNECT FLOORS (p. 39) STEP 7. CONNECT ROOF(p.41) STEP 8.CONNECT WALLS(p.43) STEP 9.ATTACH TAG UNITS(p.45) STEP 10. REMOVE TEMPORARY ITEMS (p.46) STEP 11. FASTEN HOME TO FOUNDATION (p. 46) STEP 12. BACKFILL AND GRADE(p.46) STEP 13. BUILD STAIRS(p.46) STEP 1. INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE ANCHORS J If the home is in Wind Zone II or III, install ground anchors along the marriage line now; before mating sections are joined see Install Stabilizing System (p. 65).After install- / ing marriage line anchors return to this point in Complete Multi-Section Set. Z Position roof jacks. Posi- 2 STEP 2. REMOVE PROTECTIVE SHIPPING MATERIALS vent jacks vertically to pre- 2 vent the jack foot from kick- O Remove all shipping protection and associated fasteners from both home sections to ing out or sliding. Qbe joined, including plastic used to close up the open sides during transportation. Do Caution during roof rais- J not remove the temporary supports holding up the ceilings at major openings. ing. Do not enter the roof Q cavity during the raising CO STEP 3. COMPLETE HINGED ROOF procedure. Z If the home has a hinged roof that has been folded down for shipping, raise the roof us- Checklists for alternate Z ing a crane or roof jacks following the procedure below: construction. If the serial O number(see the data plate 1. Position lift points. Position the roof lift points(jacks or crane lift points)fol- Q lowing the jack manufacturer or crane operator instructions. Space roof lift member)has the letters the chassis front cross points equally along the length of the roof with no more than five feet from the m end of the roof to the first or last lift points. Use three lift points for a roof up to "AC"before or after it, then 48 feet long (excluding overhangs),four lift points for up to 60 feet, and five lift the Alternate Construction O on-site check list supplied V points for up to 72 feet. with the home must be Z 2. Remove fasteners. Remove any temporary fasteners connecting the hinged completed and returned to J portion of the roof to the vertical king posts. the home manufacturer in a Y3. Lift roof. Raise the roof to its intended height.A temporary slight overexten- timely manner. If the AC I Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 36 #05 Complete Conforms to Section Set H 1/15/09 sion may be required during lifting. However,take care not to overextend the checklist relates to the roof, roof and damage the hinge. Raise the roof evenly in small increments, keep- then failure to do so may ing it level throughout the entire process to prevent racking. Do not allow roof- require future disassembly ing paper and shingles to get caught in the hinge crease. (Figure 20) of the roof and further in- 4. Secure king posts. Secure the moveable portion of the king post to the spections. ridgebeam by driving two(2)#8x3"wood screws through the beam and into the hinged king post(at Wind Zone 1). Use five (5)#8x3-1/2"screws at Wind Zone II or III. (Figure 21 and Figure 22). Figure 20. Typical roof lifting �-Lifting mechanism arrangement. The final position of the truss is shown on the truss detail included with this manual. Hinged King post Fixed King post Figure 21. Ridge beam to hinged king post fastening •\`\\ PTV T Truss with angled `\�� �!� 'q King Post. PE19600312 _ • • _ 248x3"screws at Wind ZoneiZ = I. 548x3-1/2"screws at Wind STATE OF Zone II and III. ��90.0 �NDI ANP• ��'��� F G IIIII Jeffrey T.Legault 2009.01.09 cl) 7 11:25:07-05'00' r_ Figure 22.Alternate ridge Z rn beam to king post fastening n O X X 248x3"screws at Wind > Zone I.5480-1/2"screws at Wind Zone II and Ill.. __ Factory installed O 2x6 rail. E Ridgebearn Z (� 5. Redistribute Insulation. Before closing up the attic space check that the in- sulation has not shifted. Re-level the insulation if needed. r 6. Install gable walls.Assembled frames or wall studs and sheathing needed for the site assembly of the gable end walls may be provided. Install the gable O end walls for each home section as follows Figure 23.End wall completion: Z Studs: Install studs 16 inches o.c.with 3-12d nails or 4-15Ga.x7/16x2- > " • D 1/2"staples, and; Z C • Sheathing: Install 3/8" min OSB sheathing with 8d nails or 16Ga.x 7/16"x 1-1/2"staples 6"o.c. 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 37 Complete Multi- PFS#05 Section Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 King Post Figure 23. End wall comple- tion Wedge Truss Top / ' // Chord Hinge Inspecting vents. Fuel fired heating appliance and fire- place vents that pass through a hinged roof must Truss be completed and in- Web spected at the site prior to energizing the appliance or occupying the home. Fail- 7. Install vents. Extend plumbing vents, exhaust fans, appliance vents, and fire- ure to comply with this pre- place stacks through the hinged portion of the roof in strict accordance with caution may result in seri- this manual (Prepare Appliances and Equipment, p. 86)and/or supplemen- ous injury or death.Venting tal instructions provided by the home manufacturer. systems must be installed 8. Roof Close-up.A paper spacer has been placed between the two courses of in conformance with the shingles at the hinge to prevent premature sealing of the upper course. Re- appliance manufacturer's move this paper and fasten the upper course in place as shown on the shingle instructions and any in- structions supplied with the installation instructions. Repeat procedure on other half of home. The units home. should now be joined together. The fastening of the ridgebeam halves to- gether as specified in this manual can be accomplished either by reaching down from the roof opening at the ridge or by moving along inside the roof cavity. Care should be taken not to damage the ceiling during this operation. 9. Ridge Assembly. Some models will require the framing of the peak area of the home to be completed on site. Extend peak close off frame from each half until they meet at the mating line. (Figure 24) Fasten each peak frame block to each truss top chord w/3-10d nails. Fasten the peak rails together w/10d nails 8"o.c. or w/#8x3"screws 8"o.c. Attach the roof sheathing at the peak to the blocking w/1 5Ga.x7/16"xl-1/2"staples or 8d nails 4"o.c. There is not a removable piece of roof decking at the peak(for ridgebeam access with this type of construction. Install roof felt and remaining shingles to complete the peak close-off. Figure 24. Ridge Assembly Extend peak sections to mating line. J Site install roof sheathing at Fasten peak rails together a w/10d nails or#8x3"screws peak(shipped loose). 8"o.c. Qi Hinged truss Ridgebeam Z (typical) (typical) • • a J Fasten each block to each o.c. Qtruss w/3-10d nails(typical). CO STEP 4. CHECK MARRIAGE LINE GASKET Z A continuous, non-porous gasket creating a permanent air barrier must be installed on O at least one side of the marriage line; along the floor, end walls and ceiling (and mar- F_ riage lines for any tag units). Skyline Corp. has installed this gasket in the factory. In- � spect the gasket and repair any gaps or tears. Checking through-the-rim- 0 ducts. Ensure that through- If not installed at the factory, install a continuous gasket between the home sections the-rim-duct connections 0 along the floor, end walls, and ceiling (Figure 25). are secure and tight after V the home sections are to- For homes with through-the-rim crossover ducts(see Crossover Connections, p. 52) gether. Z inspect and if necessary, repair gaskets around the rim joist duct openings using 3/4- inch thick fiberglass duct board or other material acceptable to the manufacturer. En- sure that duct openings are unobstructed. to Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 38 PFS#°5Complete ;g Conforms to Section Set HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Figure 25. Mating Line Gas- Ridge beam ket Mating line]Floor installed)at mating line bottom Flang 1.1 �7H� Mating line rim joist STEP 5. POSITION ADDITIONAL HOME SECTIONS Follow this procedure to install additional home sections: 1. Remove obstructions. Remove protruding nails and staples or anything else that will keep the home sections from fitting together snugly. If present, cut the temporary ceiling and floor plates at the edges of marriage line openings tak- @Mechanical posi- ing care not to damage ceiling or floor coverings or displace temporary mar- tioning system. For a pier- riage line support posts(these supports and the plates will be removed after set home, a mechanical the home sections have been structurally connected). positioning system (such as 2. Complete crossovers. Before moving the two sections together, complete a roller system)will make any crossover connections that require access from the open marriage line, the process easier and including the attic duct connection (if present)and marriage wall interior elec- safer and be less likely to trical connections (see Connect Crossovers, p.52). damage the home. 3. Position section. Position the section as closely as possible (ideally within six inches)and line up with the previously set section. If using a mechanical positioning system or crane,follow the system manufacturer's instructions or the crane operator's directions. 4. Construct piers.With the outside walls of the home aligned, construct the Sealing gaps. Prior to com- pletion of the exterior close- piers for the home section according to the instructions in Set the Home(p. to 30)before continuing to the steps below. up, gaps that do not exceed one inch are permitted be- r 5. Level section. Lower the section onto the outside piers first, inside piers last. tween structural elements Z Before releasing the mechanical positioning system, check interior doorways provided that the gaps are M and other openings for misalignments that may cause problems during trim- closed before completion of n out.The floors should be flush, level, and tight and the roof section should close-up,the home sec- 0 have little, if any, gap at the top of the marriage line. Use at least two come-a- tions are in contact with X longs to pull the sections snugly together and use the water level or other lev- O eling device to set all piers and shims. each other, and the mar- riage gasket provides a 6. Shim gaps. Shim any gaps up to one inch between structural elements with proper seal. O dimensional lumber. If any gaps exceed one inch, re-position the home to Z eliminate such gaps. Z STEP 6. CONNECT FLOORS v Make floor structural connections according to one of the methods described below. Method 1: Install fasteners through rim joists With the home aligned at the floor and supported by its foundation,join the floors as O shown in Figure 26 using the fastener type, size, and spacing indicated on Z E Table 13. A gap of 1" is allowable. Gaps larger than'/z"must be filled with plywood or Z lumber shims. c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 39 Complete Multi- PFS#°5 o Section Set Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 TABLE 13. FLOOR CONNECTION FASTENING SPECIFICATIONS Fastener Spacing Lag screw with 3/8"x 3" 24-36 in. 24-36 in. 24-36 in. washer Increase fastener lengths by 3 inches for double rim joists. Marriage Figure 26. Floor connection Line Floor Fastener Decking Rim Joists Along Marriage Marriage Line Line Gasket Fastener Staggered At Next Spacing Interval Install additional fasteners as indicated below, making sure to repair any openings in the bottom board with tape specially made for that purpose(may be provided). • Install two additional fasteners at each end of the home at approximately a 45 degree angle (+/-5 degrees)from horizontal. Patch bottom • If the home has a through-the-rim crossover duct, install one additional fas- board. Use adhesive tener at each side of the duct opening. spray, mastic, and/or diver- gent staples in combination • After installation of fasteners, repair tears or holes in the bottom board using with bottom board tape for tape specially made for that purpose. a more secure and durable connection. J Q D Z Q Z O F_ Q J J Q H CO Z_ Z O H Q O (L W O V w Z J Y U) Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 40 PFFSection Set Complete Conforms to HUD MHCSs 1115109 STEP 7. CONNECT ROOF If the marriage line along the roof is not snug, position jacks every 20 feet or less along the outside I-beam and uniformly lift the section until the roof area is tight. / / A Check to make sure the ceiling joint is flush before installing the connections. If not, Closing the roof gap. Level use a jack and tee to raise whichever ceiling is low, starting at the front and working to and fasten the marriage the rear of the home. Fasten the roof along the marriage line using one of the methods line joint at the floor before below for either double or triple-section homes. jacking to tighten a roof gap. DO NOT use roof fas- DOUBLE-SECTION HOMES teners to close any gaps. Make roof structural connections in double-section homes according to the method de- Separation of the ridge scribed below. beams and trusses may Install fasteners through ridge beam occur. To obtain access into the ceiling cavity,fold back the underlayment paper and remove the 16"wide sheathing panel(s)at the peak. The beam halves may be bolted or lag screwed together. Install bolts or lag screws at 24"o.c.with 6 additional bolts/lags over interior beam supports. (Figure 27). Predrill '/4" piliot holes for lag screws at 1-1/2" down from the top of the beam and with a maximum offset from horizontal of 45 de- grees. Use fastener sizes as specified in Table 14. Stagger fasteners on each side of marriage line. Spacing indicated is on-center, both sides of ridge. NOTE:(1)When beam support consists of a column instead of Centerline bearing wall,use 6 bolts/lags at 3"o.c.each side of column. Figure 27. Ridge beam fas- e17117 f (2)Beam marked with paint at column locations. Y 3�� g 211�� 24" 24" 24" 24" III\ 244� Roof Ridge Beam Endwall Hall bearing wall TABLE 14. ROOF CONNECTIONS SPECIFICATIONS Bolts with washers both 3/8"x 4-1/2" 24 in. 24 in. 24 in. sides Lag screws with washers 3/8"x 5" 24 in. 24 in. 24 in. r z m n O O X D I O z z D r r D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 41 Complete Multi- PFS#0 Section Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 In Wind Zones II and III an optional metal cap or straps may be installed as follows: Caps • Select metal caps made of minimum 8"x 30 ga galvanized steel or 0.019" aluminum. Installing lags. If lags are used to connect roofs, use • Install caps continuously, overlapping by minimum of four inches at splices. pilot holes and use appro- • Fasten caps with 1"x 1"x 16 ga galvanized staples or 12 ga 1-1/4" long x 3/8" priately sized washers. diameter head roof nails or#8 x 1-1/4"sheet metal screws at two inches o.c. When to use metal straps. both sides of ridge. If a ridge vent will be in- Straps stalled, use straps instead • Select metal straps made of minimum 1-1/2"wide x 26 ga galvanized steel or of a continuous cap. 0.019"aluminum. • Space straps a minimum of 96 inches o.c.for Wind Zone II and a minimum 80 inches o.c.for Wind Zone III. TRIPLE-SECTION HOMES For triple-section homes where roof lines run parallel to each other on adjacent units (Figure 29),follow the instructions in the appropriate method below to complete the connections at the roof. Method 1: Install fasteners through pre-installed sheathing For homes where sheathing is in place on both sides of the marriage line(Figure 28) install fasteners from the low side of the roof on an angle so as to penetrate roof beams on both sides of marriage line, using the fastener specifications and spacings indicated on Table 15. Center Section Outer Section Figure 28.Triple-section roof connection Method 1 Factory-Installed Underlayment Factory-Installed J Shingles Q See Skyline Corporation D Field-Installed Manufactured Home Adden- ZQ Shingles dum for Triplewide homes for Factory-Installed additional information. Z Shingles Asphalt Roofing Cement � Between Layers of Q Underlayment Min 6"Wide J J Q H CO Z_ Z O Lq Q O a Metal(Optional) Fastener 0 LU Z J Y U) Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 42 • • PFS#°5 ® Multi- Section Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1n5i09 Figure 29.Triple-section Marriage Line home ------------- Ridge Line ------------- Marriage Line Plan Elevation TABLE 15. ROOF CONNECTION SPECIFICATIONS Fastener I Spacing Lag screw 3/8"x 4-1/2" 24in. 24in. 24in. Bolts 3/8"x 5" 24in. 24in. 24in. Method 2: Install fasteners with ship loose sheathing For homes where sheathing is shipped loose to be installed on site(Figure 30)fasten field-installed sheathing to all underlying blocking and framing with 15 ga 7/16"x 1-1/2" staples at four inches o.c. in field and perimeter. Field installed shingles Figure 30.Triple-section roof Field installed sheathing connection Method 2 Field installed underlayment Asphalt roofing cement bwtween layers of underlayment(min.6"wide) R Factory installed shingles Factory installed underlayment Factory installed sheathing r STEP 8. CONNECT WALLS m Once the home is secured along the marriage line floor and roof, secure end walls, in- O terior doorways, and marriage line partitions according to the appropriate method de- 0 scribed below. 0 O END WALLS D Install toed fasteners through sheathing Toe fasteners through sheathing from the exterior at an approximately 45 degree angle Z 5 degrees)(Figure 31)according to the fastener specifications and spacing re- _ quirements in Table 16. z D r r D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 43 . lete Multi- PS' . Section Set Confo#05 rms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Gasket Figure 31. End wall connec- Wall Studs tion toed through sheathing Exterior Siding or Exterior Siding j NA Underlayment j i li it Fastener TABLE 16. END WALL FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS Fastener type WIN Lag screw with washer 5/16"x 5" 12in.o.c. Wood screw #8 x 3" 8in.o.c. Nail 16d 8in.o.c. MARRIAGE WALL COLUMNS, OPENINGS AND INTERIOR PARTITIONS Make connections inside the home along the marriage walls(Figure 32 and Figure 33) by installing fasteners according to the specifications and spacing requirements in Table 17.Toe screw 2 x 4 or 2 x 6 studs; through-screw 2 x 3 studs. Interior Wall Figure 32. Marriage wall Marria a Walls /Butts Into connections J 9 Marriage Walls a Plant Shelf Wall Covering Where Occurs Applied At Z III Manufacturing a I i Facility hl Fasteners Z Oasteners a J Door J H Z_ Z Fasteners Optional:Field Applied Gyp Board Q Not Less Than 24"Nor Larger Than 48".Fasten Per Notes Q Fasteners Figure 33. Marriage line col- 0 umn connections d Mariage Line 0 V _ _—_—___—_—_—_—. _—_—__ _ W Z J Support Posts Y Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 44 • • Multi- Section PFS#°5 TABLE 17. MARRIAGE WALL CONNECTION SPECIFICATIONS Coniormsto HUD MHCSS Fastener type Size Spacing 1/15/09 Wood screw #8 x 4" 16 in.o.c. Do additional sections (non tag) remain to be positioned? 1110- YES, •• to STEP 1. INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE GROUNDAN- CHORS, • • 11110- • continue •- • Is there a .• •• to • • continue below. hingedIs there a roof? •• to STEP 3. COMPLETE • • • • STEP 9. ATTACH TAG UNITS After the main unit has been set on its foundation, install all tag units according to the following procedure: 1. Position and block the tag. Position the tag unit as close to the main unit as Piers under tag units. possible at its intended location. Use a hitch jack to obtain approximate level- Some tag units have spe- ing and install pier supports according to Set the Home, STEP 2. POSITION cial piering needs due to HOME SECTION (p. 30). Determine whether the tag and main unit floors are the roof and/or floor con- designed to line up flush or are offset by a step and adjust the tag pier heights struction.These will be de- accordingly. tailed in supplemental pier- 2. Level the unit. Using a water level (p.34), verify that the piers are level. The ing plans supplied with the elevation of all points along the lower flange of the I-beam should be no more home. Note that tag unit than 3/8 inches from the desired height and should not deviate more than 3/4 end walls are typically load inches overall. bearing rather than side 3. Connect floors. If the floor of the tag unit is level with main unit floor, connect walls. the floors together as described in STEP 5. CONNECT FLOORS (p. 39). Connect walls. Secure the tag unit walls to the main unit sidewall using#8 x 4"screws at 12 inches o.c. (see Figure 34).The sheathing shown in the detail may not be included by the manufacturer. If included,the sheathing over the X last stud bay was tacked in place at the factory for easy removal at the site. r_ Once the wall connections are complete, re-install the sheathing and complete z the siding installation. rn n O Sdewall Studs Fastener Figure 34. Tag unit wall -0 (Main Unit) Sheathing connection O (Field Installed) Wall Studs (Tag Unit) O z z CD D Main Unit D O z Exterior Siding Tag Unit D z 4. Connect roofs.Connect the tag unit roof to the main unit roof using#10 x 5" c screws or 3/8"x 6"lag screws, toe screwed at each main unit vertical struc- tural member(stud or truss)location. See Figure 35 for flush roof connections 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 45 Complete Multi- PFS#05 Section SetConforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 and Figure 36 for roof connections with an offset greater than two inches. Roof connections with an offset less than two inches do not require screws. shingle U",rhyme°[ Figure 35. Tag unit flush roof Instal Flashing Flat Shingles O ver Joint ____ connection Metal Fastener Fascia Figure 36. Tag unit offset Roof N&ing roof connection Main Utd Shingles Tag Utd Main Unit — -' ___ Metal Flashhg (or Top Course o f Vinyl Siding) Raof Deckhg Tag Unit Fastener ------------------- STEP 10. REMOVE TEMPORARY ITEMS Once the home is properly supported and the marriage line connections are completed, remove the temporary ridge beam supports and wall/ceiling plates used to brace the ridge beam during shipment. Take care not to damage the ceiling. Remove and store or properly dispose of or recycle the hitch, axles, and wheels.These items are the property of the homeowner unless other contractual arrangements have been made. Is the home supported on a load-bearing perimeter wall? •• • STEP 11. FASTEN HOMETO FOUNDATION, • 00- • •• to • STEP 11. FASTEN HOME TO FOUNDATION Fasten the home to the foundation (typically to the sill plate)according to the fastening OF schedule provided by the manufacturer. // When to backfill. Backfill D Is _ home supported on basement f, •. • against basement walls Z only after the home is con- •• to • ' • nected to the foundation or Z 1111i NO, •• to Complete Roofand • the basement walls may _p deflect inward or collapse. ~ Cutting the chassis. Do not STEP 12. BACKFILL AND GRADE cut, notch, bend, or alter in J Backfill against the foundation wall to the height of the waterproofing, taking care to not any manner beams, cross- damage the drainage system. members, and other parts Z Grade the site as described in Prepare the Site, STEP 3. CLEAR AND GRADE THE of the steel chassis. ZO SITE (p.14). H STEP 13. BUILD STAIRS p Construct the basement stairs in compliance with the local building code.Take care a that adequate headroom is maintained under beams and that there is sufficient landing 0O space at the bottom of the stairs. V Z 00, •• to Complete Roof and Exterior Walls (p. J Y Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 46 PFS0' Complete Roof • Conforms toExterior HUD MHCSS 1/"'09 Complete Roof and Exterior Walls This chapter covers closing up and weatherproofing the home by completing the roofing and siding. Follow the Steps • • STEP 1.COMPLETE ROOF(p.47) STEP 2. COMPLETE TAG UNIT ROOF(p. 49) STEP 3. COMPLETE SIDE WALLS (p.49) STEP 1. COMPLETE ROOF RIDGE CLOSEUP For multi-section homes,the first step in completing the exterior is sealing the roof along the ridge line (Figure 37). For homes with asphalt shingles,follow the procedure below. For homes with metal or other roofing materials,follow the instructions that come with the roofing materials or provided as a supplement to this manual. Cap Shingle Underlayment Figure 37. Shingle installa- / \ Metal(Wind Zone tion at ridge 2&3 Only) / \ Factory Installed Shingles Z? Factory Installed Weatherproofing. It is vitally Shingles Underlaymeni important to close up the home quickly to protect the interior from damage due to Roof Deck inclement weather. 1. Install underlayment(when sheathing at the ridge is installed on site). Make Removing shipping protec- sure the roof sheathing is already installed (see Complete Multi-Section Set, tion. Remove shipping pro- STEP 6.CONNECT ROOF, p. 39). Install 15#felt or equivalent continuously tection from the roof prior to along the length of the ridge, covering all exposed sheathing and overlapping completing roofing. N sheathing joints by at least five inches on each side. Fasten using 1"x 1"x 16 X ga galvanized staples. For Wind Zones II and III, also apply a six inch wide r strip of roofing cement along each side of ridge under the underlayment. Z 2. Install shingles. If shingles have been left off at the ridge line for site installa- m 0 tion, install them now using 1"x 1"x 16 ga galvanized staples or 12ga 1-1/4" p long, 3/8"diameter head roof nails. For Wind Zone I,fasten at 5/8 inch above X each tab cutout slot and one at each end of the shingle one inch in from the p edge (four fasteners for a three-tab shingle)(Figure 38). For Wind Zones II D and III, use two fasteners 5/8 inch above and on either side of the tab slots > and one at each end of the shingle one inch in from the edge (six fasteners for p a three-tab shingle). Do not fasten through the shingle tar line. Z �—36"Shingle 36"Shingle Figure 38.Shingle fastener y locations for Wind Zone 1 (left)and Wind Zones 11 and r- x x x x 12"x x x x x x 12" 111(right). D Z x Fastener Locations 9 3. Install underlayment. Install 15#felt or equivalent underlayment that is at D least 10 inches wide continuously along the ridge. Fasten with 1"x 1"x 16 ga Z C galvanized staples. For Wind Zones II and III, also apply a six inch wide strip y r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 47 Complete Roof PFS#05 1 • ExteriorWalls Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 of roofing cement on both sides of the ridge under the underlayment. 4. Install shingle cap. Starting at the opposite end of the home from the prevail- ing wind, install ridge cap shingles provided by the manufacturer or use 12"x • 12"shingles(36"shingles cut into three equal pieces)(Figure 39). Install us- Installing a ridge vent. If a ing 1"x 1"x 16 ga galvanized staples or 12 ga 1-1/4" long, 3/8"diameter head ridge vent is to be installed, roofing nails spaced 5-5/8 inches from bottom edge and 1/2 inch to 1-1/2 follow the ridge vent manu- inches in from both edges. Cover the exposed fasteners with tar or cement. facturer's instructions pro- vided with the material or as an addendum to this manual in lieu of underlay- ment over ridge line and shingle cap. Cut shingle into three pieces Figure 39. Shingle cut into as shown by dotted line thirds 1 2 3 HINGE ROOF CLOSE-UP For homes with hinged roofs, complete roofing underlayment and shingles along the hinge line(Figure 40)as follows: 1. Install underlayment.Attach the underlayment to the roof deck with a mini- mum of six-inch wide strip of cement. If necessary, trim the underlayment to allow the lowest shingle above the hinge of the roof to seal to the topmost shingle on the lower portion of the roof. Figure 40. Shingle installa- tion at hinge line Site Install Shingles In Hinged Area Per The Instructions On The Shingle Package Epp Shipped Loose With The Home. cV,00{Se After Roof Is In The Raised Position, uppe Trim The Shingle Underlayment To i Installing metal Allow The Shingle Of The Upper flashing. Install optional Roof Section To Seal Onto The Last metal flashing over the roof Shingle Of The Lower Roof Section. decking before applying J Hinge roofing cement. Fold back �ooese` the underlayment and fas- Z �o�e` ten 30 ga x 6"wide mini- Asphalt Roofing Cement mum galvanized metal with Underlayment roofingnails or 16 a x 1" Z Between Layers of g 0 Underlayment Minumum crown staples of sufficient 6"Wide length to penetrate the roof Q sheathing. Space fasteners J 2. Install shingles. Install missing shingles according to the shingle manufac- Q turer's instructions. four inches o.c. or less near the edge of the metal. Z Overlap the metal by at COMPLETE TRIPLE-SECTION ROOFS Complete roofing along triple-section home marriage lines according to one of the fol- least two inches at joints. 0 lowing methods based on the construction of the home. QMethod 1: Dual ridge beams 1. Install underlayment. Fold down the underlayment of the outer section roof O 0 and apply a minimum six-inch wide strip of roofing cement to the sheathing. W Lay the underlayment of the center section on top of the cement(see Best 0 Practice tip for optional metal flashing). Fold down the center section roof un- 0 derlayment on this cement. w Z 2. Install shingles. Install missing row(s)of shingles, securing them per the J shingle manufacturer's installation instructions(refer to the shingle wrapper). Y U) Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 48 #05 CompleteRoof and PFSExterior Walls Conforms to HUD MHCSS Center Section Outer Section tiisio9 Figure 41. Triple-section roof connection Method 1 Factory-Installed Underlayment Factory-Installed Shingles See Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Adden- Field-Installed Shingles dum for Triplewide homes for Factory-Installed additional information. Shingles Asphalt Roofing Cement Between Layers of Underlayment Min6"Wide Metal(Optional) Fastener Method 2: Field-installed sheathing 1. Install underlayment. Fold down the underlayment of the outer section roof and fold up the underlayment on the center section roof.Apply to the lower roof underlayment a minimum six-inch wide strip of roofing cement centered on the sheathing joint. Cover with the shipped loose underlayment.Apply an- other minimum six-inch wide strip of roofing cement to the ship loose under- layment centered on the upper roof sheathing joint. 2. Install shingles. Install missing row(s)of shingles per the shingle manufac- turer's installation instructions (refer to the shingle wrapper). Field installed shingles Figure 42. Triple-section Field installed sheathing roof connection Method 2 Field installed underlayment Asphalt roofing cement bwtween layers of underlaytnent(min.6"wide) Factory installed shingles N 1 � r Factory installed underlayment m 0 0 X Factory installed sheathing O O Z Z Cn D r r STEP 2. COMPLETE TAG UNIT ROOF If the home has a tag unit, complete roofing for this unit now. The process for complet- ing the roof is different for flush and offset roofs. Follow the instructions in the appropri- 3 ate section below. D Z FLUSH ROOFS D For flush roofs, complete roofing along the marriage line and at the valley line as fol- r lows(see Figure 43): 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 49 Complete • • PFS#05 And Conforms to HUD Exterior 1/15/09 Shingle Underlayment Figure 43. Tag unit flush Over Install Flashing Flat roof connection Over Joht Fastener See Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Adden- Tag Unit Main Unit dum for Triplewide homes for additional information 0 JEF Marriage line Method 1: Install metal flashing (minimum 30 ga x minimum 6"wide)over the joint between the main roof dormer and tag unit roof. Secure the flashing to the roof decks on both dormer and tag unit roofs with roofing nails or 16 ga staples with a one inch crown and long enough to fully penetrate the roof decks. Space fasteners maximum two inches o.c. near the edge of the flashing. Overlap seams in the metal by at least two inches.After flashing is complete, install shingles per shingle manufacturer instructions and ridge cap/vent according to STEP 1. COMPLETE ROOF (p.47). Method 2: Install two layers of roofing underlayment or equivalent over the joint between the main roof dormer and tag unit roof lapping the factory installed under- layment a minimum of six inches on each side and fully cemented at the laps. In- stall shingles per shingle manufacturer instructions and ridge cap/vent according to STEP 1.COMPLETE ROOF(p.47). Valley line Along the bottom of the valley, shingles and one or more layers of roll roofing may need to be installed. If fastened to the roof at the factory, unroll the roofing, overlap the tag roof and trim the roofing to the roof edge. If shipped loose, install the roll roofing at the valley, lapping it under the factory installed roll roofing a minimum of 12 inches and fully cement the roofing at the lap. Complete shingles at the valley either by interweav- J ing them or by trimming back approximately four inches from the valley line and fully cementing the exposed shingle edges. z OFFSET ROOFS Q If there is a gap between the main unit dormer overhang and the tag unit roof of less than two inches,fold up the main unit dormer fascia, slide the underlayment and flash- 0 ing from the tag unit roof behind the fascia, and bend the fascia back down and secure Q into sub-fascia with metal screws(Figure 44). J J Q H z_ z O H Q O (L W O V w z J Y U) Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 50 Roof and ® Exterior Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Main Unit Roof (Shingles Not Figure 44. Tag unit roofing Factory-Intalled Flashing Shown on Main UndedUnitfor Clarity) Drip Edge connection with less than Sub-Fa Carved Up Into Dormer two inch height difference Sub-Fascia Fascia Fascia Main Unit Dormer Flashing Flashing Shingle Shingles �. Undedayment Underlayment — Distance Between Main Unit Dormer and Tag Unit Roof May Underlayment Over Rolled Vary(Min."to Max of 2'� Roofing Carried Up Into Tag U nit Roof Dormer Sub-Fascia Min.3" Tag Unit Truss Main Unit Dormer Truss If the gap between the main unit dormer overhang and the tag unit roof is two inches or more, bend up the inside corner trim at the dormer overhang and main unit sidewall, fold up the factory installed flashing on the tag unit roof,fold the inside corner trim back down, and secure into dormer wall with metal screws(Figure 45) Figure 45. Tag unit offset --- -- shingles roof connection Metal Fas cia Roof Decking Main Unit ur Shingles Metal Flashing (or Top Course of Vinyl Siding) FRoofking Tag Unit Fastener iliesm X r z STEP 3. COMPLETE SIDE WALLS M Siding necessary to complete the exterior has been provided with the home. Follow the n O siding manufacturer's instructions(found on or with the packaging or as an addendum to this manual)and to complete the exterior siding as follows: Covering the HUD label. Do O 1. Remove shipping protection. Remove temporary shipping protection from not cover the HUD label on y walls. the exterior of the home. --I 2. Complete crossovers. Complete any crossover connections in the walls, in- Removing shipping protec- Z cluding: electrical, stereo speaker, doorbell,telephone, and intercom wires. tion. Remove temporary z 3. Install siding. Fasten siding only at stud locations, avoiding electrical wires shipping protection from y that are present in the walls. walls before installing sid- ing or serious moisture r 4. Install close-up of strips. If siding has been installed on the end walls at the damage may result D factory,fasten close-up strips securely along both edges and seal the edges . I with a waterproof sealant. 0 5. Install trim. Install any matching trim required to complete the installation. Z 6. Seal penetrations.With a waterproof sealant, seal any penetrations in the y siding that may have been caused by temporary shipping protection. c D .• to • 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 51 Connect Crossovers hCPARS Conforms msto HUD MHCSS Connect Crossovers 1/15/09 This chapter covers crossover connections between units of multi-section homes, including ducts and electrical,water, waste, gas,telephone, and cable TV connections. Follow the Steps • • STEP 1.CONNECT DUCTS (p. 52) STEP 2. CONNECT ELECTRICAL CROSSOVERS(p. 56) STEP 3. INSTALL ELECTRICAL BONDING(p. 58) STEP 4. CONNECT WATER LINES(p. 59) STEP 5.CONNECT DRAIN,WASTE,AND VENT LINES(p. 60) STEP 6. CONNECT GAS LINES (p. 61) STEP 7.CONNECT TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV WIRING (p. 62) STEP 1. CONNECT DUCTS There are three main types of duct crossover connections. Based on the location of the duct,follow the installation steps on the page indicated below: / // • Under the floor(p. 52). Qualified personnel. Use • In the roof cavity(p. 54). only qualified personnel to • In floor,through-the-rim joist(p. 54) make crossover connec- tions. Consult the LAHJ for To prevent air leakage, seal all ductwork connections, including duct collars using one licensing or any additional or more of the following materials: crossover connection re- _J 0 quirements. Q Galvanized metal straps in combination with galvanized sheet metal screws. D For rigid air ducts and connectors,tape and mastics listed to UL 181A. Access for service.When- Z ever possible maintain ac- Q • For flexible air ducts and connectors,tape and mastics listed to UL 181 B. cess to connection areas Z for future maintenance. 0 UNDER FLOOR FLEXIBLE CROSSOVER DUCT When heating or cooling equipment is installed in the home,the flexible crossover duct Make tight connections. Q is provided by the manufacturer. In all cases the crossover duct must be listed for exte- Permanent, durable, and J tight crossover duct con- rior use. nections are critical to the There are four common configurations of under floor crossover ducts depending on the proper performance of the Z number of home sections and the furnace/air handler location. See Table 18 to locate home. Leaky ducts can re- Z the appropriate figure. sult in severe moisture p problems in the home, dis- TABLE 18. UNDER FLOOR DUCT CONFIGURATIONS comfort from rooms not re- Furnace location Two home sections Three home ceiving the proper amount dFurnace over trunk duct See Figure 46 See Figure 48 sections of Conditioned air, and high (L utility bills from wasted 0 Furnace offset from trunk duct See Figure 47 See Figure 49 heating and/or cooling en- C) ergy. w Z J Y Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 52 PFS#°5 Connect Co4i Crossovers nt'orms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Furnace Air Figure 46. Furnace over Handler trunk duct, two home sec- ASection ® B Section tions Dfi Floor Heat Duct Tap-Out Collar Flex Duct Field-Installed Flex Support Straps Duct Furnace/Air Figure 47. Furnace offset A Section Ha® B Section from sections trunk duct, two home W.Floor Heat Du Tap-Out Collar Field-Installed Flex Dud Flex Duct Support Straps "W-Box Under Furnace Furnace Air Figure 48. Furnace over A Section Handler B Section C Section trunk duct, three home sec- 8LU 1J tions Floor He�DuTap Field-Installed Flex Dud "V-Box Under Furnace Flex Dud Support Straps A Section Furnace/Air B Section C section Figure 49. Furnace offset HandlerLU from trunk duct, three home sections Heat Dud Tap-Out Collar Field-Installed Flex Dud "V"-Box Under Furnace Flex Duct SupportSiraps For under floor flexible crossover ducts follow the steps below: 1. Locate collars. Locate the metal crossover collars(or V-box)connected to the main trunk duct(or furnace) under the home and remove temporary ship- ping protection. N Securing the T 2. Install inner duct. Slide the crossover duct inner liner over the crossover col- crossover. Between Step E lar/V-box as far as it will go. Temporarily fasten the inner liner in place with 5 and Step 6, drill three or Z duct tape. Install a large nylon zip-tie over the inner linerjust above the"ridge" more 1/16 inch holes an m around the crossover collar/V-box.Apply mastic completely over inner liner equal distance around and n and collar/V-box(alternately,the mastic may be applied to the collar/V-box just below the bottom edge 0 prior to sliding the duct inner liner over it). of the nylon zip-tie. Install 3. Connect duct insulation. Bring the duct insulation up over the zip-tie and #12 pan head screws in X above the home's bottom board into the floor cavity. Temporarily duct tape it these holes,through the against the base of the trunk duct/V-box. flexible duct and into the I 4. Pull duct wrap. Pull the crossover duct outer wrap over the top of the insula- metal crossover collar/V- Z tion and temporarily secure it to the trunk duct/V-box with duct tape. box.The screw heads Z 5. Install zip-tie. Feel for the nylon zip-tie that was installed over the inner liner. should be against the zip- Cn Place another nylon zip-tie just under the first one to permanently secure the tie. crossover duct insulation and outer wrap. 6. Trim duct.Trim the crossover duct to length such that the installed duct will // be straight with no kinks or unnecessary bends. i , p Z 7. Connect other end. Follow the same procedure(steps 1 through 5)to con- Cover exposed metal. 9 nect the opposite end of the crossover duct and any other crossover ducts. Completely cover all ex- D 8. Seal joints. Seal the joints between the bottom board and the crossover duct posed metal connectors Z with foam or mastic. with insulation.Apply seal- C D 9. Support duct.Support the crossover duct(s)above the ground using nylon or ants and tapes only to sur- galvanized metal straps and saddles spaced every 48 inches o.c.or less. faces that are dry and free 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 53 Connect PFS#°5 Crossovers Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Choose straps at least 1/2 inch wider than the spacing of the metal spirals en- of dust, dirt, and grease. casing the crossover duct. Install the straps so they cannot slip between spi- Avoid ground contact. In- rals. Secure metal straps with galvanized screws. stalled crossover ducts ROOF CAVITY CROSSOVER DUCT must not be in contact with For ducts installed in the roof cavity,follow the steps below: the ground. 1. Access duct.Access the crossover location through an access panel in the Unobstructed airflow. Ex- roof and remove any temporary shipping protection. cess length, kinks and bends in the crossover duct 2. Join ducts. Using the provided flexible duct,join the distribution boxes in will restrict airflow and de- each section of the home as shown in Figure 50, cutting off any extra duct grade the home's HVAC length to keep the duct as straight as possible. The duct is connected to one system performance. side of the home. 3. Fasten ducts.At each connection point between ducts and between ducts and distribution boxes or connectors, secure the inner duct liner with a nylon strap, apply mastic completely over the connection area, pull the duct insula- tion and outer liner over the connection area, and secure them with a second nylon strap. 4. Reinstall panel. Reinstall and secure the access panel. Fiv Duct Figure 50. Duct crossover Distribution Box Distribution Boz located in the roof cavity O O Cell ng IN THE FLOOR CROSSOVER DUCT Where one or more crossover ducts are built into the home's floor system, connect them either through (note openings in rim joists)or under(note access panels in bot- tom board)the rim joist depending on the design of the home. Additional marriage line support. If the duct runs Method 1: Flex duct through rim joist through the marriage line Connect flex ducts that pass through the rim joist(Figure 51)as follows: rim joist, a perimeter pier is 1. Access duct. From underneath the home, cut through the bottom board and required under the mar- part the floor insulation to access the duct. riage wall at the crossover 2. Extend duct. Extend the flex duct from the side of the home with the furnace location unless otherwise through the rim joist opening and connect it to the opposing duct using the noted on the manufac- Q provided splicing collar. turer's blocking plan or other supplemental docu- Z 3. Connect duct. Connect the ducts using the procedure for joining under floor ments, or unless the home < flexible crossover ducts(p. 52). is constructed with a peri- 4. Seal bottom board. Move the floor insulation back to its original location and meter support system. Z seal the bottom board with tape specially made for that purpose(may be pro- 0 J Figure 51. In-floor duct with Ja rage Line Splicing Collar flex duct connection though ~ the rim joist(shown with peri- 00 Rim Joist Flooring Decking Z_ meter frame system) Z — T1 T1—C1—ram T1—T1—T —r O \ 1 1 1 \ 1 1 1 1 1 1 \ 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I \ \ 1 Q I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l l O Flexible Duct Beam O Bottom Board tD LU Access Area Z — — J Y U) Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 54 PFS#°5Connect 4i Crossovers Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Method 2: Gasketed Type through the rim joist With a through-the-rim joist design,the duct in each floor section terminates at an opening in the marriage line rim joist. Fixed through-the-rim crossovers employing a marriage line gasket such as in Figure 52 were completed in Complete Multi-Section Set,STEP 4.CHECK MARRIAGE LINE GASKET(p. 38)and require no additional work here. Figure 52. In-floor duct with gasket between halves. .......... 3'x14"rectangular to 5"(or 6')round adapter Typical each side of mating line. Typical transverse floor joist 13/16"min.fiberglass -- tluct board gasket between rim joists. Mating line rim joist Factory installed 5'or 6"round flexible duct, #3 SIFF 20 rall.Not required with Dual Quad or Integral Floor units. Under the rim joist In this configuration,flexible crossover ducts from adjoining sections pass through the floor and dip under the rim joist at the marriage line where they are joined (Figure 53). Pull each pair of ducts through the openings provided in the bottom board, under the marriage line rim joist and connect them using the provided splicing collar and the pro- cedure for joining under floor flexible crossover ducts(p. 52)or the duct manufacturer instructions if provided. _I Figure 53. In-floor duct with Marriage Line Zflex duct crossover under the Flexible Duct Rim Joist i IF oorDecking rim joist N Ins ul anon m .1 0 Bottom '�i11 i i�1 i i i i,fly` =J f E.—'�,1 1 t t 1 1 � —a PI wood Board X ���• y j j l l l l I I I I \ y Reinforcing Plate O(Typ.Each Side) Spl icing Collar > Strap 0 z z cn D r r D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 55 Connect Crossovers PJ 4M Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 STEP 2. CONNECT ELECTRICAL CROSSOVERS OF Multi-section homes may have one or more electrical crossovers located in the wall(s) and/or floor(s)along the marriage line(s). / • // JOINING WIRES Use qualified electricians. Two types of connections may be present at these locations—snap connectors and All electrical work must be junction boxes. Identify matching circuits if multiple circuits exist at a single crossover performed by a qualified location.These will be coded for identification. Connect snap connectors according to electrician and comply with the connector manufacturer's installation instructions, including fastener requirements. the 2005 NEC. Connect wires in junction boxes as follows(Figure 54): Disconnect power.Turn off power to the home before Pull wires. Pull circuit wires into the junction box, sliding them through a romex con- making connections. nector and secure snugly. (Figure 54) Do not over-tighten. Proper use of GFCI cir- 1. Strip wires. Remove the outer jacket that holds the circuit wires together pro- cuits. Ensure Ground Fault viding a minimum of four inches of free wire in the box. Circuit Interrupted (GFCI) 2. Connect wires. Connect wires together matching like colors, using appropri- circuits are connected to ately sized wire nuts. Use the ground wire to ground the junction box and/or the proper GFCI protected cover plate(s), if metal. Junction boxes may contain single or multiple 15 or circuits from the power 20-amp circuits, or a single 240-volt appliance circuit. supply. 3. Replace cover. Reposition the junction box cover and secure using machine (not sheet metal)screws. Figure 54. Types of junction box wiring connections A pproved A roved Connectors Connectors Approved Connecos Q _While White *Whffi lackRed ackck Approved P las to 'Whte ///ggqqqq eWhi orTypi Box Ground Ground ® la R Black (Typical)pica I) While Ground Grou d Q round s Ground Blac Whie Whiffi round Fi lack ® round r_,..X �C Is npa Per Type lack Box Used(Typical) m and Lug(Metal Boxes Only) round Lug(Metal Boxes Only) round Lug(Metal Boxes Only) Single 15 or 20 AMP Circuit Double 15 or 20 AMP Circuits 240V Appliance Circuit J FLOOR CROSSOVER Q When making electrical connection(s)in the floor, use one of the wiring options de- Z z scribed below: • Q 9 snap Using� Method 1:Access panel p connectors. Do z 1. Access wires. Find the crossover location(s)and remove the access panel(s) not use oversized nails or p drive nail heads into snap if attached. If access panel openings are not provided, cut through bottom � connectors. Some connec- t board to expose the wiring (Figure 55). tors are designed for one- Q2. Route wires. Pass the wires through predrilled holes or notches in the rim time use only—a new con- joist or if there is a single bumped-out access panel as in Figure 56,then un- Hector must be used if they Z der the rim joists. If holes or notches have not been provided and there is no become separated. bumped-out access panel, drill maximum one-inch diameter hole(s)half-way protect cables. Cover all z up the rim joists on each home section, making sure the holes align and feed p cables with conduit or other the wire through the hole. suitable weather-resistant 3. Connect wires. Connect wires via a junction box or snap-connector(s)as de- and protective material. O scribed above. a 4. Secure wires. Secure wires with staples to adjacent joists or studs within p eight inches of junction box or snap-connector(s). V 5. Install smash plates. For notched perimeter joists, install steel wire protec- w z tors(smash plates). J 6. Seal bottom board. Replace insulation and re-install access panels and/or Yseal the bottom board with tape specially made for that purpose(may be pro- U) vided). The access panel(s)may be temporarily installed near the crossover Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 56 PFS#°5Connect Conforms to Crossovers HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 location or shipped loose with the home. asket Figure 55. Electrical cross- over floor wires with flush Hole Through access panels Rim Joist Junction Box or __-IfJoists Are Notched,Steel Protectors May Snap-Connector Be Provided With the Home 1 1 l I Accessro Panel May Be Pvided Figure 56. Floor electrical crossover wires with bumped-out access panel L--J�nclnSmSnap Connector PmtectNe Cover (If Not Pmvided,Patch Bottom Board.) Method 2: Junction box with conduit 1. Access boxes. If junction boxes are not exposed, access them inside the floor by cutting the bottom board or by removing the access panel(s). Remove the junction box covers. 2. Connect wires. If wire is coiled inside one junction box, insert it into provided flexible conduit and pass it under the rim joists to the opposing box and make the connection as described above. If no coiled wire is provided, install pro- vided ship-loose conduit with wire making connections in both boxes(Figure 57). 3. Cover boxes. Replace and secure covers on junction boxes. N 4. Seal floor. Replace any displaced insulation and replace access panel or seal X the bottom board with tape specially made for that purpose(may be provided). r Variation to Method 2:A junction box may be installed only on one side with the Z other side containing conduit behind an access panel. Bring the conduit to other m side and make one connection in the junction box. n O Gasket Figure 57. Under the rim O joist electrical crossover 0 connection with conduit > i Z Junction Box(May Be Under Wire For Crossover Z o r Alon gside Floor Joist May Be Coiled Inside Junction Box D Flexible Conduit D WALL CROSSOVERS 3 Connect electrical, phone, cable television, and stereo speaker wires in marriage walls � and/or partition and end walls. y Avoid damaging crossover Z If access panels into the marriage walls are not provided,then the connection should wires. Carefully fold mar- D have been made prior to bringing the home sections together. If access panels are riage wall crossover wires r provided in marriage, end or partition walls, remove the panels,join the wires as so they stay within a single described above using the provided snap-connector,junction box, or at a receptacle, bay and are not sand- 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 57 ConnectPFS#°5 4i • • Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 and re-attach the access panel (Figure 58 for marriage walls and Figure 59 for wiched between studs partitions and end walls). when the sections are pulled together. Connect Wires Figure 58. Inside marriage at Junction Box, Wall crossover connection Receptacle,or Snap-Connector r-� Optional Access Panel Figure 59. Inside partition or Endwall Access to Junction Endwall end wall electrical crossover Side'A' Box-Inside Home Side'B' connection ————— Factory-Installed Wire Protectors M arriage Line STEP 3. INSTALL ELECTRICAL BONDING To ensure all metal parts are effectively grounded, electrically bond all chasses to- gether as follows(Figure 60): 1. Find lugs. Determine if solderless ground lugs are provided on the front or rear frame outriggers or headers. J 2. Attach wire. If lugs are provided, uncoil the bonding wire (#8 minimum bare Dcopper wire)from one side of the home and connect it to the lug provided on z the opposing side using the provided paint penetrating star washer, tighten the set screw firmly on the wire and repeat for any additional home sections. z Figure 60. Electrical bonding O = Marriage Line of multi-section homes a - J J Q I r H CO z z O Rear Outrigge rat #8 Min.Copper Solderless Lug Each Marriage Line Ground Wire Half of Home Q O 3. Attach strap. If ground lugs and copper wire are not provided, attach the pro- (L vided four-inch bonding strap to each pair of adjacent chasses with two#8 x O 3/4"self-tapping metal screws (one screw each side). V w z J Y Ito Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 58 P40S#05 Connect Conforms to • • HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 STEP 4. CONNECT WATER LINES Connect water lines inside the floor through access panels or below the bottom board as follows: V&dloz A WATER LINES ACCESSED THROUGH PANELS Applying cement. Follow 1. Remove panels. Remove access panels from each home section. cement manufacturers in- 2. Remove caps. Remove shipping caps from ends of water lines. structions with respect to application and drying time. 3. Pull lines. Pull water lines through holes in rim joist. If holes are not provided, Allow cement to fully cure drill round holes in the center of the rim joist,with a maximum diameter of one before filling pipes with wa- third the rim joist depth (Figure 61). ter. 4. Connect pipes. Connect threaded water lines using provided connector fit- tings(do not use lubricants or sealants). Connect non-threaded water lines using provided fittings and cement, inserting pipe to full depth of each fitting (a short connector pipe may be provided to bridge the gap between sections). 5. Test.Test connections for leaks. 6. Seal floor. Securely replace insulation and access panels. ----- ----- Figure 61. Waterline cross- over with access panels I WATER LINES DROPPED BELOW BOTTOM BOARD 1. Remove caps. Remove protective shipping caps from ends of pipes and V&IOZ / make sure pipe ends are clean and smooth. 2. Connect pipes. Connect threaded water lines using flexible pipe or a rigid Choosing cement type. connector line(if provided)and connector fittings (do not use lubricants or Use the proper cement for water lines as it may differ sealants). Connect non-threaded water lines, pipe, and elbows with cement provided, inserting pipe to full depth of each fitting (Figure 62). from the cement used for the DWV system. 3. Test.Test connections for leaks. 4. Protect pipes.Wrap water lines with insulation and bottom board shipped loose with home or otherwise protect to prevent freezing.Tape bottom board using tape specially made for that purpose(may be provided)and staple with CA 7/16"x 1/2"staples at four inches D.C. around bottom board using a divergent X (stitch)stapler or equivalent. If heat tape is used it must be listed for manufac- tured home use and be installed in compliance with manufacturer instructions. Z m Marriage Line 0 Supply Side Ir Figure 62. Waterline cross- 0 (Side With Water Heater) Receiving Side over through bottom board X a C-) X D Z Direction of Flow Gasket Z Cn Cap to Be Protective Cap D Removed on Site r r D Water Line and Elbows Shipped Loose to be Z Added on Site D Z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 59 ConnectPFS#°5 • • Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 STEP 5. CONNECT DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT LINES / , // Complete portions of the drain,waste, and vent(DWV)system that are below the floor Providing required clear- as follows: ances. Provide the drain 1. Remove caps. Remove shipping covers from pipes extending through the outlet with a minimum bottom board; inspect pipes and fittings and clean them of dirt, obstructions, clearance of three inches in and burrs. any direction from all parts 2. Assemble pipes. Using the drain schematic drawing provided with the home, of the structure or any ap- begin assembling the DWV system starting at the location farthest from the purtenances and with not sewer/septic connection and working towards the outlet,fastening the pipe less than 18 inches unre- with cement or adjustable screw-clamp connectors, if provided (Figure 63). stricted clearance directly in As the system is assembled, support the piping with temporary blockin front of the drain outlet. y pp p p g p y g Unless otherwise noted on the schematic diagram, provide a minimum 1/4 Provide any cleanouts with 12 clearance of a minimum clearr inch per foot slope towards the sewer/septic using a plumber's level.Where a inches directly front its slope of 1/4 inch per foot cannot be maintained, use a minimum slope of 1/8 inch per foot and install of a full-size clean-out at the uppermost point of the opening. run (Figure 64). Cement Coupling Figure 63. Drain crossover (P rovided)to End of connection Pipes Support Straps Drain Pipe Fasten Coupling Direction of Flow and Slope L-Direction of Flow and Slope (Provided)to Piping Coupling With Clamps Connection Pipe Coupler Figure 64.DWV system J Drain pipe rain Drain Dropout Dropou Supports Cover Dust Dropout Slo Dust Cover Z Dust Sanita —Long Turn Ell Cover Tee Slo E Slope Wye Long Turn Tee Z WyeO lean-Out Plug (Su bsitute for Elbow Double Ell ong Turn Ell and Provide a Full J Long Turn Ell Size Clean Out When QTo Sewer/Septic Required) 3. Test. Conduct a two-part leakage test on the completed drainage system as Zfollows: z 0 Part 1. With all fixtures connected, and all tub and shower drains plugged, O fill the system with water to the rim of the toilet bowl through a higher fix- Choosing glues. Use only Q ture. Release all trapped air, replace tub and shower plugs, backfill fix- solvents and glues com- w tures, and allow the system to stand at least 15 minutes. Check for leaks. patible with the pipe(ABS aDrain the system. If leaks are found, repair and retest. or PVC). Follow manufac- w 0 Part 2. Plug all fixtures, sinks, showers, and tubs and fill with water. Re- turer's instructions. Vlease the water in all fixtures simultaneously to obtain the maximum pos- w sible drain piping flow.As water is draining, check for leaks. If any are Z found, repair and retest. J Y4. Connect to outlet.Connect the main drain line to the site sewer/septic hook- up, using an approved elastomer coupling (Figure 65). Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 60 PFS#°5 Connect Conforms to Crossovers HUD MHCSS 1n5i09 Figure 65. DWV connection to sewer/septic MFloor Examples odrf - Support Connection Pipe and Fittings(No Supplied by the Manufacturer Strap at um of 4 Center Chain edrwer Hook Up 5. Install supports. Install permanent drain line supports at a distance of four feet o.c. or less(see Figure 63, Figure 65, and Figure 66). (2)0.131"Diax3 n"Nails Figure 66. DWV pipe sup- Min.2x3 Lumber port options 0.131"Diax3 q"Nail Galy.or Alum.Strip Min.1x3 Lumber i , // (2)0.131"Diax3 a" Nails Into Floor Joist I Protect pipes from freez- 1 1 z> x z"x,scA ing. If the home is to be left Staples or(2) unheated in cold weather, 0.131"Dia x 3 a' Nails Each End pour antifreeze solution into all drain traps, including (2)Staples or sinks,tubs, and toilets. Be Screws Each Side sure that the antifreeze is Galy.or Alum Strip safe for the fixtures and P- Min.2x3 Lumber traps. Drain Pipe Installing quick disconnect fittings. Do not use tools, 6. Insulate. Replace all insulation and make sure all potentially exposed portions lubricants, or sealants with of the DWV system are well insulated to protect against freezing. quick disconnect fittings. CA Gas test precautions. Do STEP 6. CONNECT GAS LINES not connect to gas service z The gas crossover connection may use quick disconnect fittings or threaded connec- until tests described in m tors. Find the connection location below the floor at the marriage line and gather the Connect Utilities have been n O connectors(they may be shipped loose if not present under the home). successfully completed. X a For quick disconnect fittings(Figure 67), remove any dust caps and then with one O hand, pull back on the quick disconnect device, snap it over the quick disconnect adap- tor and release it to complete the connection. For threaded connectors(Figure 68), remove the black cap and nipple(or any other z plugs, such as a black iron plug)from both the supply and receiving sides and screw Z the connector onto the supply and return pipes as necessary. Cn Check for leaks before connecting to gas service(see Connect Utilities, STEP 3. D r CONNECT GAS SERVICE, p. 83). D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 61 ConnectPFS#°5 Crossovers Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Quick-Disconnect Figure 67. Gas crossover Male Fitting Flex Factory Installed Shut-Offvalve with quick disconnect fittings Installed on Quick-Disconnect Inlet Side Figure 68. Gas crossover Female Fitting with threaded connectors Installed on Inlet Side Flex Connector Factory Installed Male Cap Female Cap C;� Female Cap? Or Installing wiring.When in- Male Cap stalling telephone and ca- Direction of Gas Flow Direction of Gas Flow ble television wires, do not damage electrical wires, STEP 7. CONNECT TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV WIRING plumbing lines, ducts. Serious personal injury or Install telephone and cable television wiring in accordance with the requirements of the death could result from LAHJ, the NEC, and NFPA No.70-2005. When making crossover connections or in- damage to electrical wires. stalling telephone or cable television wires, do not run them in the same raceway as, or in close proximity to, high voltage electrical conductors or cables. Wires should only be installed by trained professionals. •• to • • J a D z a z O a J J a H co z_ z O H a O a O V w z J Y U) Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 62 PFS#°5Complete Interior 4j Conforms to HUD MHCSS Complete the Interior 1,15/09 This chapter covers the completion of the home's interior finishes including finishing walls, ceilings,flooring,trim, and mis- cellaneous items. Follow the Steps • • STEP 1.ALIGN MARRIAGE WALLS (p. 63) STEP 2. FINISH GYPSUM BOARD (p. 63) STEP 3. COMPLETE WALL AND CEILING FINISHES(p.64) STEP 4. COMPLETE CARPET(p. 64) STEP 5. COMPLETE TRIM (p. 64) STEP 6. INSTALL SHIP LOOSE ITEMS (p. 64) STEP 1. ALIGN MARRIAGE WALLS Align and secure walls at marriage line openings as follows: 1. Align walls.Align walls and clamp in place. 2. Fasten walls. Secure clamped walls together with metal straps or long screws so they do not move when the clamps are removed. Insert wood wedges in gaps between walls, and glue and screw to create a tight connec- tion. 3. Fill gaps. Fill any remaining gaps with wood or sheathing material. Does the home require patching and finishing gypsum board walls or ceil- 0- YES, go to STEP 2. FINISH GYPSUM BOARD, (p. 63) 1110- • .• to STEP 3. COMPLETE • N •' T r STEP 2. FINISH GYPSUM BOARD m Finish all unfinished gypsum board walls and ceilings as follows: n 1. Install panels. Install ship loose gypsum panels using a 1/4 inch diameter / , // X Ir bead of adhesive on all framing members and minimum 1-1/2 inch long dry- Fastening gypsum.When p wall screws, nails, or staples at six inches o.c. along panel edges and 12 attaching gypsum board, X inches o.c. in the field into framing members. depress, but do not break > 2. Mud seams. Mud and tape all seams and corners,filling all fastener depres- the paper face with the fas- p sions. Follow mud manufacturer's directions. tener. Breaking the paper Z 3. Paint.When the final coat of mud is dry, prime and paint all unfinished gyp- will weaken the connection. Z sum board to match existing paint color and finish texture. Using alternative materials. D Obtain the home manufac- r- Does the home _ pre-finished _ panels _ line? turer's approval before us- D ing interior finish materials •• to STEP 3. COMPLETE • other than those provided p 64) with the home. Z Z C D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 63 in PFS#°5 STEP 3. COMPLETE WALL AND CEILING FINISHES Conforms to Install interior ship loose wall and/or ceiling panels using a 1/4 inch diameter bead of Hun MHcss polyvinyl acetate(PVA)adhesive on all framing members and fasten with minimum 1- 1i15/09 1/2 inch long staples or nails at six inches o.c. along panel edges and 12 inches o.c. in the field into framing members. STEP 4. COMPLETE CARPET Install and seam ship loose or rolled carpet as follows: 1. Prepare floor. Clean the floor of all dirt and debris and smooth the floor deck / • // at the marriage line seams as necessary to ensure a level and smooth sur- Installing carpet.Only ex- face. perienced carpet installers 2. Lay pad. Lay down the carpet pad, if provided. should install carpet. Fail- 3. Stretch carpet. Ensuring all carpet"grain"runs in the same direction,fit and ure to follow the carpet secure the carpet using a power carpet stretcher. Stretch the carpet up to the manufacturer's directions seam and tack it down temporarily until the carpet is seamed. may void the carpet war- 4. Butter carpet. "Butter"with carpet adhesive the edges of the carpet along the ranty. seam. 5. Seam carpet. Place heat bond tape under the seam with the glue side next to the carpet and apply heat from a seaming iron to the top of the seam, press- ing the carpet into the glue. Stagger seams. 6. Keep scraps. Retain reasonable size carpet scraps to protect carpet and Stagger all seams. For ex- flooring during move-in. ample, locate the carpet pad seam three inches to STEP 5. COMPLETE TRIM left of marriage line and the Using fine gauge wire staples or pin nails, install ship loose molding and wainscot pan- carpet seam three inches to eling to finish trimming out ceilings, marriage line walls,front and rear end walls, and right of marriage line. passageway doors where necessary. STEP 6. INSTALL SHIP LOOSE ITEMS Remove all strapping, blocking, and packaging from appliances,windows, and doors. Install any drapes, mini-blinds, mirrors, door stops, closet shelves, and hardware per the product manufacturer's installation instructions. Proceed based on the foundation type: J •• to • D Load bearing perimeter wall, go to Connect Utilities (p. 77). Z Q Z O H Q J J Q H 0) Z_ Z O H Q O a O V w Z J Y Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 64 #05 Install Stabilizing Conforms to Systems HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Install Stabilizing Systems This chapter covers the design and installation of the stabilizing system which secures the home against lateral and upward forces caused by wind.The system covered here uses earth (or ground)anchors and steel straps connected to the home's longitudinal steel beams and/or exterior walls. Stabilizer plates may also be used to prevent the anchor head from moving laterally in the ground.An anchor, strap, and stabilizer plate (if used)together are referred to as a tie-down. Anchors can also be mounted in concrete footings when there is enough concrete mass (weight)to resist the lateral and upward forces.This type of system is not covered in this manual. Follow the Steps • - • STEP 1. DETERMINE ANCHOR LOCATIONS (p. 65) STEP 2. DETERMINE TIE-DOWN CONFIGURATION (p. 71) STEP 3.SELECT ANCHORS (p. 71) STEP 4. INSTALL ANCHORS(p. 72) STEP 5. INSTALL STRAPS(p. 73) STEP 6.TIGHTEN AND ADJUST STRAPS (p. 76) STEP 1. DETERMINE ANCHOR LOCATIONS Create a sketch of the home plan showing the exterior walls, marriage line(s)(if any)and frame I-beams (this will be similar to the base sketch created in Prepare Footings, page / // 18). Need for a stabilizing sys- See Table 19 for a list of anchor locations, types, and where they are required. Pages tem.The manufactured where the requirements are provided are noted in the last column. home must be secured As each anchor location is determined, mark it on the sketch, noting important dimen- against the wind by the use sions such as spacing between anchors. When complete, this will be the home's tie- of an anchor assembly oran alternative foundation down plan (Figure 69 and Figure 70). system.Where site or TABLE 19.ANCHOR LOCATION TYPES other conditions prohibit CA the use of the manufac- X . ...- turer's instructions, a regis- r tered engineer or regis- Z Frame Yes Yes 66 m - tered architect must design Vertical No' Yes i 70 the stabilizing system. p End wall Frame Sometimes Yes 70 Flood and seismic forces. X Marriage lineVertical Sometimes Yes 70 The stabilizing system re- O quirements in this chapter X Frame Yes Yes 70 do not consider flood or > Tag Unit Vertical No Yes 70 seismic loads and are not Z Vertical No Yes 70 intended for use in flood or •• Yes Yes 70 seismic hazard areas. In y those areas retain a regis- --I Connect any factory-installed sidewall tie-down straps to a ground anchor regardless of the wind tered engineer or regis- r zone in which the home is placed. tered architect to design r 2.Install marriage line anchors prior to moving the home over the top of the anchor locations and the stabilizing system. > then return to Set the Home or Complete Multi-Section Set respectively. O Figure 69 and Figure 70 illustrate typical anchor locations for a double-section home in Z Wind Zone I and Wind Zones II and III respectively. D Z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 65 Install Stabilizing PFS#°5 SystemsConforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Sidewall Frame Tie-down Figure 69. Typical anchor locations for a double- section home in Wind Zone/ Marriage wall vertical tie-down(some homes). Marriage Line Key: Q Anchor Head Strap ®,Vertical Tie-down Sidewall Frame Tie-down Figure 70. Typical anchor locations for a double- section home in Wind Zones 11 or 111 Marriage wall vertical tie-down. Marriage Extend strap to far I-Beam _i Line for Doublewide units with 5/12 Roof pitch. Endwall Tie-downs Sidewall vertical tie-down. SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHORS Use Tables 20, 21,and 22 to determine the spacing between anchors for Wind Zones I, II, and III, respectively. Spacing requirements will vary depending on the type of home (single or multi-section),the slope of the roof, the width of the floor for each section, the Maximum spacing re- sidewall height, I-beam spacing, and the height from the ground to the strap attachment quirements.The LAHJ point. Determine the values for the home. Using the table for the appropriate wind zone, may have anchor spacing determine the column and row that corresponds to the characteristics of the home. The requirements that super- value on the tables is the maximum distance between anchors. Keep in mind that side- cede the values provided wall frame tie-downs must be located no more than two feet from each end wall. in this manual. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 66 W1#05 %Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 TABLE 20.WIND ZONE I SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHOR MAXIMUM SPACING Roof slope maximum 4.35/12 und to (20 . . �. .. 1. Upto25" -- 8'-0" 0��� r,i.r,i���� 25"to 48" _ 8'-0" �PeY T.LF(3'9'�i,�i 48"to 67" 8'-0" `!`F 'C.0 ER��•. Up to 25" -- 8'-0" 25"to 48" PE19600312 -- 8'-0" 48"to 67" 8'-0" _ • • 9 STATE OF 4Z Up to 25" -- T-0" O /y P; 25"to 48" T-0" '%, c�' O I AN,. �N�6 1 48"to 67" -- T-0" ,1�'�i,SS/ONA1 . 91-01, Up to 25" 7'-0" Jeffrey T.tegault 25"to 48" -- T-0" 11:24:12 05'00' 48"to 67" T-0" Up to 25" 10'-9" 11'-3" T-6" 6'-6" 25"to 48" T-6" 8'-0" 5'-0" 4'-6" 48"to 67" T-6" 8'-0" 5'-0" 4'-6" . 1 Up to 25" 8'-3" 8'-9" 5'-9" 5'-0" •• 25"to 48" T-6" 8'-0" 5'-0" 4'-6" More than 48"to 67" T-6" 8'-0" 5'-0" 4'-6" to Up to 25" 9'-0" 10'4, T-0" 6'-0" • 25"to 48" 6'-9" T-3" 5'-0" 4'-3" • than- 48"to 67" 6'-9" 7'-3" 5'-0" 4'-3" 1 91-01, Up to 25" T-6" T-9" 5'-3" 4'-9" 25"to 48" 6'-9" T-3" 5'-0" 4'-3" 48"to 67" 6'-9" T-3" 5"-0" 4'-3" Up to 25" 11'-9" 13'-9" 8'-3" T-3" 25"to 48" 9'-6" 10'-0" 6'-0" 5'-3" 48"to 67" T-9" 8'-3" 5'-0" 4'-3" Up to 25" 11'-6" 12'-6" T-6" 6'-6" 25"to 48" T-9" 8'-3" 5'-0" 4'-3" . 48"to 67" T-9" 8'-3" 5'-0" 4'-3" Up to 25" 9'-3" 12'-3" T-9" 6'-9" (n 25"to 48" 8'-6" 91-0. 5'-9" 5'-0" More than 48"to 67" T-0" T-3" 4'-9" 4'-0" r 0 1 • Up to 25" 10'-6" 11'-0" 7'-0" 6'-0" Zm ' 25"to 48" T-0" T-6" 4'-9: 4'-0" 0 48"to 67" T-0" T-3" 4'-9" 4'-0" 0 Up to 25" 11'-9" 14'-0" 8'-3" 7'-0" -0 25"to 48" 11'-0" 12'-0" 6'-9" 5'-9" 0 48"to 67" 9'_0" 10'-0" 5'-6" 4'-9" D MM Up to 25" 13'-0" 14'-0" 8'-0" 7'-0" O 25"to 48" 10'-0" 11'-0" 6'-0" 5'-3" Z More than 48"to 67" 8'-0" 8'-9" 6-0" 4'-3"More han Z Up to 25" 9'-3" 13'-0" T-9" 6'-9" W 1 25"to 48" 9'-3" 10'-9" 6'-6" 5'-6" D More than r 48"to 67" 8'-3" 9'-0" 5'-3" 4'-6" r 8 ' 1 Up to 25" 11'-9" 13'-0" 7'-6" 6'-6" D 25"to 48" 9'-0" 9'-9" 5'-6" 5-0" 0 48"to 67" T-0" T-9" 4'-6" 4'-0" Z D Z C D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 67 Install Stabilizing PFS#os Conforms to Systems HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 TABLE 21.WIND ZONE II SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHOR MAXIMUM SPACING Height from Roof slope degrees) Sidewall height spacing Single section Double section Single section Double section Up to 22" __ 5'4" ` 11111 Fc %o 22"to 48" M.A. � �PE i� 48"to 67" -- N.A. ,� Up to 25" N.A. — PE 1960031 25"to 48" -- N.A. — Lessthan 48"to 67" N.A. STATE OF Q Up to 25" -- 4'-0' �i90.c�••':�NDIANA.•'r�t���: 25"to 48"More than N.A. Up to 25" N.A. / 2009.01.09-- 25"to 48" -- N.A. ( 11:23:58-0�'00' 48"to 67" -- N.A. -- Up to 25" 5'4" 5'4" -- 5'-4" or 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. -- 5'-4' 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. -- 5'-4' Up to 25" 4'-0" 4'-0" 5'-4' 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. -- 5'-4' . - 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. -- 5'-4' Up to 25" 4'-0" 4'-0" 5'-4' 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. -- 5'-4' More than 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. 5'-4' F:7,,6",to M- Up to 25" N.A. N.A. -- 5'-4' 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. -- 5'-4' 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. -- 5'-4' Up to 25" 5'4" 5'4" — 5'-4' 25"to 48" 4'-0" 4'-0" 5'-4' 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. -- 5'-4' Up to 25" 5'-4" 5'-4" -- 5'-4' 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. -- 5'-4' Mo rethain] 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. 5'-4' Up to 25" 5'4" 5'4" -- 5'-4' More thand 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. 5'-4' 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. -- 5'-4' T-6"to M Up to 25" 4'-0" 4'-0" 5'-4' 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. -- 5'-4' 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. 5'-4' Up to 25" 5'4" 5'4" -- 5'-4' 775.5"F®r 82.5" 25"to 48" 4'-0" 4'-0" 5'-4' 48"to 67" 4'-0" 4'-0" -- 5'-4' Up to 25" 514" 5'-4" 5'-4' 25"to 48" 4'-0" 4'-0" -- 5'-4' • - 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. -- 5'-4' Up to 25" 5'-4" 5'4" -- 5'-4' 25"to 48" 4'-0" 4'-0" — 5'-4' More than T-6"to M 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. 5'-4' 91-01, Up to 25" 5'4" 5'4" — 5'-4' 25"to 48" 4'-0" N.A. 5'-4' 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. — 5'-4' Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 68 PF$ #OS Install Stabilizing Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 TABLE 22. WIND ZONE III SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHOR MAXIMUM SPACING slopeM-r-mon Roof slope maximum 4.35/12 Roof maximum 5/12 . .•. degrees) Sidewall — strap a Floorwidth height spacing tachment 25"to 48" N.A. ```� PeY Ti iLieo�G,. 48"to 67" — N.A. P�G1ST Up to 25" — N.A. PE 19600312 25"to 48" -- N.A. Lessthan 48"to 67" N.A. STATE OF '�Q Up to 20" -- 4'-0" IA 20 48"'re than "to N.A. '// S'ONAI,ENG� , • Up to 25" N.A. v / 2009.01.09 25'to 48" N.A. /r 11:23:46-05'00' 48"to 67" -- N.A. -- -- Up to 25" 4'-0" 4'-0" -- 4'-0" 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. -- 4'-0" 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. -- 4'-0" Up to 25" N.A. N.A. -- 4'-0" 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. 4'-0" More than 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. 4'-0" Up to 25" 4'-0" 4'-0' 4'-0" 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. 4'-0" 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. -- 4'-0" Up to 25" N.A. N.A. 4'-0" 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. -- 4'-0" 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. 4'-0" Up to 25" 4'-0" 4'-0' -- 4'-0" 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. 4'-0" 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. -- 4'-0" Up to 25" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. 4'-0" 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. 4'-0" Up to 25" 4'-0' 4'-0" -- 4'-0" Cl) 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. -- 4'-0" X ' - 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. -- 4'-0" r • Up to 25 4-0" 4-0" 4-0" Z � � " ' ' ' m 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. 4'-0" 0 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. — 4'-0" 0 Up to 25" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" a 25"to 48" 4'-0" 4'-0" -- 4'-0" 0 W 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. -- 4'-0" D • • Up to 25" 4'-0" 4'-0" -- 4'-0" 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. 4'-0" Z • -than 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. -- 4-0" Z Up to 25" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" W • 48 67"to " N.A. N.A. _= 4'-0" D 're than 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. 4'-0" r � Up to 25" 4'-0" 4'-0" -- 4'-0" D� 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. -- 4'-0" O 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. 4'-0" Z D Z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 69 Install Stabilizing Systems PFS #°5 SIDEWALL VERTICAL ANCHORS Homes designed for Wind Zones II and III also require vertical tie-downs along the side- conforms to walls.The vertical tie-down anchor straps(or brackets for connecting to the home)are Hun MHcss factory installed and indicate the locations.Vertical and frame sidewall tie-downs may iii5/09 connect to one double-headed anchor or each to its own dedicated anchor. Any factory-installed sidewall tie-down straps must be connected to a ground anchor re- gardless of the wind zone in which the home is placed. END WALL FRAME ANCHORS End wall frame tie-downs are especially important for homes that are wider and have higher roof pitches because those features increase the surface area exposed to wind loads at the ends of the home. Use Table 23 to determine the number of end wall frame anchors required at the each end of each home section. End wall frame tie-downs are not required at Wind Zone I. TABLE 23. END WALL FRAME ANCHORS REQUIRED PER HOME SECTION ON EACH END OF THE HOME T. LFG 4.35/12 2 4 4 4 4 4 ��,�Q�G 9F0•;`� 5/12 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. PE19600312 4.35/12 4 4 4 4 4 4 — • • a STATE OF Q 5/12 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. '1��0XI'•.://�OIANP:•' 4.35/12 3 3 3 3 3 4 i FS NA0 5/12 3 3 3 3 4 4 �/'S%ON I I \\\\\��` 4.35/12 3 3 4 3 4 4 Jeffrey T.Legault 5/12 3 3 4 3 4 4 III 2009.01.09 7 11:23:28-05'00' MARRIAGE LINE VERTICAL ANCHORS , // In Wind Zones II and III, marriage line anchors are required along the marriage wall. In Wind Zone I marriage line anchors are sometimes required. (Figure 80) There may be manufacturer-installed brackets indicating required tie-down locations When to install marriage (may be identified by tags or paint),If necessary to avoid interference with tie-downs, the line anchors.Anchors marriage line pier location may be offset horizontally from the column by a maximum of 6 along the marriage line inches. must be installed prior to the second half of a multi- TAG UNIT FRAME ANCHORS section home being set. See Addendum to these installation instructions for tie-down requirements for tag units. Setting the strap angle. When straps are con- TAG UNIT VERTICAL ANCHORS nected only to the near I- See Addendum to these installation instructions for tie-down requirements for tag units. beam, (Figure 71)the an- gle the strap makes with PORCH POST ANCHORS the ground should be be- At Wind Zone II or III install tie-down strap to a ground anchor through the factory in- tween 30 degrees and 60 stalled bracket. Install ground anchor and tie-down strap at each factory installed degrees. Angles greater bracket. than 60 degrees may re- OFFSET UNIT ANCHORS quire closer anchor spac- See Addendum to these installation instructions for tie-down requirements for offset ing. units. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 70 Install Stabilizing L Systems PF�HUDMHCSS #°5 STEP 2. DETERMINE TIE-DOWN CONFIGURATION There are two primary tie-down configurations: the near beam and the far beam meth- ods. Skyline Corporation use the near beam method for all Wind Zone I applications. f/fs/09 The near beam method is also used at Wind Zones II and III, except when a unit has a 5 in 12 roof pitch, and then the far beam method is used. The two methods are described below: • Near Beam Method. Connect an anchor strap from the anchor head to the beam closest to the anchor. (Figure 71). In addition for Wind Zones II and II, connect a vertical sidewall strap from the sidewall of the home to the anchor head using a double-headed anchor. • Far Beam Method. Connect an anchor strap from the anchor head to the out- side beam. (Figure 71). In addition for Wind Zones II and Il, connect a vertical sidewall strap from the sidewall of the home to the anchor head using a double- headed anchor. The far beam method is only required for Figure 71. Lateral tie-down Sidewall Vertical Tie-down Floor configurations (Wind Zone II or III). Near I-Beam - Far I-Beam Gro nd Level Near Beam sidewall frame tie-down Vstabi,izer Angle-30 to 60 degrees ar Beam sidewall frame tie-down(5/12 Roof pitch units at Wind Zone II or III). plate "-Ground Anchor CA X STEP 3. SELECT ANCHORS Z Use the torque probe results from Prepare the Site, STEP 5. DETERMINE SOIL- M BEARING CAPACITY AND FROST LINE (p. 15)and the anchor manufacturer instruc- n tions; select the type and length of anchor to use.The installed ground anchor size O (length) must be listed (i.e. approved)for the soil class. O Make sure the anchor is of sufficient length such that the top of the helix is below the D frost line. Select a shaft diameter sufficient to resist excessive torsion, "ring-off" (when the helix or anchor head separates from shaft)or shaft splitting. Consult the anchor sup- p plier for guidance. Z Review all of STEP 3. INSTALL ANCHORS (p. 71)and STEP 4. INSTALL STRAPS(p. y 72) before making final anchor selections to determine when single-headed vs. double- D headed anchors should be used. Follow the specifications in Table 30 when selecting r stabilizing system components. y O Z D Z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 71 Install Stabilizing #05 Systems 43, Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 TABLE 24.ANCHOR SYSTEM MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS Component Specification Anchors must be tested and listed to resist a minimum ultimate load of 4,725 Ibs and a minimum allowable working load of 3,150 Ibs or ultimate and corresponding working load limited by soil conditions and anchor length.The working load is the maximum load the designer can use.Ground anchors must be provided with protection against weather deterioration and corrosion at least equivalent to that provided by a coating of zinc on steel of not less than 0.30 oz per sq ft of surface coated. Straps must be minimum 1-1/4"x 0.035"zinc-coated(0.30 oz per sq ft)steel strapping conforming to ASTM D3953-97,Type 1, Grade 1,Finish B with a minimum allowable working load capacity of 3,150 Ibs and a minimum ultimate load of 4,725 lbs.Slit or cut edges of zinc-coated strapping do not need to be zinc coated. The size and type of stabilizer plate,if required by the ground anchor manufacturer,will be specified in the anchor manufacturer's instructions.Stabilizer plates must be provided with protection against weather Stabilizer plates deterioration and corrosion at least equivalent to that provided by a coating of zinc on steel of not less than 0.30 oz per sq ft of surface coated.Alternatively,ABS stabilizer plates may be used when listed and certi- fied for such use. STEP 4. INSTALL ANCHORS Before beginning anchor installation, check for obstructions under the home such as piers and frame members that may interfere with the tie down strapping. Check with util- ity companies to determine the location of underground utilities, such as electrical and phone lines, and water, sewer, and gas pipes that may be buried in potential anchor lo- @Grading area cations.Also check for homeowner-installed wires and pipes, such as those connecting around anchors.Anchor exterior lighting or sheds to the home.These must also be avoided. heads should not rest in FRAME ANCHORS sunken spots. Grade the Frame anchors can be installed in two ways, in-line and against a stabilizer plate. The ground so that water does two methods are discussed below: not collect around anchor heads, but runs away from In-Line Configuration the anchor and out from The in-line configuration (Figure 72)for homes can be used in Wind Zone I only. Typi- under the home. Do not cally, in-line anchors are used under high homes where the anchors can be installed bury anchor heads. from under the home after the home is set. In-line anchors can also be installed before the home is set, however, precisely aligning the anchor with the home both vertically and horizontally is difficult. Using swivel connectors for the strap to beam connection can provide some horizontal flexibility. To install in-line frame anchors, drive the anchor into the ground at an angle and location such that a straight line can be drawn from the tip of the anchor through the anchor head and to the connection point on the I-beam (Figure 73). Figure 72. In-line anchor configuration Figure 73. Stabilizer plate Main Main configuration Beam Beam Sidewall Frame Sidewall Frame Tie-Down Strap Pier Tie-Down Strap Pier Ground Ground Anchorwith Anchor Stabilizer Plate ill I III—I I I—III I III I III—I I�ICI I I�I1-j1 I��I�1=1I I I III I I I—I I I I—III I E I��I III—I Imo' —III I III—I I�I I—I i'I Stabilizer Plate Configuration Stabilizer plate configurations (Figure 73)are suitable for homes in all wind zones.An- chors may be installed after the home is set.A stabilizer device,typically an ABS or metal plate, is used to prevent the top of the anchor from slicing through the soil when the load is applied. Stabilizer plates are available in a variety of widths. Choose the wid- est plate that can be driven into the soil to maximize resistance to movement.The LAHJ Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 72 Install Stabilizing Systems may have stabilizer plate requirements. S #0 Conforms to Install anchors with stabilizer plates as follows: HUD MHCSS 1. Locate anchor. Select a location for the anchor under the home but within six vtsiov inches of the exterior wall (Figure 74).Aviod locations that will interfere with skirting. Figure 74. Determining an- chor and stabilizer plate lo- Ploor cation 6"max. I-Beam 15 degrees 12"or 16" Stabilizer plate 2. Install anchor.To assure that the anchor attachment point will end up at the stabilizer plate, start the anchor insertion approximately 12 inches back from from the desired location if using a 48 inch long anchor, or approximately 16 inches if using a 60 inch long anchor. Install the anchor at about 15 degrees off vertical, with the head tilted away from the home. Install the anchor to a depth of @Soil depression. approximately one half its length. Do not locate anchor 3. Drive stabilizer plate. Drive the stabilizer plate into the ground to its full depth heads in soil depressionswhere water may pool. at the point determined in Step 1. 4. Complete anchor installation.Screw the anchor the rest of the way into the ground. The finished anchor must be installed to its full depth. CA VERTICAL ANCHORS X To install vertical anchors, screw the anchor into the ground directly under the strap at- tachment point on the home until the bottom of the anchor head is flush with the ground Z or no more than one inch above grade. M 0 STEP 5. INSTALL STRAPS W Follow the instructions below to connect straps from the home to sidewall frame, end wall p frame and vertical anchors. D Always protect straps at sharp corners including around I-beams with radius clips or other methods(Figure 75). Radius clips may be fabricated from 26ga (min)by 1 1/4-inch Z wide galvanized steel strap formed to fit around corners. Z W Figure 75. Radius clips D r Longitudal D Bracket Protect Tolif / O Bottom of BeI-Beam Z N Strap is Wrapped Around Beam D Z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 73 Install Stabilizing Systems Awl IF SPLICING STRAPS Conforms to Splicing may be required when a pre-cut strap is of insufficient length. Splices in tie-down HUD MHCSS straps are not permitted in a 'Y'configuration. Overlap straps by 12 inches, applying one 1/15/09 splice clip from above and the other from below; use a crimping tool to tightly seal the splice clips(Figure 76). Do not run any portion of the splice through an anchor head bolt. Figure 76. Tie-down strap splice Apply Splice Clips In Direction of Arrows Strap 'Y'Splice �Approx. 12" Not I NO Permitted 7 SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHORS Install straps to sidewall frame anchors as follows: 1. Connect strap to home.Connect one end of the strap to the home connection point using approved buckles or clips (swivel or hook clip preferred). Figure 77. Strap to beam connection gqQ5OrNda ed Strap to beam connection. Regardless of the strap Wrapsupplier's recommenda- 1Obeam strap around main O Connect hook connect tions,the strap must be beam main beam and connect other end of strapto connected to the top of the anchor head. main beam to prevent damage to the structure. 2. Connect strap to anchor.Connect the other end of the strap to the split bolt in the anchor. Leave enough strap length to be able to make at least three, but no more than five complete turns around the bolt before it becomes tight(approxi- mately 2 1/2 inches per turn or 7 1/2 to 13 inches total). Fewer than three turns and the strap may not hold onto the bolt when force is applied. Conversely, more than five turns may not fit within the U-channel of the anchor head. Follow the procedure outlined in Figure 78. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 74 Install Stabilizing Systems PFS#°5 0 Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 OInsert the tension bolt into the O Place the strap through the slotted O Using a 15/16"socket or open end anchor head and loosely attach shank of the tension bolt and bend wrench, rotate clockwise,wrapping the hex nut. up to 900. the strap around the tension bolt. OOnce tensioned to the point that O Once fully tensioned,align the If approved by the manufacturer, counterclockwise resistance square neck of the bolt with the double head anchors may be used appears, use a 5/9'openend square recess in the anchorhead for both diagonal and vertical wrench to hold the square neck and tighten the hex nut. This will tie-down strap tensioning.Tension while repositioning the 15/16" draw the two togetherand lock the the diagonal tie-down strap first. tensioning wrench to continue system into final position. Follow Steps 3 through 7to install tensioning. Repeat as required. straps to anchorhead. Figure 78. Procedure for connecting the strap to frame and anchor 3. Pretension anchor. For anchors with stabilizer plates, pretension the anchor by pulling it up to the stabilizer plate using the strap and take-up bolt to move the anchor head. Continue pulling the strap until the plate moves a small amount(about 1/2 inch). This is called packing the plate and it will yield the zbrzz strongest resistance(the bottom of the anchor head should be maximum 1/4 Anchor head location.As CA inch above the top of the stabilizer plate). the anchor is pulled up to END WALL FRAME ANCHORS meet the stabilizer plate, Z the head of the anchor will m Attach straps to the bracket welded by the manufacturer to the frame(Figure 79). If no rise. In its final position, the 0 brackets have been installed, use approved beam clamps designed specifically for this bottom of the anchor head 0 purpose, available from anchor suppliers. Connect straps to anchors following same pro- should be no more than a cedure as for sidewall frame anchors. 1/4 inch above the top of 0 the stabilizer plate. y I Bracket Figure 79. End wall frame p anchor attachment method Z Main Beam Z D Pier r /End Wall Tie- D 30-45 f Down Strap degrees \ Z 3 D z c Anchor with D r Stabilizer Plate 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 75 Install Stabilizing Systems PFS#°5 MARRIAGE LINE VERTICAL ANCHORS onformis to Co If vertical straps have been attached to the home by the manufacturer, connect the other xun Mxcss end of the straps to the anchor heads. Factory installed marriage line uplift straps must 1i15i09 be attached to anchoring equipment. The types of straps used are shown below. (Figure 80)Type 1 is a strap used at Wind Zone I only. Some Wind Zone I units do not require marriage line vertical uplift tie-downs. These units will not have any of the straps shown below factory installed and will have double marriage line walls. Type 2 and 3 are used at Wind Zone 11 or III only. All Wind Zone 11 or III multi wide units require marriage line vertical tie-downs. Figure 80. Marriage line ver- tical tie-downs Uplift connector capacity Type 3 is 3114 lbs.each to be resisted by anchoring equipment. Factory installed standard Uplift connector capacity is Type 1 T e l hurricane strap.Capacity 1242 lbs.each to be resisted by yp is 3150 tbs. anchoring equipment. 1/4"cable thimble inserted In connector hole. 7/32"or 1/4" / galvanized steel Slot in strap is for ~Standard hurricane is cable.Tension attachment of standard Li to be connected per manufacturer hurricance strap. directly to an instructions. approved ground anchor. STEP 6. TIGHTEN AND ADJUST STRAPS After all anchors have been installed and pre-tensioned, recheck all anchor straps to as- sure that they are tight and that the anchor shafts have remained in contact with the sta- bilizer plates. Do not over-tension straps. •• to • Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 76 PF 0Connect Utilities Conforms to HUD MHCSS Connect Utilities 1/15/09 This chapter contains procedures and requirements for the connection and testing of utility hook-ups. Responsibility for making utility connections varies by location. Consult the LAHJ and the utility before connecting the home to any utilities. Follow the Steps • - STEP 1. CONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICE(p. 77) STEP 2. CONNECT WATER SERVICE (p. 80) STEP 3. CONNECT GAS SERVICE (p. 83) STEP 4.CONNECT OIL SERVICE(p. 84) STEP 1. CONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICE The home is designed for connection to an electrical wiring system rated at 120/240 volt AC. All electrical field work must be done by a licensed electrician or other person ap- / / A proved by the LAHJ. Special precautions when FEEDER WIRE AND EQUIPMENT SIZES installing electrical ser- The current rating (in amperes)of the home can be found on the tag located on the out- vice. Installation of the side next to the feeder or service entrance, and on the electrical distribution panel. Using electric power to the home this information, determine the required feeder wire size from Table 25.These sizes are can cause exposure to live based on an ambient temperature of 86 degrees Fahrenheit and do not take voltage drop electrical circuits. Exposure into consideration. to live electrical circuits or improper grounding of the Acceptable conductor types are: RHH, RHW, RHW-2, THHN,THHW, THW, THW2, conductor in the panel THWN, THWN-2,XHHW,XHHW-2, SE, USE, and USE-2. board may result in severe TABLE 25. ELECTRICAL FEEDER WIRE AND EQUIPMENT SIZES FOR COPPER shock or possible electro- CONDUCTORS cution.A qualified installer must make the connec- Minimum Conductors(Cu) tions for the electric power. Size Junction Raceway Red& box size Conduit Black Bare Diameterfn 50 6x6x6 1 #6 AWG #6 AWG #10 AWG #8 r 100 8x8x4 1-1/4 #3 AWG #3 AWG #8 AWG #8 Z m 125 10x10x4 1-1/2 #2 AWG #2 AWG #6 AWG #6 0 150 10x10x4 1-112 1/0 AWG #2 AWG #6 AWG #6 X 200 12x12x4 2 3/0 AWG 1/0 AWG #6 AWG #4 0 O 225 15x12x4 2-1/2 3/0 AWG 1/0 AWG #4 AWG #4 D O Z z Cn D r r D O Z D Z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 77 Connect Utilities oFS#°5 Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 FEEDER CONNECTIONS Feeder connections are made from above or from below the home as follows: i ' /Z From above—mast weatherhead feeder The routing, connection, and support of the service drop must meet local codes. Homes Power supply.A large equipped this way contain all necessary conduits to the electrical distribution panel. enough power supply must However, the feeder conductors(not provided with the home)are installed on site. If the be available at the site.An masthead is located above the roof overhang, allow a minimum clearance of eight feet inadequate power supply above all roof points that the conductors pass over. There are two exceptions to this rule: erationmay result in improper op- (1)The vertical clearance may be reduced to three feet if the roof has a minimum slope damage of and possible of 4 in 12; and (2)The vertical clearance may be reduced to 18 inches if no more than damage to motors and ap- four feet of service-drop conductors pass above the roof overhang, and if they terminate crease a It may also in- at a through-the-roof raceway or approved support.A minimum clearance must also be crease electricity costs. provided from the final grade to the service-drop conductors.This measurement may vary from 10 feet to 18 feet, depending on the types of traffic anticipated below the ser- vice drop(refer to the NEC). Unless impractical, locate service heads above the point of attachment of the service-drop conductors and make them rain-tight. If individual conduc- tors do not extend downward,form drip loops. From below—underside junction box feeder A section of conduit is factory installed through the floor cavity. Connect to that conduit with approved fittings and conduit(not provided with the home)to the point where the service entrance cable enters the crawl space. Install properly-sized service entrance conductors from the main power supply to the panel board. Depending on the location of the main panelboard inside the home, or the point at which the service entrance conduc- tors enter the crawl space, a separate service disconnect may be required. Refer to Table 25 for the conductor and junction box requirements.The installer must provide the supply connection including the feeder conductors,junction box, and conduit connectors. Protect conductors emerging from the ground from a minimum of 18 inches below grade to eight feet above grade, or to the point of entrance to the home.The distance meas- ured from the top surface of a buried cable, conduit, or raceway to the finished grade must meet the minimum burial requirements outlined in the NEC. Use a moisture-proof bushing at the end of the conduit from which the buried cable emerges. GROUNDING /� The home must be properly grounded to protect the occupants.The only safe and ap- proved method of grounding the home is through an electrically-isolated grounding bar in the manufactured home distribution panel board. This grounds all non-current-carrying Grounding the electrical J metal parts to the electrical system in the home at a single point. system. Do not provide Q Each neutral conductor must be connected to the system grounding conductor on the the electrical power until the Z supply side of the main disconnect in accordance with Articles 250.24, 250.26, and grounding electrode is in- Q 250.28 of the National Electrical Code, NFPA No. 70-2005. stalled and connected. 2 When the meter base is Z Where the meter base has a disconnect(typically when the meter is more than 6 feet not on the house never use O from the service electric panel, although this may vary by LAHJ)the ground and neutral the neutral conductor of Qshould be bonded at that disconnect and then grounded to the driven earth ground. Four the feeder cable as a J wires will leave the service electric panel to the disconnect.Three wires will enter the ground wire. J disconnect from the meter base (refer to Figure 81). Q Where there is no disconnect on the meter base or between the meter base and service CO Z electric panel (typically when the meter is within 6 feet from the service electric panel, al- Z though this may vary by LAHJ),the main circuit breaker in the service electric panel be- 0 comes the first disconnect. In this case, the neutral and ground are bonded in the service Q electric panel and connected to the driven earth ground from the service electric panel.Three wires lead between the meter base and the service electric panel (refer to O Figure 82). IL W O V w Z J Y U) Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 78 PFS#E) Connect Utilities Coot to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Service Entry Figure 81. Electrical feeder rMain Panel (May Be Above Or Below Ground) connection when meter has Enclosure a disconnect installed(typi- B -2"Conduit To call more than 6 feet from Neutral Service Head y Equipment Bus Bar service electric panel). Ground Bus Bar Meter By Utility Meterbase Company Ground From Meter Enclosure Disconnect Bonding Strap 2"Conduit Not Installed Disconnect Grounding Lug L-2"Conduit (Fused) To Chassis To Grounding Rod To Main r Panel Metallic Conduit Or Fillings To Be Effectively Grounded To Equipment Ground Black-"HOT"ToAOrB Red-"HOT"To A Or B White To Neutral Bus Bar Ground To Equipment Ground Figure 82. Meter base wir- F Main Panel Service Entry ing when there is no sepa- Enclo (Above Or Below Ground) rate disconnect installed 2"Conduit To Neutral Service Head (typically within 6 feet of ser- a Equipment Bus Bar vice electric panel). Ground Bus or M eter By Utility Company M ete r Endosure Bonding Strap 2••Co ntluit Installed By Manufacturer Grounding Lug 2"Conduit To Chasss To Grounding Rod To Main f Panel Metallic Conduit Or Rsi ngs To Be Effectively Grounded To Equipment Black-"HOT'TO AOrB Ground Red-"HOT'To A Or B White To Neutral Bus Bar In all cases, a grounding electrode conductor and a ground wire must be installed ac- cording to the following specifications: 1. Grounding wire to be per Table 25 provided by the manufacturer. If manufac- CD turer provides a minimum 1/2 inch EMT or conduit raceway, the#6 minimum < bare copper wire is provided by the retailer for installation. E Z 2. The clamp connecting the grounding wire to the electrode shall be suitable for m direct burial and located flush or below ground level. n O 3. Use a listed 5/8 inch diameter by eight foot long iron electrode or nonferrous rod a of at least 1/2 inch diameter by eight feet long for grounding (larger sizes may O be required by the LAHJ due to soil impedence). y 1 4. Drive the electrode to a depth of not less than eight feet so that at least eight 0 feet of the electrode is in contact with the soil. Z 5. When rock is encountered,the electrode may be driven at an angle not to ex- y ceed 45 degrees from vertical or buried in a trench that is at least 2-1/2 feet D deep. r r D FIELD INSTALLED METER BASE O When a meter base is installed in the field, Figure 83 and the following requirements Z must be adhered to: D • Install the meter base according to the manufacturer's instructions. Z C • Use straps to support any conduit. Do not use the meter base equipment for D support. r • Use exterior equipment and enclosures listed as weatherproof and entrance 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 79 Connect Utilities PFS#°5 Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 conductors listed for wet locations. • The grounding bar may be installed separate from the neutral bar for purposes of testing the electrical system. • The grounding bar may be isolated during the electrical check and re-attached, after the tests are completed. • Check with the local electrical utility to verify meter base requirements and loca- tions and distances for the main panel and meter box. • The field installed meter base enclosure must be installed in accordance with its listing. Fasten securely to exterior wall studs and provide for a weather-tight seal. • Check the local code for any requirements regarding the location of the meter base. f Exterior Wall Meter Enclosure Figure 83. Meter base Meter clearances. 114"Air Space Between Meter Enclosure And Exterior Wall STEP 2. CONNECT WATER SERVICE CONNECTION To connect the home's water system to the water source, identify the water inlet located • under the home(usually below the water heater compartment or utility room)and follow Selecting heat tape. Use the procedure described below(refer to Figure 84): only pipe-heating cable J 1. Flush pipe. Flush field-installed water piping free of all debris prior to connec- (tape)listed for manufac- tion to the home's water inlet. tured homes, and install it z 2. Clean threads. Ensure that pipe threads are clean. in accordance with the ca- 2 3. Install pressure-reducing valve. If the local water supply exceeds 80 psi in- ta l(tape)manufacturer in- s z stall a pressure-reducing valve. talation instructions. O 4. Connect valve. Install a main shut-off valve between the water supply and the Maximum water pressure. Qinlet on the home. Locate the riser for the shutoff valve underneath or adjacent The water system for the J to the home. Select a full flow gate or ball shutoff valve, or equivalent valve. To home was designed for a J maximum inlet pressure of < prevent the possibility of fresh water contamination install an anti-siphon valve 80 psi. on all field installed exterior faucets. z z O H Q O a O V w z J Y U) Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 80 PFS#°5Connect Utilities Conforms to HUD MHCSS v15/09 Figure 84. Water system connection //. Turning on Water Service. Factory-In stalled Water Pipe Do NOT turn on the water service to the home until the Optional Hose Bib drain lines have been com- (Not Supplied) Connect n-- pleted and connected to the Here For Water *-- '� a------------ sewer system. System Test Service Connection (Not Supplied) Locate Water Riser Underneath or — Mandatory Shut-Off Adjacent to Home Valve(Not Supplied) 5. Install water heater discharge drain. Inspect the drain opening on the water heater to ensure that it is clear of any obstruction. If the home is to be installed on a basement or enclosed crawlspace, install drain pipe connecting the dis- charge from the water heater temperature and pressure relief valve to the out- @Using check side or to a sump. valves. Install a check 6. Install water heater drip pan drain.Assure that the drain for the water heater valve on the water inlet to drip pan does not terminate under the home. Using the materials provided and prevent water system the accompanying instructions run a drain line from the water heater drip pan drainage in the event of a through the floor to the exterior of the crawl space.Terminate the line between loss of water pressure from six and 24 inches above grade. (Figure 85). Make the termination point rodent the source. Such pressure proof. loss could cause the water heater to drain, exposing the heating elements of electric water heaters causing them to fail. Water Heater(factory installed) Figure 85. Water heater drip pan and drain Cn X Note 1. Water heater drip Exterior Wall pan drain pipe has been fac- r Water heater stalledrip) tory installed through the m (factory installed) bottom board. A 90 degree O elbow has been factory in- 0 stalled to accept the pipe ex- a Floor decking tension. X D Floorjoist Note 2. Insert the CPVC or PVC drain pipe extension Q (factory provided—field in- Z stalled) into the factory in- Z stalled 90 degree elbow. Be D sure to provide'/" per foot r CPVC or PVC water heater of slope to provide positive r Bottom board D drip pan over-flow drainage drainage. pipe(factory installed). See Q Install screen over end of CPVC or PVC pipe extension note 1. Z pipe extension(not (field installed). See note 2. 9 provided). D Support pipe extension every 4'-0" Z C D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 81 Connect Utilities PFS#°5 000 Conforms to HUD MHCSS 7. Insulate. In areas subject to freezing temperatures, protect with insulation or 1/15/09 heat tape pipes,valves and pressure reducers that are exposed to the out- ' doors; and pipes in water heater compartments with non-insulated doors. Con- nect heat tape to the electrical outlet under the home near the water supply • IOZ 'A inlet. Selecting heat tape. Use only pipe-heating cable (tape)listed for manufac- TESTING tured homes, and install it After testing the electrical system and connecting the water lines check the water system in accordance with the ca- for leaks using one of the procedures described below. Before testing, close all water ble(tape)manufacturer in- faucets, spigots, and toilet-tank float valves. stallation instructions. Hydrostatic(preferred): Testing water lines. Only use pneumatic(air)testing 1. Bypass water heater. Bypass the hot water heater by disconnecting the hot when hydrostatic testing is outlet and cold inlet water lines from the water heater and joining them together. not practical.Air under This will protect the hot water tank from damage and protect those involved in pressure is explosive. Ex- the test from possible injury. ercise extreme caution and 2. Fill water heater. Confirm that the water heater tank is full of water. notify all site personnel of 3. Pressurize system. Connect a hydrostatic pump,valve, and gauge to the loca- the test.Wear protective tion shown in Figure 84. Pressurize the system with water at 100 psi, and then eyewear and take precau- isolate it from the pressure source. Bleed all air from the highest and farthest tions to prevent impact points in the system. damage to the system while the test is in pro- 4. Hold pressure. Monitor the pressure for at least 15 minutes. gress. Do not pneumati- 5. Fix leaks. If the pressure drops below 100 psi, locate and correct any leaks by cally test CPVC systems. cutting out and discarding bad pipe sections or joints and installing new pipe or Pneumatically test Flow joints with couplings. Guard Gold systems only 6. Repeat. Repeat the test until all leaks have been eliminated. at low pressure levels(20 psi or less). Pneumatic: Pressurizing water lines. 1. Bypass water heater. Bypass the hot water heater by disconnecting the hot When pressurizing the wa- outlet and cold inlet water lines from the water heater and joining them together. ter system, connect the This will protect the hot water tank from damage and protect those involved in pump to a location above a the test from possible injury. closed shut-off valve so as 2. Pressurize system. Connect an air pump and pressure gauge to the water not to introduce pressure inlet, pressurize the system to 100 psi and isolate the pressure source from the into the municipal water system. supply. 3. Hold pressure. Monitor the pressure for least 15 minutes. If the pressure drops J below 100 psi, locate any leaks by applying soapy water to the connections and Q looking for bubbles. Z4. Fix leaks. Correct any leaks by cutting out and discarding bad pipe sections or joints and installing new pipe or joints with couplings. Z 5. Retest. Repeat the procedure until all leaks have been eliminated. O 6. Restore connections. Reconnect the water heater and the water supply. H J FREEZE PROTECTION FOR UNOCCUPIED HOMES J If the home is to be left unheated in cold weather, protect water lines from freezing as fol- Hlows: CO Z 1. Disconnect supply.Turn off the water supply and disconnect the water supply Z inlet. O H 2. Drain water heater.Turn off the water heater; if necessary, attach a hose to < the valve to direct water away from under the home, open the drain valve and O drain the tank completely. IL 3. Drain faucets. Open all faucets throughout the home(including the laundry 0 area if plumbed, and an exterior faucets and let them drain completely. O p Y ) P Y. V 4. Drain toilets. Flush toilets and drain water tanks completely. w Z 5. Close faucets. Close all water faucets with the exception of one. 6. Connect compressor. Connect a maximum of 30 psi air supply to the water `1 inlet connection using a low pressure compressor. U) 7. Open faucets.With the air supply on the system, open one faucet at a time Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 82 Connect throughout the home. PF4M -- 8. Disconnect compressor.After the entire system has been drained of all water, Conforms to disconnect the air supply and close the water inlet valve. HUD MI-Icss 9. Pour anti-freeze. Pour an antifreeze solution into all drain traps, including vlsio9 sinks,tubs, and toilets. Be sure that the antifreeze is safe for the fixtures and P- traps. STEP 3. CONNECT GAS SERVICE CONNECTION i /� If the home uses natural or liquid petroleum gas(LPG, also known as propane)for water • or space heating, cooking or other appliances,follow the procedure described below: Installing gas lines. Only 1. Inspect vents.Assure that all exhaust vents on gas-fired equipment are se- qualified professionals may curely connected and that roof jacks and stacks have not come loose during connect and test gas ser- transit and they are properly installed. vice. 2. Review appliance instructions. Review each appliance manufacturer's in- structions before the home is connected to the gas supply. Most gas appliances are typically configured to operate on natural gas. If the gas supply will be LPG, consult the appliance manufacturer's instructions to determine what changes need to be made. For homes located above 3,000 feet, appliances may require a different orifice. 3. Remove cap. Remove the protective cap from home inlet pipe and install a full flow shut-off valve at the supply inlet(Figure 86). 4. Install regulator.The gas piping system is designed for a pressure that is at least seven inches of water column (4 oz. per sq in or 0.25 psi) but not more than 14 inches of water column (8 oz. per sq in or 0.5 psi). If gas from any sup- ply source exceeds, or could exceed this pressure, install a regulator if required by the LAHJ. 5. Connect supply. Using matching threaded fittings, connect the gas supply to the inlet side of the shut-off valve. 6. Close valves. Close all valves at appliances prior to opening the main supply valve. Figure 86. Gas service con- nection Full Flow Shutoff Cn Valve Required Floor (Supplied By Others) r Z m 0 O Dust Cover a O W T Union(Supplied By Others) O Source of Gas Z Z TESTING y Test the gas piping system in the following two ways: 1)piping only and 2)entire system. D Consult with the LAHJ for any additional testing or start-up requirements. Before testing is begun,the temperature of the ambient air and the piping should be al Fill gas water heaters. Be- =j proximately the same. Conduct the tests when and where air temperatures will remain fore lighting the pilot on a Z constant. gas powered water heater, 9 Piping only test(all appliances isolated) fill the tank with water. Fail- Z 1. Isolate appliances. Isolate all appliances from the system by closing all appli- ure to do so could damage C ance shut-off valves. the water heater. 2. Attach gauge.Attach to the home's gas inlet a mercury manometer or slope 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 83 ConnectPFS#°5 Conforms to HUD MHCSS gauge calibrated in increments of not more than 1/10 lb. 1n5i09 3. Pressurize system. Using an air compressor, pressurize the system with com- pressed air to three psi and isolate the pressure source from the system. 4. Monitor pressure. Monitor the pressure for at least 10 minutes. 5. Check for leaks. If pressure drops below three psi, check for leaks by applying a non-corrosive, ammonia-free gas leak detection fluid to the joints at all valves, appliance connections, and crossover connections(do not use dish washing de- tergents, soap, or other household chemicals). If bubbles form, tighten the con- nection and recheck. 6. Repair leaks. If leaks persist, replace defective pipes or fittings with sound ma- terial and retest. 7. Release pressure. Release pressure and open all appliance shut-off valves. 8. Rinse connections.Thoroughly rinse all tested connections with water to re- move leak detection fluid. Entire system test(with appliances) 1. Close appliances. Close all gas equipment controls and pilot light valves ac- cording to the individual gas equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Open valves.Assure that gas shut-off valves for all gas equipment are in the open position. 3. Attach gauge.Attach to the home's gas inlet a pressure gauge calibrated in ounces. 4. Pressurize system. Pressurize the system with compressed air to six to eight ounces(3/8 to 1/2 psi, or 10 to 14 inches of water column). 5. Check for leaks. Check for leaks as described above in step 4 of the Piping only test. Replace defective pipes or fittings with sound material and re-test. 6. Rinse connections.Thoroughly rinse all tested connections with water to re- move leak detection fluid. GAS APPLIANCE START-UP Open the shut-off valve for each appliance and adjust the burners according to the appli- ance manufacturer's instructions.Verify that the furnace and water heater thermostats are operating properly and set them to the desired temperatures. STEP 4. CONNECT OIL SERVICE Homes that are equipped with oil burning furnaces must have oil supply piping installed F /� J and tested on site by a qualified professional in accordance with NFPA 31, Standard for Q the Installation of Oil Burning Equipment, 2001 or the requirements of the LAHJ, which- D Testing oil tanks.All oil Z ever is more stringent.The home manufacturer does not supply oil piping or tanks. Q storage tank and piping in- OIL CONNECTION stallations and tests must Z Consult the furnace manufacturer's instructions for proper pipe-sizing and installation meet all applicable local O procedures.Where piping is run through the bottom of the home, ensure all holes in the regulations and should be Q bottom board are sealed tight with foam, mastic, and/or tape specially made for that pur- made only by experienced, J pose and made rodent proof. qualified personnel. J When equipping the home with an oil storage tank, comply with the following: CO • Install the pipe with a gradual slope toward the fill end or drain plug (if so Z equipped)to facilitate pumping or draining of water and sludge. O Provide a readily accessible approved manual shut-off valve at the outlet, in- Qstalled to close against the supply. O Equip the tank with an approved oil filter or strainer located downstream from IL the tank shut-off valve. Use a filter or strainer containing a sump with a drain to O trap water. V 0 Equip under ground tanks with a filler neck extending one foot above grade and w a minimum 1-1/4 inch diameter vent pipe extending at least two feet above Z grade. YLocate the tank to be accessible for service and inspection, and safe from fire N and other hazards. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 84 Connect Utilities • If the tank is located inside a compartment of the home, provide ventilation at S#05 the bottom of the compartment to permit diffusion of vapors. If the tank is fixed to the home, provide for filling and draining from the outside. Co" to HUDD MHCSS • Insulate interior tanks from the structural members of the home. Provide tanks 1n5/09 so installed with an outside fill and vent pipe and an approved liquid level gauge. • Install tanks that feed vaporizing type oil furnaces so that oil flows by gravity. To achieve efficient gravity flow, make sure that the bottom of the tank is at least 18 inches above the furnace oil control level. • Tanks for gun type oil furnaces (these furnaces include a fuel pump)may be in- stalled above or below ground. OIL SYSTEM TESTING Before operating the system,fill the tank to capacity with the fuel to be burned and visu- ally check all joints in the system for leakage. Replace(do not repair)parts that leak. 111111� go to Prepare Appliances and Equipment(p. 86) Cn X r z m 0 O W a O W D O z z Cn D r r D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 85 Prepare Appliances #05 A;j • . . • Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Prepare Appliances and Equipment This chapter provides instructions for installing and/or preparing appliances and other equipment. While the items below can be completed in any order,the last item, CONDUCT ELECTRICAL TEST, must be done last. Follow the Steps • - • INSTALL AIR CONDITIONER OR HEAT PUMP (p. 86) PREPARE HEATING SYSTEM (p. 87) INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT(p. 87) PREPARE VENTILATION SYSTEM (p. 88) PREPARE FUEL-BURNING WATER HEATER(p. 88) PREPARE CLOTHES DRYER(p. 89) PREPARE SMOKE ALARMS (p. 90) PREPARE FIREPLACES (p. 90) PREPARE KITCHEN AND BATH APPLIANCES/FIXTURES (p. 92) INSTALL EXTERIOR LIGHTING (p. 93) INSTALL CEILING FANS AND LIGHTING (p. 93) TEST ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (p. 95) J INSTALL AIR CONDITIONER OR HEAT PUMP (if applicable) Q CENTRAL UNITS ZZ Install split system or unitary central air conditioners and/or heat pumps as follows: • 1. Check suitability. Check the home's Comfort Cooling Certificate (may be in- Use listed appliances.All Z cluded with the data plate)to confirm that the home is suitable for installation applicable appliances must O of central air. If so, note the air distribution system's rated duct capacity be listed or certified by a Q (BTU/hr), any equipment sizing guidance provided by the manufacturer and nationally recognized test- ( information provided to calculate the home's heat gain. ing agency for the applica- J Q 2. Select equipment. Select equipment with a rated heating capacity(BTU/hr) tion for which the unit is in- not exceeding the maximum indicated on the home's data plate and a rated tended and installed in ac- Z cooling capacity sized in accordance with Chapter 28 of the 1997 ASHRAE cordance with the terms of Z Handbook of Fundamentals or ACCA Manual J, Residential Cooling Load, 8th its listing or certification. O edition. Information needed to calculate the home's heat gain can be found on Properly sizing equipment. F_ the home's comfort cooling certificate. Choose equipment with a min. circuit Oversized cooling equip- amperage (found on the equip. rating plate)no greater than the branch circuit ment can lower energy effi- O rating of the exterior air conditioning receptacle(indicated on the adjacent ciency, reduce comfort, (L W tag), if present. shorten equipment life, and U 3. Install A-coil.When installing a cooling A-coil in a down-flow furnace that in- may cause moisture prob- corporates a fresh air intake duct, position the duct in the furnace cavity ac- lems in the home(including W Z cording to the furnace manufacturer's instructions(Figure 87). For electric potentially damaging g g the _J down-flow furnaces,trim the ventilation duct as needed to allow installation of home's structure). Sizing Y the A-coil and secure the duct to the wall of the compartment or to the top of guidance is provided by the U) Manufactured Housing Re- Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 86 PFS#05 Prepare Appliances Conforms to • • Equipment HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 the A-coil. Do not restrict the flex duct opening; allow the duct insulation to search Alliance Cooling contact the A-coil, or allow the duct to become kinked, restricted, or config- Equipment Sizing Guide- ured to form a trap. lines available at www.mhrahome.orcl. Figure 87. Whole house ventilation flex duct in an electric down-flow furnace. From left to right:as pre- pared in the factory;proper Trap installation with A-coil;im- proper installation with A-coil "Whole "Whole House" House" Ventilation Ventilation Flex Duct Flex Duct n-Coil a-c°il Selecting A-coils. Use only A-coil units compatible and listed for use with the fur- Furnace Furnace nace in the home and in Furnace Cabinet Furnace Cabinet Furnace stalled in accordance with the furnace manufacturer's instructions. PREPARE HEATING SYSTEM Installing flue stacks with a If the home does not contain a factory installed heating appliance, install a remote hinged roof. If flue stack heating appliance according to INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING components are installed EQUIPMENT, p. 87. Prepare fuel-burning heating systems included with the home as above the finish roof line follows: (as is often the case with 1. Inspect for damage. Inspect the furnace and report any damage to the home hinged roofs), an Alterna- manufacturer. tive Construction letter is normally required along 2. High altitude. If the home is located more than 2,000 feet above sea level or with a follow-up inspection. as indicated in the furnace manufacturer's instructions,derate gas furnaces Contact the factory for 4%for each 1,000 feet above sea level.This work must be done by a qualified guidance. (and in some jurisdictions, licensed)technician. Venting appliances to the 3. Convert for LPG gas. If LPG gas(propane)will be used, convert the appli- outside.Vent to the exte- ance from natural gas to LPG gas use. Conversion must be made by a quali- rior of the home all com- CD fied and (if required by the LAHJ)licensed technician. bustion appliances except X 4. Install intake air pipe. Consult the appliance manufacturer's instructions for ranges and ovens. r maximum allowable pipe run length, requirements for air dampers, locations Selecting ducts. Exterior m relative to expected snow levels(check with the LAHJ for expected snow lev- ductwork for remote units n els), acceptable materials, pipe supports, and pipe termination requirements. must be provided by the in- O 5. Install flue. For combustion appliances, install the flue roof cap and stack as- staller or HVAC contractor. a sembly as described in PREPARE FIREPLACES, Chimneys(p. 90). Ducts must be approved for O exterior installation and INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT should be wrapped with in- sulation of at least R-4 un- O Install remote units in compliance with all heating and cooling equipment requirements der a vapor barrier with a Z in this chapter above and the following: perm rating of not greater Z 1. Locate connections to the home. Find the manufacturer-installed connec- than one. (For ENERGY I tors, labels, or tags under the home indicating the required connection points STAR homes, the R-value r for supply and return air. If connectors are not provided nor location indicated, must be at least that speci- rD select a supply duct location such that there are approximately equal numbers fied on the manufacturer's > of supply registers forward and rear of the connection point. Locate the return ENERGY STAR Site Instal- 0 duct in the center of the home. lation Checklist—generally Z 2. Install ducts. Install the appropriate supply and return ducts(not provided) a minimum of R-6 or R-8.) between the remote unit and the home(Figure 89), making connections ac- Z cording to the instructions for crossover ducts in Crossover Connections(p. D 52). r 3. Install dampers. If installing a remote cooling unit in a home with a factory in- 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 87 Prepare AppliancesPFS#°5 • . . • Conforms to HUD Equipment 1/15/09 stalled furnace, install dampers between the furnace and the home's air duct system, and between the remote unit and the home's air duct system to pre- vent warm air in heating mode from escaping to the remote cooling unit and vice versa. Figure 88. Remote unit to damper locations Furnace w 0 III\ Exterior Duct Dampers Remote tMti Home 4. Connect wiring. Install a thermostat containing a fan switch. Connect utilities in accordance with all manufacturer's instructions and local codes. 5. Seal penetrations. Repair or replace all floor insulation disturbed during the duct installation and seal holes in the bottom board using foam, mastic, or tape specially made for that purpose. Air Conditioning or Figure 89. Ducts connecting Heating Equipment exterior heating and/or cool- Supply Marriage Supply Returning equipment to the home QDuct Line Duct Duct Z Q 0 Z Support Straps at upport Block 48"in.O.C.Minimum QMinimum Clearance Between J Ducts and Ground to be4in. J PREPARE VENTILATION SYSTEM ZPrepare the whole-house ventilation system according to the ventilation system manu- Z facturer's instructions. Confirm that any fresh air intake ducts extend to the exterior and p do not draw air from the crawlspace under the home. Do not allow any fresh air ventila- Choosing pipe lengths. F- tion intake ducts to become kinked or restricted,forming a trap (Figure 89). The appliance manufac- PREPARE FUEL-BURNING WATER HEATER tuner may designate the a length of the pipe run OThe water heater discharge and drip pan drains should have been installed in Connect based on the pipe diameter U Utilities (p. 77). and the number of turns in W In homes with direct-vent water heaters(that utilize gas, oil, or other combustion fuel), the pipe run. Z and where the water heater is not independently vented to the exterior through a grilled M Y opening, provide combustion air from under the floor using pipe and cement acceptable to the appliance manufacturer or through the roof via a double-walled flue pipe. If pro- vided through the floor, run the air piping to the exterior of the home, with supports Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 88 PFS#05 • , • • , nces Conforms to . • Equipment HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 spaced every 3-1/2 feet o.c.or less.Terminate the pipe facing downward a minimum of 12 inches above the ground surface and provide a screen on the pipe vent cap. Venting exhaust systems. PREPARE CLOTHES DRYER Exhaust vents must extend DRYER VENTS to the home's exterior If the home includes a clothes dryer, the components for ventilating the dryer are in- through skirting. Termina- cluded with the home(but not necessarily installed)and a vent opening has been tion of the dryer exhaust roughed in either in the wall or floor. (If a dryer is not installed, seal all dryer vent open- underneath the home can ings). cause condensation and moisture damage to the Run the dryer vent to the outside through the exterior wall or through the floor to a point home. Lint and dust accu- beyond the perimeter of the home, using materials approved by the clothes dryer mulation can ignite, causing manufacturer(see Figure 90). a fire.The exhaust system must not contain reverse slope. Vent Below Floor Vent Through Exteriorwall Figure 90. Clothes dryer Elbow With Clampto ventilation ductwork through Rigid Duct Vent Cap Rigid or Flex Duct floor(left) or exterior wall (right) Clamp to Dryer Exterior Connection Wall 5_�y5 Dryer Vent - Cap Clampto Seal Bottom Vent Cap Board Clamp to Dryer Elbow With Connection Dryer Vent Rigid Duct Cap Support Strap Rigid or Flex Duct Wood Frame Secured to Bottom of Rim Plate or Install Through Skirting Install the vent as follows: 1. Remove temporary caps. Remove any temporary seals and duct caps from the vent rough openings. • CD 2. Install ductwork. Install ductwork using clamps (do not use screws or other Avoid damaging structural X fasteners that penetrate into the duct)and support the duct with metal straps elements. Do not cut or connected to the floor joists or chassis at two feet o.c. or less. Ensure duct otherwise damage struc- Z connections are internally overlapped to prevent inhibiting the flow of air and tural elements such as floor m thereby causing lint accumulation. joists or wall studs for the p 3. Install cap and damper. Install an approved dryer vent cap with damper on installation of the dryer ex- X the exterior termination of the duct. If the vent terminates at skirting, secure haust system. O the cap to framing or skirting with sheet metal screws and seal edges with Gas.Ventilation components caulk or sealant. If the vent terminates through a wall, apply a bead of sealant that may be included with to the back of the cap around the opening and secure with sheet metal screws the home for an electric O to metal, hardboard or fiber cement siding or with wood screws to a mount dryer may not be accept- Z block for vinyl siding. able for gas dryers. Consult N 4. Seal opening. Seal openings inside and outside of the home including at the the gas dryer manufacturer I floor, interior walls, siding and skirting (with caulk), and at the bottom board instructions. r using foam, mastic and/or tape specially made for that purpose. D GAS DRYERS p If the home was not fitted for a gas dryer, installing one requires substantial alteration Z to the home. Gas supply piping and adequate venting must be provided as specified by Installing ducts. D the dryer manufacturer and installed by a trained professional. Do not cut major struc- Keep ductwork straight and Z tural elements to accommodate a gas dryer. smooth as possible without C excess slack. Slope it slightly downward towards the exterior to facilitate 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 89 Prepare Appliances • P0,G7 • • Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 moisture drainage. PREPARE SMOKE ALARMS The home has several factory installed smoke alarms that are wired to a 120-volt cir- cuit. If the home was designed for placement on a basement, an additional alarm is provided for installation at a pre-wired location under the home. Connect the basement smoke alarm and test all alarms as follows: 1. Check circuit. Ensure that electrical power to the home is activated and that the smoke alarm circuit is on. 2. Remove batteries. Make sure backup batteries(if any)are removed from all smoke alarms. 3. Test alarms. Press the test button on each alarm sequentially.All alarms should sound simultaneously when the test button on any one smoke alarm is pressed. Replace (with the same brand as those installed elsewhere in the home)any alarms that do not sound and retest. 4. Replace batteries.After successful test, replace the backup batteries, dis- carding the protective tabs. PREPARE FIREPLACES Install chimneys, chimney flashing and roofing,fireplace combustion air inlets, and hearths according to the manufacturer's instructions and the procedures described be- low. CHIMNEYS Fireplace and wood stoves may require on-site installation of additional sections of ap- proved chimney pipe, a spark arrestor, and a rain cap assembly. Follow the manufac- turer's instructions and the procedures described below: 1. Remove coverings. Remove protective materials covering the roof flashing and any foreign material from the installed part of the chimney. 2. Install chimney pipe.Assemble and seal the chimney per the fireplace or wood stove manufacturer's installation instructions and if there is a conflict be- tween the instructions and the figure,follow the instructions. To assure suffi- cient draft for proper operation, extend the chimney at least three feet above the highest point where it penetrates the roof and at least two feet higher than any surface within 10 feet of the chimney(Figure 92). Use additional sec- tion(s)of chimney pipe(not provided) if required by local code or if the site nhas obstructions within 10 feet of the chimney. Z Q Z O H Q J J Q H U) Z Z O H O a W O U W Z M Y U) Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 90 PFS#°5 Prepare Appliances 4j ® and Equipment Conforms to HUD MHCSS R oof Top Assediy vfsio9 Figure 91. Chimney and T Rain cap combustion air intake duct it17-ChimneyCapAdWbr Spark Arreskr installation 3'Min Triple Wall Rpe Storm Cella Roof Height Flashing Selecting the appropriate Firestop Thinbe flue.Wood fireplaces use larger diameter flues than gas fireplaces. Make sure flue matches the appliance type. Gas fireplaces cannot burn wood because the flue is too small and smoke will back up into the home. If wood fireplaces are con- verted to gas the flue will be too large resulting in ex- cessive heat loss through the chimney. i i Above nm Level Air Intake From OLzide Less Than 10' Figure 92. Chimney clear- ance 12' in. 3'Min. 2'Min. 10' 3'Min. CD r z m n 3. Install shingles. Install shingles up to the edge of the flue cut-out in the roof O deck. Secure shingles installed under the roof flashing with asphalt cement. X a 4. Install flashing. Place flashing over pipe section and shingles and set in as- 0 phalt cement. Secure flashing to roof deck at top two corners with roofing y nails. 5. Complete shingles. Cut shingles in successive courses to fit around the pipe O z and embed them in asphalt cement where they overlap the flashing. Secure Z shingles with roofing nails through flashing and apply asphalt cement over nail heads.The completed installation should appear as shown in Figure 93,with D the lower part of the flange overlapping the lower shingles and the side and r upper shingles overlapping the flange. D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 91 Prepare AppliancesPFS#°5 • . • • Conforms to HUD Equipment 1/15/09 Figure 93. Roof flashing and Push Down-� Upper and Side shingle installation around Roof Shingles Shingles Overlap Caulking Flange and Are Set In chimney Flange Flange Asphalt Cement Storm Collar Flashing r-- -- I I I I z" Flue Pipe Trim With Sheet Metal Lower Part of Flange Sheers If Difficult To Make Overlaps Lower Shingle Flashing Lay Flat On Roof COMBUSTION AIR INLETS Combustion air inlets provide combustion air through the floor or an exterior wall to a combustion appliance. If through an exterior wall, site installation is not required. If • through the floor, extend the duct from its point just below the floor to the outside(addi- Installing combustion air tional duct material required for this may or may not be provided with the home). Lo- inlets. Do not install the cate the inlet damper above expected snow levels (contact the LAHJ for snow levels). combustion air inlet such Follow the fireplace manufacturer's instructions(typically in the fireplace/stove or with that material from the the chimney parts). hearth can drop beneath the home. HEARTHS If shipped loose, install the fireplace hearth according to the fireplace manufacturer's instructions. PREPARE KITCHEN AND BATH APPLIANCES / FIXTURES Install kitchen and bath appliances according to the manufacturer's instructions and the procedures described for each appliance below. / • / A COOKING APPLIANCES Installing exhaust ducts. If the home is provided with a range, cook top and/or grill containing its own exhaust Route exhaust ducts so system that penetrates the floor, complete the exhaust system as follows: they do not terminate be- 1. Remove covers. Remove the cover on the factory-installed exhaust pipe pro- neath the home. truding from beneath the floor near the appliance. 2. Install termination fitting. Secure the provided termination fitting at the outside edge of the floor. J 3. Install duct. Use the provided flexible metallic duct to connect the elbow pro- truding from the floor and the termination fitting. Refer to the manufacturer's z installation instructions for guidance on supporting the duct and making the Q connections. z SITE-INSTALLED GAS APPLIANCES 0 Install only appliances with a Btu capacity equivalent to or less than the capacity of the Qfactory-installed piping and at the location of a factory-installed gas riser. J J REFRIGERATOR Q Prepare the refrigerator as follows: z • Remove straps, blocks, or other securement devices used for shipping and z patch any resulting marks on floors or walls. 0 If the refrigerator has an icemaker, check water lines for leaks upon installa- • tion and a few days later to make sure no leaks have developed. 0 a SITE-INSTALLED APPLIANCES AND FIXTURES IXIf sinks, tubs, showers or other fixtures or appliances are to be site-installed,follow the 0 manufacturer's installation instructions. Use only products listed for use in manufac- W tured homes and follow all applicable local codes. z J Y co Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 92 PFS#°5 Prepare • • and Equipment 4i Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 INSTALL EXTERIOR LIGHTING Install exterior lighting according to Figure 94 and the following: 1. Remove cover. Remove the screws and cover from electrical junction box. / • // 2. Install flash ring. Place the non-combustible flash ring over the junction box. Lighting installation.A 3. Connect wires. Connect fixture wires to house wires in the box, black to qualified electrician should black,white to white, and equipment ground to equipment ground, using listed install lighting. Before con- wire connectors. Push wires into the box. necting lighting, disconnect 4. Connect fixtures. Connect the fixture to the junction box or strap using power to the lighting circuit.round all exterior light fix- tures. screws provided with the light fixture. Gres. 5. Weatherproof.Weatherproof/caulk around the base of the fixture, leaving a Using a non-combustible small gap in the caulking on the bottom to permit drainage of water that may ring. Install a non- accumulate. combustible ring completely 6. Complete installation. Install bulb and globe on the fixture and verify proper covering any combustible operation. surfaces the fixture may be mounted on (e.g. hard- board, clad wood and vinyl siding), or when ceiling ma- terial is exposed between the light fixture canopy and the junction box. Wire From Swrch Figure 94. Exterior lighting Non-CombustibleRirg Wire F— Wire Nut connection (If Required Wire gkyl (Typal) Fixture Ca-cW lack Whiff ou ddInstalling ceiling fans.A qualified electrician should Globe install lighting and fans. Be- Pigtail for Ground Conlouty fore connecting the ceiling Junction Box fan or light, disconnect Wlre to Other Fixlre power to the fan wires.Any unit installed outside of the INSTALL CEILING FANS/LIGHTS home (such as in a porchCD ceiling)shall be listed for Install ceiling fans with the trailing edges of the blades at least six feet-four inches wet locations. above the finished floor. Comply with all unit manufacturers' instructions and the re- z quirements below. Electrical boxes for use with ceiling fans have a maximum allowed M weight(usually 35—50 Ibs). This is stamped inside the box. Check the maximum n weight of the fan versus the allowable weight for the electrical box before installing the O fan. O CEILING FAN/LIGHT MOUNTED TO FACTORY-INSTALLED ELECTRICAL BOX > D IN CEILING Before installing the unit, make sure that adequate structural bracing is present in the O ceiling. If uncertain, check with the manufacturer. Follow the fan or light manufacturer's Z instructions to connect the unit and complete the wiring. If the instructions are not z available, connect the wiring as shown in Figure 95. D r r D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 93 Prepare Appliances #05 • • • � 5 AF Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Ground Wire Figure 95. Wiring for a ceil- ing fan or chain-hung light fixture. Color Coded Wires Ground ® Strap Wire Nut eiling Ceiling Box Mounting Limited or Screw Noncombustible Ring(If Required)) Chain CEILING FAN/LIGHT MOUNTED ON SITE-INSTALLED DECORATIVE BEAM Where the electrical box will be mounted in a site-installed decorative center beam at- tached to the ridge beam, connect the fixture as follows(see Figure 96): • 1. Cut hole. If the decorative beam (shipped loose)does not contain a precut Choosing ceiling fan junc- hole for the electrical box, cut a hole with a diameter approximately 1/4 inch tion boxes. Connect ceil- larger than the box's using a hole saw. Align the hole with the supply wire lo- ing fans only to junction cation and center on the beam. boxes listed and marked for 2. Install box. Install the box in the hole and secure the flange (plastic boxes ceiling fan application in only)to the decorative beam with four#6 x 1"screws. accordance with Article 3. Insert wire. Insert the ceiling wire through a knock-out hole in the side of the 314.27(b)of 2005 NEC. electrical box. It may be necessary to cut a notch in the top of the decorative Always ground metal junc- beam (on the supply wire side of the center beam hole)allowing the supply tion boxes. wire to be inserted into the electrical box without binding against the beam Selecting fan weight. Do during installation. Leave approximately four inches of wire free in the box. not use any ceiling fans or 4. Attach beam. Secure the decorative beam in place over the center line joint, light fixtures that exceed checking that the supply wire is not pinched or penetrated by beam fasteners. the weight rating of the box Secure the electrical box to the ridge beam with#8 x 2 1/2"wood screws (35 Ibs unless otherwise through the two holes in the top of the box. noted). 5. Strip wires. Strip about 3/4 inch of insulation from the white and black con- Grounding electrical de- ductor ends of the supply wire. vices. Ground fans/lights using a fixture-grounding 6. Position ring. Position the non-combustible flash ring (provided)over the device or a fixture- electrical box so that the finished surface(adjacent to electrical box)which is grounding wire as specified to be covered by the fan canopy is not exposed. in the manufacturer's in- 7. Install and wire unit. Follow the unit manufacturer's installation instructions structions. for mounting the fan/light assembly to the box and for electrical wiring. Use J provided electrical connectors for splicing wire. T. Figure 96. Ceiling fan/light Z mounted to flush ridge beam Q Z ORidge Beam Q J J Q � I I V) ®� Z 1 Z Q Ceiling 2x6 Center Beam-Shipped Loose I for Field Installation I I Supply Wire Coiled And i i Hole for Box Cut Through 2x6 O Secured for Shipment (May Be Cut in Plant or in Field) WNotch Beam at Hole if Necessary for Wire Chase 0 Secure Box to Ridge Beam L) (field installed) LU Secure Box to 2x6 Center Z Beam(field-installed) Electrical Box J Y Supply Wire Inserted in Field Through Side KnockoutofBox CID Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 94 Prepare Appliances • Equipment PFS#°5 TEST ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Conform® to After completion of all electrical wiring and connections, including crossovers, appli- HUDMHcss ances, lights, and ceiling fans, inspect and test the electrical system as follows: vtsiov 1. Fill water heater. Fill water heater before turning on power to the home or switching on the circuit breaker. 2. Test continuity. Before turning on the electrical power to the home, conduct an electrical continuity test to ensure that exposed metallic parts of the home and the chassis are effectively bonded. 3. Test operation.After turning on the electrical power to the home, conduct operational tests of all devices (except water heaters, electric ranges, electric furnaces, dishwashers, clothes washers/dryers, and portable appliances)to demonstrate that they are connected and in working order. 4. Test polarity.After turning on the electrical power to the home, conduct elec- trical polarity checks to determine that connections of electrical equipment in- stalled or completed during installation have been made properly.Visual veri- fication is an acceptable electrical polarity check. .• to • •. CD r z m n O X a O X D O z z D r r D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 95 Complete Work P4APNE Conforms to HUD MHCSS Complete Exterior Work 1/15/09 This chapter covers sealing the bottom board, installing the ground cover and skirting, preparing wind protection shutters, and completing site-built structures. Follow the Steps • - • STEP 1. REPAIR AND SEAL BOTTOM BOARD(p. 96) STEP 2. INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER(p. 96) STEP 3 INSTALL SKIRTING (p. 97) STEP 4 ASSEMBLE OPTIONAL WIND PROTECTION SHUTTERS (p. 97) STEP 5.COMPLETE SITE-BUILT STRUCTURES (p. 97) STEP 1. REPAIR AND SEAL BOTTOM BOARD Tears and openings in the bottom board can result from transportation or installation activities. Inspect for holes and gaps the entire bottom board, especially areas around /?brz A service penetrations, crossover connections, pipe and duct hangers,foundation ele- Sealing bottom boards.A ments, and the perimeter of the floor. Using approved materials appropriate for the type continuous and sealed A of repair, repair the bottom board wherever torn or loosened as follows: ot- tom board is critical for 1. Insulate. Replace any missing insulation prior to closure and repair of the bot- home performance, energy tom board, paying particular attention to insulation gaps that may have been efficiency, protection created at P-traps. against moisture problems, 2. Repair large openings. Repair large openings with a durable patch made of prevention of pipe freezing, bottom board fabric or other compatible material and fastened with vinyl bot- and protection against in- tom board tape held in place by fasteners installed with a divergent stapler. sects and rodents. Seal the edges around patches with foam or mastic. For large openings, in- Bottom board sealing stall a rigid backer board behind the bottom board to provide a fastening sub- methods.Tapes shall strate for the patch. never be used alone to re- 3. Repair small openings. Repair small gaps and tears with a combination of pair a bottom board. Diver- vinyl bottom board tape, patches, mastic, or foam sealant. gent staples or mastic must be used in tandem with a STEP 2. INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER tape to prevent future tear If the space under the home is to be enclosed with skirting or other materials, a ground off. Z moisture retarder of a minimum six mil thick polyethylene sheeting or equivalent must Fastening vinyl siding. Do be installed covering the ground under the home. Moisture retarders are not required in not install fasteners directly Z and regions(less than 15 inches of rainfall annually)with dry soil conditions. If on- into vinyl siding.Allow for O grade(surface)footings are used, install the ground moisture retarder prior to placing siding thermal expansion Qthe footings, or install it around the footings after all other work under the home is com- by pre-drilling minimum 1/2 J plete. inch diameter fastener _J holes or fastening skirting Install the ground moisture retarder as follows: to a ledger under the home co 1. Apply sheeting. Unroll the ground moisture overlapping joints in the sheeting a (see Best Practice tip). Z minimum of 12 inches and covering the entire area under the home except for O areas under recessed entries, decks, and porches. F_ < 2. Seal joints. Seal joints in the retarder with mastic. IL 3. Weigh down.To keep the retarder in place,weigh it down with stones, concrete Avoiding radon. W blocks, or other heavy, durable materials. For enclosed perimeter wall V4. Repair tears. Repair any voids or tears in the retarder by patching with like ma- ar foundations in w terial, maintaining a minimum 12-inch overlap and sealing joints with mastic. areeasas w ce where radon is com- Z monly found in the soil, continue the moisture re- tarder up the perimeter wall co I Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 96 PFS405 Prepare Appliances and Equipment Conforms to 4iHUD MHCSS v15/09 at least 12 inches, sealing STEP 3. INSTALL SKIRTING the edges and between the Skirting is any structural or non-structural perimeter crawlspace enclosure. Complete seams with mastic. site-built structures (see STEP 5. COMPLETE SITE-BUILT STRUCTURES, p.98)that Attaching vinyl siding.To abut the home(such as porches, attached garages, and steps)prior to installing skirt- install skirting on vinyl- ing. sided homes, screw a treated 2 x 4 on edge to the TABLE 26.ANCHOR SYSTEM MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS underside of the floor joists Specification two inches back from the edge of the home. Screw Skirting must be of weather-resistant materials or provided with protection skirting tight to the 2 x 4. against weather deterioration at least equivalent to that provided by a coat- ing of zinc on steel of not less than 0.30 oz per sq ft of surface coated. Skirting made from wood or wood products and used within six inches of the ground needs to be made of materials naturally resistant to decay and / / a termite infestation or pressure treated. Avoid backfilling against Ventilation openings must be covered for their full height and width with a skirting. Do not backfill perforated(1A inch maximum opening in any dimension)corrosion and against non-structural skirt- weather-resistant covering that is designed to prevent the entry of rodents. In areas subject to freezing,the coverings for the ventilation openings must ing. have an operable damper,permitting them to be in the open or closed posi- tion depending on the weather. To design and install skirting, comply with the skirting manufacturer's instructions(if provided)and the following: 1. Configure skirting. Run the skirting along the perimeter of the home's heated, conditioned space. Do not enclose with skirting areas under recessed entries, porches, or decks(whether constructed as part of the home or added on site)unless skirting is of the fully vented type and installed so as to allow water to freely flow out from under the home. 2. Fasten skirting. Recess the skirting under the siding or trim and attach it to the home in a manner that prevents water from being trapped between the siding or trim and the skirting. For wood, aluminum, or fiberglass skirting, in- stall a skirt rail (lumber strip)under the floor inset at least 1-1/2 inches from the edge of the siding for attachment of the skirting.Allow for frost heave when installing skirting in areas subject to frost. 3. Provide ventilation. Unless the skirting has integral ventilation openings that meet the following ventilation requirements, install equally sized ventilation openings on at least two opposite sides of the foundation. Size ventilation CD area to equal at least one square foot or each 150 square feet of under-floor X area (or for each 1,500 square feet if a ground moisture retarder is installed according to STEP 2. INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER, p. 96). Z Place vents as high above the ground as practical. m 4. Install access. Provide an access opening not less than 18 inches wide and p 24 inches high and located so that any utility connections located under the X home are accessible. O 5. Extend vents, drains,and inlets. Run appliance exhaust vents, combustion X air inlets, and air conditioner condensation drains through the skirting to the outside and terminate each as instructed in the sections of this manual corre- sponding to each appliance. Z Z STEP 4. ASSEMBLE OPTIONAL WIND PROTECTION SHUT- Cl)TERS r- r If desired, prepare temporary protective window covers for use during severe wind > storms and hurricanes according to Figure 97,Table 27, and the procedure below. 0 1. Assemble extension framing using with two 16d common nails at each con- Z nection. 2. Assemble shutter panels as shown in Figure 97. Z 3. Store the shutters such that they are protected from the weather, are not in di- y rect contact with the ground, and are easily accessible by the homeowner. 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 97 CompletePF4j S#°5 Work Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 To attach shutters to the home: 1. Fasten extension framing to wall framing materials with 16d double-headed nails or#8 x 3"screws,toe nailed/screwed, per Table 27. 2. Fasten assembled panel(s)to extension framing with 12d nails, per Table 27. After use, remove shutters from the home, patch nail holes with caulk and store them as above. Cut If Desired Figure 97. Wind protection (\\/ shutter construction `Approx.1" Approx.30 Degrees Extension Frarning p3 cr Stud Grade SPF 20 ar2x4 / Secure OSB or / Plywood to Studding With 12d / Nails at 6"O.C. Stu SPF Studding, ng,Required When Plywoodor / OSB Used Is/ ne s Less In Thickness TABLE 27. SHUTTER CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FasteningPanel to extension Fastening to wall framinj Fastening to wall framing Window Extension thickness framing (in) . ��� screws 2 x 3* 7/16, 1/2 6 in.o.c. 8 in.o.c. 22 in.o.c. 6 in.o.c. 16 in.o.c. 2 x 3 23/32,3/4 6 in.o.c. 8 in.o.c. 22 in.o.c. 4-1/2 in.o.c. 12 in.o.c. • 2 x 3* 7/1 6, 1/2 4 in.o.c. 5 in.o.c. 14 in.o.c. 3 in.o.c. 8 in.o.c. "2 x 3 perimeter extension with 2 x 4 studding at 16 inches o.c. J STEP 5. COMPLETE SITE-BUILT STRUCTURES DInstall site-built structures such as steps, landings, garages, awnings, carports, Qbreezeways, porches, decks, railings, sheds, and utility rooms according to manufac- / ' / A < turer's instructions(if any), in compliance with all local regulations including fire separa- tion and electrical requirements, and according to the following: Designing site-built struc- Z tures.All site-built struc- 0 • Construct site-built structures to be structurally independent unless provided tures must support their J~ for in the design of the home(instructions will be provided by the manufac- own dead, live, and wind turer). loads and must not < Do not damage the integrity of the home's structural or weatherproofing sys- transmit any loads to the to tem. Seal any weatherproofing connections between the site-built structure home's structure.All car- ? and the home and flash any roof connections. ports should be freestand- Z Utilize only GFCI outlets for site-built structures. ing. O Q Install and test smoke alarms in any site-built structures according to local code. O IL •• to Prepare Home for • • .. O U uJ Z J Y N Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 98 Prepare Home • Occu • . Prepare Home for Occupancy 4 PAm - Conforms to Follow these steps for final inspection and completion of the home. HUD Mxcss 1/15/09 Follow the Steps • ' • STEP 1.VERIFY ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION (A/C) INSPECTION (p. 99) STEP 2.COMPLETE INSPECTION CHECKLIST(p. 99) STEP 3.COMPLETE ENERGY STAR CHECKLIST(p. 99) STEP 4.CLEAN THE HOME(p. 99) STEP 1. VERIFY ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION (A/C) IN- SPECTION This is normally the responsibility of the retailer and the manufacturer, however,the in- stallation is not complete until the alternative construction inspection has been passed and documented. STEP 2. COMPLETE INSPECTION CHECKLIST After all previous steps have been accomplished, inspect the home to verify that it has been completely and properly installed using the checklist starting on p. 100. Correct any deficiencies found, if possible, or if not possible, inform the retailer or manufacturer immediately. STEP 3. COMPLETE ENERGY STAR CHECKLIST For ENERGY STAR qualified homes (check with the retailer or manufacturer), this step is to be completed by the manufacturer's designated representative.Ask the retailer or the manufacturer who this is. N The manufacturer's representative must complete the Energy Star Site Installation X Checklist, obtain signatures on the ENERGY STAR label, and return the completed r ENERGY STAR Site Installation Checklist to the manufacturing plant. Z m STEP 4. CLEAN THE HOME p Remove and properly dispose of all installation-generated dust, debris, and packaging X materials from the home and the surrounding property. Ensure that the home is in p "move-in"condition. D Installation • • Z Z Cn D r r D O z ic D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 99 Complete Installation #05 Checklist Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Complete Installation Checklist Use this checklist to confirm that the listed aspects of the installation are complete and correct. FOUNDATION Footings properly sized and constructed for the soil conditions i ' //I Pier spacing per data plate and applicable table and roof load zone Limits of the checklist.This Piers properly constructed and vertical checklist is not all-inclusive. Perimeter blocking installed (if required) Some homes have impor- Piers at each side of large sidewall openings tant features not listed here. Completing this Center line piers installed at columns checklist does not guaran- Shims in place and tight tee that all installation re- quirements have been met. ANCHORS Approved anchors are used Anchors are installed at correct angles Anchor spacing and installation correct Longitudinal ties installed (if required) Anchor straps are tensioned UNDER THE HOME Moisture retarder installed The ground is properly graded to prevent water accumulation HVAC ducts are supported off the ground and connected tightly to collars at all ends Fireplace combustion air intake free and unrestricted No holes or tears in bottom board Skirting has been installed per manufacturer's instructions with proper vent- ing and provision for frost heave Dryer vent, range/cook top exhaust, water heater temperature and pressure overflow pipe and AC condensate drain installed to perimeter of crawl space EXTERIOR J Shingled roofs are free of visible damage and serious defects and there are Q no missing or loose shingles Z Shingle close-up and ridge cap have been completed per applicable details Z All hold down straps on shingled roofs have been removed and staple holes O have been properly sealed QPenetrations at roof stacks,vents and chimneys have been properly sealed J J Siding and trim is free of gaps,voids, missing fasteners, damage, and seri- ous defects.All seams are sealed and hardboard edges are sealed Z Drip edge and fascia is properly installed and free of damage and serious de- Z fects O Gutters and downspouts are installed properly such that water is diverted away from the home O Trees and bushes have been trimmed to prevent brushing against the home a in windy conditions or under snow loads W O The HUD label is exposed, intact and legible U LU The exterior of the home and immediate surroundings is clean, clear of con- Z struction materials, dust, and debris rM Y fn Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 100 Complete Installation Checklist INTERIOR P4jFS#°5 Ceilings, walls, and floor coverings are free from damage and serious defects Conforms to HUD MHCSS Carpeting is properly stretched and seamed v15/09 All trim and molding is installed properly and free of damage and defects All cabinets, countertops, plumbing fixtures, appliances,furnishings, and window coverings are free of damage or serious defects All cabinet doors and drawers work properly All interior and exterior doors and windows open, close, and latch properly One window in each bedroom meets emergency egress requirements, has operating instruction labels on it, and operates properly All temporary shipping hardware has been removed Floors are level The data plate is intact and legible Smoke alarms have been tested The interior of the home is clean, clear of materials, dust, and debris WATER AND DRAIN SYSTEMS Crossover and service connection and splices have been properly made with correct materials Water and drain lines are insulated or otherwise protected from freezing Pipe supports are installed and properly spaced Proper slope has been maintained on all drain lines All necessary inspections and tests have been performed All sinks, basins,tubs, and toilets operate properly All hot and cold water lines are properly connected to fixtures, dispense wa- ter as labeled, and operate properly ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS CA The panel amperage matches the connection to the home The home has been properly grounded Z m The main power supply has been properly connected and tested by a li- O censed electrician 0 All electrical crossovers have been connected 0 O All receptacles, switches, and light fixtures operate properly y Ground fault circuit interrupters operate properly O All exterior lights have been properly installed Z Z GAS/FUEL OIL SYSTEMS Cn The gas system pressure test has been conducted y r Connections between units are properly made with access as required D The main fuel line has been properly connected and tested by a qualified technician O Z APPLIANCE OPERATING AND VENTING D All appliances are working properly Z C Appliance venting is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions D r Fresh air intakes are properly installed Whole house, kitchen, and bath exhaust fan operation are correct Fireplace chimney stack extension and roof cap have been installed in ac- cordance with the manufacturer's instructions 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 101 Complete Installation Checklist PA"Swj #05 AMP Air conditioner/heat pump is sized properly Conforms to MISCELLANEOUS HUD Mxcss Installation/anchoring certificates or seals have been issued and installed (if vfsro9 required) Owner's and operation manuals are available for all appliances This installation manual is left with home J Q Z Q Z O H Q J J Q H N Z_ Z O H O a W O U W Z rJ Y U) Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 102 Indexof • AIRS: C Index of Steps Con m4HS o HUSS D M 1/15/09 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................3 IMPORTANT NOTICES.............................................................................................................................3 SAFETY.....................................................................................................................................................3 RESOURCES ............................................................................................................................................4 FEDERAL PREEMPTION..........................................................................................................................4 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................................4 ENGINEER'S STAMP................................................................................................................................6 SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL.........................................................................................................6 ABBREVIATIONS......................................................................................................................................6 ALTERNATIVE FOUNDATION SYSTEMS...............................................................................................6 DISPLAY AND STORAGE OF THE HOME..............................................................................................6 GETTING STARTED.................................................................................................8 STEP 1. LOCATE THE DATA PLATE......................................................................................................8 STEP 2. CONFIRM WIND ZONE...............................................................................................................8 STEP 3. CONFIRM THERMAL ZONE.......................................................................................................9 STEP 4. CONFIRM ROOF-LOAD ZONE...................................................................................................10 STEP 5. CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS....................................................................12 PREPARE THE SITE ................................................................................................13 STEP 1. PLAN SITE ACCESS..................................................................................................................13 STEP 2. DETERMINE HOME LOCATION AND LAYOUT........................................................................13 STEP 3. CLEAR AND GRADE THE SITE.................................................................................................14 STEP 4. DETERMINE SOIL CONDITION .................................................................................................14 STEP 5. DETERMINE SOIL-BEARING CAPACITY AND FROST LINE...................................................15 STEP 6. DETERMINE GROUND ANCHOR HOLDING CAPACITY..........................................................16 INSTALFOOTINGS................................................................................................18 Cn STEP 1. DESIGN POINT LOAD SUPPORTS...........................................................................................18 r STEP 2. DESIGN FRAME SUPPORTS (Homes Without Perimeter Blocking)......................................21 Z STEP 3. DESIGN FRAME AND PERIMETER SUPPORTS Homes With Perimeter Blocking) 22 m ( g)............. n STEP 4. SELECT FOOTING MATERIALS................................................................................................23 0 STEP 5. SIZE FOOTINGS.........................................................................................................................23 STEP 6. INSTALL FOOTINGS 26 CONSTRUCT FOUNDATIONS.................................................................................28 STEP 1. OBTAIN A FOUNDATION DESIGN............................................................................................28 Z STEP 2. EXCAVATE.................................................................................................................................28 E STEP 3. CONSTRUCT THE FOOTING OR SLAB....................................................................................28 Cn I STEP 4. CONSTRUCT THE PERIMETER WALL.....................................................................................28 r STEP 5. INSTALL INTERIOR SUPPORTS...............................................................................................29 D STEP 6.WATERPROOF FOUNDATION WALL.......................................................................................29 STEP 7. BACKFILL AND GRADE............................................................................................................29 Z SET THE HOME........................................................................................................,._ > a STEP 1. PREPARE FOR SET...................................................................................................................30 Z C STEP 2. POSITION HOME SECTION.......................................................................................................30 r STEP3. LIFT HOME..................................................................................................................................30 STEP 4. CONSTRUCT PIERS...................................................................................................................32 COMPLETE MULTI-SECTION SET..........................................................................36 STEP 1. INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE ANCHORS.....................................................................................36 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 103 Index of Steps Ad PFS#05 Conforms to HUD MHCSS STEP 2. REMOVE PROTECTIVE SHIPPING MATERIALS......................................................................36 1n5i09 STEP 3. COMPLETE HINGED ROOF.......................................................................................................36 STEP 4. REPAIR OR INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE GASKET...................................................................38 STEP 5. POSITION ADDITIONAL HOME SECTIONS..............................................................................39 STEP 6. CONNECT FLOORS...................................................................................................................39 STEP7. CONNECT ROOF........................................................................................................................41 STEP8. CONNECT WALLS .....................................................................................................................43 STEP 9. ATTACH TAG UNITS..................................................................................................................45 STEP 10. REMOVE TEMPORARY ITEMS................................................................................................46 STEP 11. FASTEN HOME TO FOUNDATION..........................................................................................46 STEP 12. BACKFILL AND GRADE..........................................................................................................46 STEP 13. BUILD STAIRS..........................................................................................................................46 COMPLETE ROOF AND EXTERIOR WALLS..........................................................47 STEP 1. COMPLETE ROOF......................................................................................................................47 STEP 2. COMPLETE TAG UNIT ROOF....................................................................................................49 STEP 3. COMPLETE SIDE WALLS..........................................................................................................51 CONNECTCROSSOVERS.......................................................................................52 STEP1. CONNECT DUCTS......................................................................................................................52 STEP 2. CONNECT ELECTRICAL CROSSOVERS.................................................................................56 STEP 3. INSTALL ELECTRICAL BONDING............................................................................................58 STEP 4. CONNECT WATER LINES..........................................................................................................59 STEP 5. CONNECT DRAIN,WASTE,AND VENT LINES........................................................................60 STEP6. CONNECT GAS LINES...............................................................................................................61 STEP 7. CONNECT TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV WIRING ..................................................................62 COMPLETE THE INTERIOR ....................................................................................63 STEP 1. ALIGN MARRIAGE WALLS........................................................................................................63 STEP 2. FINISH GYPSUM BOARD...........................................................................................................63 STEP 3. COMPLETE WALL AND CEILING FINISHES............................................................................64 STEP 4. COMPLETE CARPET.................................................................................................................64 STEP 5. COMPLETE TRIM.......................................................................................................................64 J STEP 6. INSTALL SHIP LOOSE ITEMS...................................................................................................64 Q INSTALL STABILIZING SYSTEM 65 Z ...................................................... Q STEP 1. DETERMINE ANCHOR LOCATIONS.........................................................................................65 Z STEP 2. DETERMINE TIE-DOWN CONFIGURATION..............................................................................71 O STEP 3. SELECT ANCHORS....................................................................................................................71 Q STEP 4. INSTALL ANCHORS...................................................................................................................72 J STEP 5. INSTALL STRAPS......................................................................................................................73 STEP 6.TIGHTEN AND ADJUST STRAPS..............................................................................................76 co z CONNECT UTILITIES...............................................................................................'' Z STEP 1. CONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICE...........................................................................................77 O H STEP 2. CONNECT WATER SERVICE....................................................................................................80 Q � STEP 3. CONNECT GAS SERVICE..........................................................................................................83 O STEP 4. CONNECT OIL SERVICE............................................................................................................84 a w O PREPARE APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENT ..........................................................86 V INSTALL AIR CONDITIONER OR HEAT PUMP ......................................................................................86 W Z PREPARE HEATING SYSTEM.................................................................................................................87 J INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT 87 Y N PREPARE VENTILATION SYSTEM.........................................................................................................88 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 104 PF�S,#°5 S Index of Steps HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 PREPARE FUEL-BURNING WATER HEATER........................................................................................88 PREPARE CLOTHES DRYER..................................................................................................................89 PREPARE SMOKE ALARMS ...................................................................................................................90 PREPARE FIREPLACES..........................................................................................................................90 PREPARE KITCHEN AND BATH APPLIANCES/FIXTURES.................................................................92 INSTALL EXTERIOR LIGHTING...............................................................................................................93 INSTALL CEILING FANS AND LIGHTING...............................................................................................93 TEST ELECTRICAL SYSTEM...................................................................................................................95 COMPLETE EXTERIOR WORK...............................................................................96 STEP 1. REPAIR AND SEAL BOTTOM BOARD .....................................................................................96 STEP 2. INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER............................................................................96 STEP 3. INSTALL SKIRTING....................................................................................................................97 STEP 4.ASSEMBLE OPTIONAL WIND PROTECTION SHUTTERS......................................................97 STEP 5. COMPLETE SITE-BUILT STRUCTURES...................................................................................98 PREPARE HOME FOR OCCUPANCY.....................................................................99 STEP 1.VERIFY ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION (A/C) INSPECTION................................................99 STEP 2. COMPLETE INSPECTION CHECKLIST.....................................................................................99 STEP 3. COMPLETE ENERGY STAR CHECKLIST.................................................................................99 STEP 4. CLEAN THE HOME.....................................................................................................................99 COMPLETE INSTALLATION CHECKLIST..............................................................100 cn r z m 0 O O D O z z cn a r r D O z D z c n r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 105 Skyline Corporation P.O. Box 743 Elkhart, Indiana Wvvvv.Skylln�uv,N.uu i 4-48 PG. 1 CITY OF ARLINGTON 238 N.OLYMPIC AVE-ARLINGTON,WA.98223 PHONE;(360)403-3551 BUILDING PERMIT Address:19920 67th Ave NE,1018 Permit#:1231 Parcel#:00960007901800 Valuation:99000.00 OWNER APPLICANT CONTRACTOR Namc VACANT SPACE Name:Coach Corral Inc. Name:Coach Corral,Inc. Address: 19920 67TH AVE NE SPC 18 Address:3906 Cedardele Rd Address:3906 Cederdalc Rd City,Stale Zip:ARLINGTON,WA 98223 City,State Zip:Mount Vernon,WA 98274 City,State Zip:Mount Vernon,WA 98274 Phone: Phone:360-424-8448 Phone:360424-8448 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR PLUMBING CONTRACTOR Name: Name: Address: Address: City,State,Zip: City,State,Zip: Phone: Phone: LIC#: EXP: LIC#: EXR JOB DESCRIPTION PERMIT TYPE: Misc CODE YEAR: 2015 STORIES: j CONST.TYPE: DWELLING UNITS: j OCC GROUP: BUILDINGS: OCC LOAD: PERMIT APPROVAL I AGREE TO COMPLY WI I'll CITY AND STATE LAWS REGULATING CONSTRUCTION AND IN DOING THEWORK AUTHORIZED THEREBY;NO PERSON WILL BE EMPLOYED IN VIOLATION OF THE LABOR CODE OF THE STATE OF WASMNGTON RELATING TO WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE AND RCW 18.27. TFIIS APPLICATION IS NOT A PERMIT UNTIL SIGNED BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL OR HTS/HER DEPUTY AND ALL FEES ARE PAID, IT IS UNLAWFUL TO USE OR OCCUPY A BUILDING OR STRUCTURE UNTIL A FINAL INSPECTION HAS BEEN MADE AND APPROVAL OR A CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY HAS BEEN GRANTED. IBCI 10/IRCI 10. SALwS\AX NOTICE:Sale-.tax relating to construction and construction materials in the City ofArlington must be reported on yoursales tax return form and de .i f AtI gt 3101 11 ignalure Print Name Date Re eased By tc CONDITIONS Approved as submitted.Call for inspection at 360-403-3417. THIS PERMIT AUTIIORIZS ONLY THE WORK NOTED,THIS PERMIT COVERS WORK TO BF DONE ON PRIVATE PROPERTY ONLY ANY CONSTRUCT ION ON IHE PUBLIC DOMAIN(CURBS,SIDEWALKS,DRIVEWAYS,MARQUEES,ETC.)WILL REQUIRE SEPARATE PERMISSION. PE;RMFF F1LES Date Description Fee Amount 1 2/1 612 01 6 Mobile Home $500.00 Total Due: $500.00 Total Payment: $0.00 Balance Due: S500.00 CALL FOR INSPECTIONS BUILDING(360)40"417 When calling for so inspection please leave the fellowiag information: Permit Number,Type or Inspection being requested,and whether you prefer morning or afternoon i CITY OF ARLINGTON 238 N. OLYMPIC AVE-ARLINGTON, WA. 98223 PHONE; (360)403-3551 BUILDING PERMIT Address:19920 67th Ave NE,#18 Permit#:1231 Parcel#:00960007901800 Valuation:99000.00 OWNER APPLICANT CONTRACTOR Name:VACANT SPACE Name:Coach Corral Inc. Name:Coach Corral,Inc. Address: 19920 67TH AVE NE SPC 18 Address:3906 Cedardale Rd Address:3906 Cedardale Rd City,State Zip:ARLINGTON,WA 98223 City,State Zip:Mount Vernon,WA 98274 City,State Zip:Mount Vernon,WA 98274 Phone: Phone:360-424-8448 Phone:360424-8448 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR PLUMBING CONTRACTOR Name: Name: Address: Address: City,State,Zip: City,State,Zip: Phone: Phone: LIC#: EXP: LIC#: EXP: JOB DESCRIPTION PERMIT TYPE: M1sc CODE YEAR: 2015 STORIES: 1 CONST.TYPE: DWELLING UNITS: 1 OCC GROUP: BUILDINGS: OCC LOAD: PERMIT APPROVAL I AGREE TO COMPLY WITH CITY AND STATE LAWS REGULATING CONSTRUCTION AND IN DOING THE WORK AUTHORIZED THEREBY;NO PERSON WILL BE EMPLOYED IN VIOLATION OF THE LABOR CODE OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON RELATING TO WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE AND RCW 18.27. THIS APPLICATION IS NOT A PERMIT UNTIL SIGNED BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL OR HIS/HER DEPUTY AND ALL FEES ARE PAID. IT IS UNLAWFUL TO USE OR OCCUPY A BUILDING OR STRUCTURE UNTIL A FINAL INSPECTION HAS BEEN MADE AND APPROVAL OR A CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY HAS BEEN GRANTED. IBC110/IRC110. SA LF,S TAX NOTICF:Sales tax relating to construction and construction materials in the City of Arlington must be reported on your sales tax return form and coded City of Arlington#3101. Signature Print Name Date Re cased By D:(c CONDITIONS Approved as submitted. Call for inspection at 360-403-3417. THIS PERMIT AUTHORIZS ONLY THE WORK NOTED.THIS PERMIT COVERS WORK TO BE DONE ON PRIVATE PROPERTY ONLY. ANY CONSTRUCTION ON THE PUBLIC DOMAIN(CURBS,SIDEWALKS,DRIVEWAYS,MARQUEES,ETC.)WILL REQUIRE SEPARATE PERMISSION. PERMIT FEES Date Description Fee Amount 12/16/2016 Mobile Home $500.00 Total Due: $500.00 Total Payment: $0.00 Balance Due: $500.00 CALL FOR INSPECTIONS BUILDING(360)403-3417 When calling for an inspection please leave the following information: Permit Number,Type of Inspection being requested,and whether you prefer morning or afternoon �' I � CITY OF ARLINGTON INSPECTION REQUEST PROCEDURE To schedule an inspection: Call the Automated Inspection Line @ (360) 403-3417 before 8am the day of inspection request Provide The Required Information: • Give Permit Number (BLD# or PWD#) • Give Inspection Request (Building or Civil) • Give Inspection Time (am or pm) - you may request a specific time. We will,do our best to honor the time requested. Building Inspections: • Building • Fire • Mechanical • Plumbing Civil Inspections: • Grading • TECSP • Storm Drainage • Paving, Signage, Markings • Right-of-Way Work i • L _ _ , - - _ ,� _ _ ' � =� _ - - - � I ... Permit Information Date 12/7/2016 Permit Number 1231 Project Name Long Applicant Name Coach Corral Inc. Applicant Address 3906 Cedardale Rd City,State,Zip Mount Vernon,WA 98274 Contact DeAnna Wohlman Phone 360-424-8448 Email deanna@coachcorral.com Permit Type Misc Site Address 19920 67th Ave NE,#18 Valuation 99000.00 Status Applied Permit Issued Permit Expires Square Feet 0 Type of Construction/Occupancy Load Number of Stories 0 Proposed Use Mobile Home Installation Assigned To Kristin Foster Property Information Owner Information Parcel*00960007901800 VACANT SPACE VACANT SPACE 19920 67TH AVE NE SPC 18 19920 67TH AVE NE SPC 18 ARLINGTON,WA 98223 Contractors Contractor Name Primary Contact Phone Email Contractor Type License License# Coach Corral, Inc. DeAnna Wohlman 360-424-8448 APPLICANT ILabor&Industries COACHC*254MJ James Wise James Wise 360-770-9285 CONTRACTOR Labor&Industries WISE*J*055L1 Review Date Type Description I Target Date I Completed Date Assigned To Status 12/8/2016 1l11obile/Modular 12/15/2016 1 lKevin Olander 111n Review Fees Fee Description Notes Amount Mobile Homo 322.10.00.0 $500.0 Total $500.01 Uploaded Files Upload File Date File Uploaded B 12/8/2016 9:16:57 AM 1231 Plat. df Foster, Kristin 12/8/2016 9:16:57 AM 1231 Floor Plan. df Foster, Kristin 12/8/2016 9:16:57 AM 1231 Site Plan. df Foster, Kristin 12/8/2016 9:16:57 AM 1231 SKYLINE install-manual.pOf Foster, Kristin 12/8/2016 9:15:22 AM 1.231 Application,pdf Foster, Kristin MANUFACTURED /MOBILE HOME r f PERMIT APPLICATION Department of Community& Economic Development City of Arlington• 18204 59th Ave NE•Arlington,WA 98223• Phone(360)403-3551 THIS APPLICATION MUST BE ACCOMPANIED BY TWO (2) SETS OF APPROVED PLANS REVIEWED BY STATE L&I. RELOCATED MOBILE HOMES MUST HAVE THE ORIGINAL INSTALLATION MANUAL OR BE INSTALLED PER ANSI A225 1. AND CONTAIN AN APPROVED DATA PLATE FROM STATE L&I. Location of Installation: 19920 67th ave ne #18 arlington wa 98223 ( Mobile Estates ) Client's Name Patsy Long C/O Coach Corral inc Phone Number: 360-424-8448 3906 cedardale Rd Mount vernon wa 98274 Address: City: State: Zip Code: Lot number: 18 Valuation: 99K for home When acting as the general contractor for installing Manufactured Homes/Mobile Homes, the following requirements must be met per the Washington Administrative Codes. WAC 296-150M-0630—Who may install a manufactured home? 1. A manufactured home may be installed by: • Homeowner • A certified installer • An individual who is supervised by an on-site certified installer;or A specialty trades person,for certain aspects of installation. 2. A certified installer must be a registered contractor or his or her employee,or an employee of a registered dealership. Contractor's Name: Coach Corral Inc Phone#: 360-424-8448 Address: 3906 cedardale Rd City:Mount Vernon State: W4 Zip Code:98274 L&I Number:Coachc*254MJ City Business License#: x Installer's Name:James Wise Phone#: 360-770-9285 Address: 5504 Tenneson Rd City:Sedro Woolley State:WA Zip Code:98284 L&I Number:Wise*J*055L1 ( wa ins City Business License#: X I hereby certify the above information is correct and that the construction on, and the occupancy and the use of the above described property will be accordance with the laws, rules and regulations of the State of Washington. The applicant will be responsible for providing a method of safely accessing roof for inspection. �JC�fCfLQ,�j(/O/lCNt!!r/ 12/07/2016 Applicants Signature Date DeAnna Wohlman Print Applicants Name FOR STAFF USE ONLY Neceiveo J'A DEC A 7 2016 Permit# �. .nt .I By Amount Received Receipt# Date Received Ii �: .. 3� Z7 31,b5 l5 00�0��o0 5 i (,off-�►g P-r�E z 5� oo��v0007l0►��0 }F--K-°no2zZ5W5 LEI- �Ib� X IcD Fktoal D 4 K _ users-to Push Puns laO\,11-�� Received AN ��i� 1Z31 i • . �.: LL 'A N ,�lJ -_ ram} 00 00U _ .�. N - Lli \ E L. O f rA rq % ` I --_- aco N , °, o Q O 3 u o V � 0ou O w ._ `C = } u v U O VCL o @ u O U � uu 4O _ t � lE v 0 d" 0 X p0 , u T 0moo 3 Vo 00 v o0 _ a 0 N (D ao � UM O - a �1 CV) i l handrail Installed N4 or more risers, hand rolls 34'to 38"from plane of nosing of stairs to top of handrail 22 yy Jh� Mlntrnum Landing W gdpable handrail Installed to top member-rearms at top end ac soppoMn steps and rearina �'f Pl r--ry bosom,no Sharpe comers, 9 � CA-nA✓a C r fir continuous run of utalrwat Bi) f K I_oUSe— r� 38'guardrellNwelMng IcI�.. (J'�,�� Pi steps max.rise of t'i2.nigh,un'donn rIISE Iter> surface b 3p'above grade MUST fUW�S f R7V In within 318'-steps(2)2 x 8 with a 31 B'gap s 11 3IB"width 2'x 2'pk tots spaced at"a than 4• apart.ao ePenkW such that a sphere 6 to dismat tt cannot pan through mtn.3 x Ur tondln p L Posts f1T F�ASE PF 7,ff2 4 2x 12 Jack 4}4 x 4 pressure treated ` 3 11710 4 10 1693 to attach handratb posts and concrete footings- All wood Lo be approved pressure treated wood I ND rRNL)Dg- — Si{ �Aa PI S°u5t!>-- NANDRA-1-> �!a(rN7 -CO HOME CEd°/ 3�3$rr t I-Yi 3%i H% �t-RAM r►�Cr, pc-7f>F14) L Z�pl� tb O DPP" �r�u- gtacrc s i �A.�a�ir�o ^i � ��tis•i /,o...� �'�S �v���,,,�'S`�'r� v ('h`'���8�� � � �1�9 '� 1'�'`t. InvN hv� �f, Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Installation Manual J � Bringing America Home. Bringing America Fun. 4-48 H 0 .. ;FHCSS7using the Manual VP" ;°5 This manual is organized into a series of steps that will take you through the entire installation process using only those pages required for the specific home being installed.First,review the entire manual,including the Introduction chapter.As you read it, identify sections of the manual that you will need; identify other documents or information you will need;construct lists of tools and materials required for your particular installation;and make sure you have everything you need before starting work. After reviewing the entire manual,refer to the sequence of installation steps in the table below. Identify the pathway for your installation and follow the arrows downward. Select either Single Section Home or a Multi-Section Home and choose the col- umn corresponding to the home's foundation type,either Pier and Ground Anchor or Load-Bearing Perimeter Wall(see -� A\ Then I F 6"- ...I. -"-F 1L.... ..ti...... � 1i .. 4"i±�u:...Qa... __j ✓GI1lmw n i,p.Y11. I hen ld.lI I pletc I-V-11%III Ga 1 VI I-JOIiUV A QI LII I YY 611­LLIIIV-a.wu. If using an alternative(proprietary)foundation system,the installation process will change from that described in this manual. Consult the system manufacturer directions for instructions.See page 6 for alternative foundation system criteria. SECTIONSINGLE •ME MULTI-SECTION HOME Pier and Ground Anchor Load-Bearing Perimeter Pier and Ground Anchor Load-Bearing Perimeter Wall Wall Getting Started(p.8) Getting Started(p.8) Getting Started(p.8) Getting Started(p.8) Prepare the Site(p. 13) Prepare the Site(p. 13) Prepare the Site(p.13) Prepare the Site(p. 13) Install Footings(p. 18) Construct Foundation Install Footings(p. 18) Construct Foundation ♦ (p.28) ♦ (p.28) Set the Home(p.30) ♦ Set the Home(p.30) ♦ Connect Utilities(p.77) ♦ Complete Roof and Exte- Install Stabilizing System ♦ Complete Multi-Section rior Walls(p.47) (p.65) Prepare Appliances and Set(p.36) ♦ Equipment(p.86) ♦ Connect Crossovers Connect Utilities(p.77) ♦ Complete Roof and Exte- (p.52) ♦ Complete Under the rior Walls(p.47) Prepare Appliances and Home and Site Built ♦ Complete Interior(p.63) Equipment(p.86) Structures(p.96) Connect Crossovers ♦ ♦ (p.52) Connect Utilities(p.77) Complete Under the Prepare Home for Occu- Home and Site Built pancy(p.99) Complete Interior(p.63) Prepare Appliances and Structures(p.96) ♦ ♦ Equipment(p.86) ♦ Complete installation Install Stabilizing System Prepare Home for Occu- Checklist(p. 100) (p.65) Complete Under the pancy(p.99) ♦ Home and Site Built ♦ Connect Utilities(p.77) Structures(p.96) Complete Installation Checklist(p.100) Prepare Appliances and Prepare Home for Occu- Equipment(p.86) pancy(p.99) Complete Under the Complete Installation Home and Site Built Checklist(p. 100) Structures(p.96) Prepare Home for Occu- pancy(p.99) Complete Installation Checklist(p. 100) Disclaimer The Manufactured Housing Research Alliance,its members,consultants,contractors and representatives make no representations,warranty or guarantee,express or implied,as to the accuracy or appropriateness of any materials or information in this manual for use in a specific home,nor assume any liability for the use of the information,methods,or materials contained herein,or for damages arising from any such use. Copyright©2008 Manufactured Housing Research Alliance ISSN 1529-3424 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1l9/2009 9:22 AM 2 #osrmv toQ7DHCSS Introduction 1/15/09 This installation manual contains instructions that must be followed for the proper installation of the home. It complies with the HUD Model Manufactured Home Installation Standards. Please read all instructions and any other documents(includ- ing addendum pages and supplements)that may apply to the specific home prior to commencing site work or installation. This installation manual covers permits and site work through final inspection of the installation. It covers both single and multi-section homes installed over pier and anchor,load bearing crawl space walls and basement foundations. It contains instructions,including specifications and procedures,for the set and hookup of manufactured homes to be used as single- family dwellings. The importance of correct installation cannot be over-emphasized.Correct installation is absolutely essential to home- owner satisfaction and the structural integrity of the home.All instructions must be followed to provide the customer with a safe,quality home. No manual can cover all circumstances that may exist for certain home designs or building sites. For questions,further clarification,or if you encounter conditions at the site or in the design of the home or its foundation not covered by this manual, please contact the manufacturer(see Resources, p.4),a registered engineer,or registered architect. Supplemental addendum pages may be included with this manual.Supplements include requirements not covered in this manual or that supercede the manual instructions. Once the home installation is complete,leave this manual with the home. IMPORTANT NOTICES • The home manufacturer is not responsible for installation or for the materials supplied by the set-up crew at the time of installation.The installer may be responsible for any deviations from the installation instructions of this manual. • To keep the home in compliance with its warranty,the home installation must follow the procedures described in this manual or other procedures approved by the manufacturer. Deviation from the instructions in this manual may void the home's warranty.Any alterations or changes to the home shall be approved by a registered engi- neer or registered architect and may still be subject to warranty violations. • When an installer does not provide support and anchorage in accordance with the approved manufacturer's in- stallation instructions,or encounters site conditions(such as areas that are subject to flood damage or high seismic risk)or other conditions that prevent the use of the instructions provided in this manual,the installer must obtain special site-specific instructions from the manufacturer or use a design approved by a registered engineer or registered architect. • The installer must possess a valid installation license as a manufactured home installer. rn If the installer identifies failures of the home to comply with the Federal Manufactured Home Construction and < • Safety Standards(the HUD Code),the installer must notify the manufacturer and retailer. C `uuuuu Z The Content of the rn hnical Manualchas been reviewed by �,`���FP�y•T•CiG4& 0 PFS Corporation and found to be ��.Q.igp �A in conformance with the Federal = ? PE19600312 = Manufactured Home Construction = and Safety Standards. 9 i STATE OF .1 ; ........... � rn O "'///isS,nNaIENG."`` l� 000u°SAFETY zusuo 1 z There are potential hazards associated with the installation of a manufactured home. Home installers are licensed,and as I experienced professionals,should recognize these hazards, be qualified to work with them,and be capable of providing D safe work practices and equipment that minimize the risks of injury. r- D Only qualified persons should install a manufactured home.As qualified professionals in the field of manufactured home installation,installers are the experts and must be aware of the hazards and conditions faced.Warnings are published O throughout this manual as reminders.These reminders may not cover all hazards,all potential hazards,or all possible z3 consequences of improper or unsafe installation practices. y z Construction crews should be trained in the skills required and be supervised by experienced personnel. Installers should D regularly inspect work performed by crews and subcontractors. r Obey OSHA regulations,particularly those related to home construction,such as Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations Part 1926. For copies of OSHA regulations, call(202)512-1800 or visit www.ostia.gov on the web. 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1). 3 Q�' — #0 r a RESOURCES Hun�MHcsS Manufacturer contact information: 1/15/09 Skyline Corporation P.O. Box 743 Elkhart Indiana 46515 (574)294-6521 (574)295-8601 -FAX www.skylinecoro.com Office of Regulatory Affairs and Manufactured Housing US Department of Housing and Urban Development 451 Seventh Street,SW, Room 9164 Washington, DC 20410-8000 Telephone:(202)708-6423 or(800)927-2891 FAX: (202)708-4213 State Administrative Agencies A list of SAAs may be found on the web at www.hud.gov or by contacting the Office of Regulatory Affairs and Manu- factured Housing. FEDERAL PREEMPTION This home was engineered,constructed,and inspected in conformance with the Federal Manufactured Home Construc- tion and Safety Standards(MHCSS)of the US Department of Housing and Urban Development(24 CFR Part 3280, commonly referred to as the"HUD Code")in effect on the date of manufacture.These Standards set forth minimum re- quirements for the design and construction of manufactured homes designed to be used as dwellings. Individual states,counties and cities shall have no authority to establish standards regarding the construction or safety of a manufactured home.A metal certification label is affixed to each section of the home to certify that it has been con- structed and inspected to comply with these Standards.The design plans and in-plant construction of all homes are in- spected by independent third party agencies to assure compliance with the Standards. The installation of the home and any alterations made to the home shall conform to the requirements of the MHCSS and the HUD Model Manufactured Home Installation Standards.These installation instructions are minimum requirements. Applicable local or state laws may have more stringent installation requirements than outlined in this manual and must be followed.Consult with the local authority having jurisdiction (LAHJ)for regulations that may require licenses and/or per- mits or which may affect procedures described in this manual. DEFINITIONS ANCHOR ASSEMBLY.Any device or other means designed to transfer loads to the ground. ANCHORING EQUIPMENT.Ties,straps,cables,turnbuckles,chains,and other approved components,including tension- ing devices that are used to secure a manufactured home to anchor assemblies. ANCHORING SYSTEM.A combination of anchoring equipment and anchor assemblies that will,when properly designed and installed, resist the uplift,overturning,and lateral forces on the manufactured home. BASEMENT.A load-bearing perimeter wall foundation that includes habitable space(finished or unfinished, heated or unheated)partly or completely below grade. CRAWLSPACE.The space underneath the home's floor system,enclosed with either load-or non-load bearing perimeter walls.The ground may be covered with a concrete slab or by a plastic ground cover.Crawlspace walls must be vented. CROSSOVERS.Utility interconnections between sections of multi-section homes,including heating and cooling ducts, electrical circuits,and water pipes,drain plumbing,and gas lines. DATA PLATE.An information sheet located at the main electrical panel,in the utility room,in a bedroom closet,or in a cabinet in the kitchen. It contains a unique identification number and identifies the wind zone, roof load zone,and cli- matic zone for which the home was constructed. DIAGONAL TIE.A tie intended to resist horiz.or shear forces, but which may resist vertical, uplift,and overturning forces. FOOTING.That portion of the support system that transmits loads directly to the soil. GROUND ANCHOR.A specific anchoring assembly device designed to transfer home loads to the ground. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 4 FS , Conrormi to HUD MNCSS H-BEAM.Steel H-beams are often used to support a home over a basement or crawlspace.They span across the foun- 1IM09 dation from sidewall to sidewall,typically with an intermediate support pier and footing(typically in the center point re- sulting in a line of piers under the centerline of a double section home). INFORMATION PACKET.A set of important documents provided with the home including warranties, information on high wind coverage, and other features of the specific home. INSTALLATION LICENSE.The proof that an installer meets the requirements for installing manufactured homes under the HUD-administered installation program. LABELED.Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label,symbol,or other identifying mark of a certified testing laboratory, inspection agency,or other organization concerned with product evaluation.The label indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine suitable usage in a specified manner. LISTED OR CERTIFIED.Included in a list published by a nationally recognized testing laboratory,inspection agency,or other organization concerned with product evaluation that maintains periodic inspection of production of listed equip- ment or materials,and whose listing states either that the equipment or material meets nationally recognized stan- dards or has been tested and found suitable for use in a specified manner. LOAD-BEARING PERIMETER WALL FOUNDATION.A support system for the home whereby the home is mechanically fastened to a structural wall(s)that transfers gravity,lateral,and uplift loads to the ground. LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION(LAHJ).The state,city,county,municipality,utility,or organization that has local responsibilities that must be complied with during the installation of a manufactured home. MUST.Indicates a mandatory requirement. N/A. Indicates not applicable. PIER.That portion of the support system between the footing and the manufactured home,exclusive of shims.Types of piers include, but are not limited to:(1)manufactured steel stands; (2)pressure-treated wood; (3)manufactured con- crete stands; (4)concrete blocks;and(5)portions of foundation walls. PIER AND GROUND ANCHOR FOUNDATION.A support system for the home that employs piers under the chassis and other locations to support gravity loads and employs ground anchors and tie downs(the stabilizing system)to resist lateral and uplift loads. PERIMETER BLOCKING.Regularly spaced piers supporting the sidewalls and marriage line of the home. Some homes require perimeter blocking in addition to supports under the home's frame. QUALIFIED.Has the necessary knowledge and skills gained from experience and training that will allow performance of the job safely,competently,and in accordance with all applicable codes,standards, rules,and regulations. Meets all necessary qualification tests including any license and certification requirements that may be in effect in the area where the home will be installed. Cn RAMADA.Any freestanding roof or shade structure,installed or erected over a manufactured home or any portion < thereof. r z SHOULD. Indicates a recommendation that is strongly advised but not mandatory. m 0 SHALL.Indicates a mandatory requirement. 0 SITE FOR A MANUFACTURED HOME.A designated parcel of land designed for the accommodation of one manufac- 0 tured home,its accessory buildings or structures,and accessory equipment,for the exclusive use of the occupants of n the home. I SKIRTING.A weather-resistant material used to enclose the perimeter,under the living area of the home,from the bottom 0 of the manufactured home to grade. zZ STABILIZING SYSTEM.All components of the anchoring and support systems,such as piers,footings,ties,anchoring N equipment,anchoring assemblies,or any other equipment, materials and methods of construction,that support and D secure the manufactured home to the ground. r- SUPPORT SYSTEM.Pilings,columns,a combination of footings,piers,foundation walls,caps,and shims and any com- bination thereof that will,when properly installed,support and secure the manufactured home to the ground. 55 TIE.Straps,cable,or securing devices used to connect the manufactured home to anchoring assemblies. D UTILITY CONNECTION.The connection of the manufactured home to utilities that include,but are not limited to,electric- Z ity,water,sewer, gas,or fuel oil. c D VERTICAL TIE.A tie intended to resist uplifting and overturning forces. r WIND ZONE.The areas designated on the Basic Wind Zone Map,as further defined by the MHCSS. 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 5 PFM;�T� �m MHCSS ENGINEER'S STAMP 1n5i09 Certain pages of this manual display the seal of a registered engineer.Federal guidelines only require the seal from one state to be displayed,but the details herein apply to all states. SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL i , // This icon indicates an important warning.It is critical to heed these warnings. Thin iron indiratac n rPrnmmPndpil hact nrnntira WHIP not r-mirPr1 fnllnwinn thaca practices will result in a superior installation, reducing the chance that cosmetic or dura- bility related complaints might arise. ABBREVIATIONS ABS Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene max. Maximum ANSI American National Standards Insti- MHCSS Manufactured Home Construction and tute Safety Standards APA American Plywood Association min. Minimum ASTM American Society for Testing and Ma- mph Mile(s)per hour terials AWPA American Wood Preservers Associa- NEC National Electric Code tion CFM Cubic feet per minute NFIP National Flood Insurance Program CFR Code of Federal Regulations NFPA National Fire Protection Association DWV Drain,Waste,Vent O.C. On center EMT Electrical metallic tubing OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Admini- stration FEMA Federal Emergency Management Oz Ounce(s) Agency ft Foot/feet p. Page ga Gauge psf Pounds per square foot HUD US Department of Housing and Ur- psi Pounds per square inch ban Development in Inch(es) SAA State Administrative Agency LAHJ Local Authority Having Jurisdiction sq ft Square foot/feet lb(s) Pound(s) ALTERNATIVE FOUNDATION SYSTEMS Alternative foundation systems or designs are permitted if they are approved by the home manufacturer and the manufac- turer's DAPIA,and are in accordance with either of the following: • Systems or designs are manufactured and installed in accordance with their listings by a nationally recognized testing agency based on a nationally recognized testing protocol;or • System designs are prepared by a registered engineer or a registered architect or tested and certified by a regis- tered engineer or registered architect in accordance with acceptable engineering practice and are manufactured and installed so as not to take the home out of compliance with the Manufactured Home Construction and Safety Standards. DISPLAY AND STORAGE OF THE HOME WEATHER PROTECTION If the installation is not started immediately upon delivery of the home,the retailer and/or installer has the responsibility to ensure the exterior weather protection covering of marriage walls and the roof of homes with hinged roofs has not been Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/20G 6 7!1 oormsto MHCSS damaged during shipment. Inspect the home immediately upon the delivery and frequently during storage.Promptly repair tears in the home closure materials to prevent damage from the elements. Inspect and repair roof shingles and siding as needed. SUPPORTING A HOME FOR DISPLAY When a new or used manufactured home is to be displayed at a retail location,temporarily block and support the home. Set up single-section homes with single block piers spaced no further apart than 12 feet o.c.beneath each I-beam.The tire and axle system may be used as one of these required supports,and the hitch jack may be used as another.Locate the first pier no further than two feet from the rear end of the home(Figure 1). Place additional piers along the perimeter on either side of openings greater than four feet(i.e.sliding glass doors,bay windows,etc.). For multi-section homes, locate additional piers along the marriage line under support columns.These locations will be marked by the manufacturer. Figure 1.Supporting a home for display Grade c , Fq iz'-0^ iz-0^ iz-0^ izv^ iz-0^ For all homes, place footings below each pier.Footings may be placed directly on the surface grade without excavation and may be ABS pads,2 x 10 by 16 inch long pressure treated lumber or 16"x 16"by 4 inch thick concrete pads. SUPPORTING A HOME FOR STORAGE To prevent damage to homes being stored but not on display(i.e.people shall not be permitted inside the home)for a pe- riod exceeding 30 days, locate piers below each I-beam no further than two feet from each end of the home and at the approximate center of the home length. CUSTOMIZATION OF THE MODEL MANUAL This manual is based on a model manufacturer's installation manual used by many different companies. It may have been customized from the model by the manufacturer.The table below lists the locations where this manual differs from the model manual. Section Step Summary of the .- Multi-section set Step 3 Revised hinged roof details to Skyline system. Multi-section set Step 6,7&8 Revised mating line connections to conform to Skyline system. Connect cross-overs Step 1 Revised heat duct cross-ovens to conform to Skyline systems. Install stabilizing System Step 1 Revise anchor location requirements to conform to Skyline system. cn Connect Utilities Step 2 Revise water heater drip pan drainage to Skyline system. r Z m 0 O O X D O Z Z D r r D Z D Z C D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 7 F. #05 Getting Stafted 0 onfor'n to HUD MHCSS I/l_U09 Getting Started This chapter covers a few steps that,taken now,will avoid problems later in the installation process. Follow the Stepsbelow: STEP 1.LOCATE THE DATA PLATE(p.8) 0 STEP 2.CONFIRM WIND ZONE(p.8) STEP 3.CONFIRM THERMAL ZONE(p.9) STEP 4.CONFIRM ROOF-LOAD ZONE(p. 10) STEP 5.CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS(p. 12) STEP 1. LOCATE THE DATA PLATE Locate the data plate inside the home(Figure 2),typically on a wall panel or door face near the electrical panel,or master bedroom closet. Figure 2. Sample data plate �1 y — ,J The information on the data plate will be used to verify that the home was designed for Z the proper location. Z STEP 2. CONFIRM WIND ZONE i � A ® From Table 1,identify the wind zone for the home.Verify that the home conforms to Site Appropriateness.If the Q the following rules and any special requirements determined by the LAHJ. � site is not accessible, not appro- No home may be located in a higher wind zone than that indicated on the priate for the planned support < data plate. (Example:a home designed for Wind Zone II cannot be placed in system or cannot be properly z Wind Zone III.) graded,notify the purchaser,the • A home may be located in a lower wind zone than that indicated on the data retailer and HUD with the rea- late.(Example:a home designed for Wind Zone II can be laced in either sons why the site is unsuitable. O P ( P 9 P Y Wind Zone II or I.) Do not install the home until all WHomes located within 1,500 feet of the coastline in Wind Zones II and III must issues are remedied. 0 be designed to withstand exposure'D'conditions.This will be indicated on CL IY the data plate. ® If the home does not conform to these rules,contact the manufacturer immediately. uu Z a Y Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 8 A. onfornss to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 TABLE 1.WIND ZONE BY LOCALITY Wind Zone All areas except those areas listed below as being within Wind Zone II or III ' Counties of Baldwin and Mobile All counties except those listed below as within Wind Zone III •. Counties of Bryan,Camden,Chatham,Glynn,Liberty,McIntosh Parishes of Acadia,Allen,Ascension,Assumption,Calcasieu,Cameron,East Baton Rouge,East Feliciana, Evangeline,Iberia,lberville,Jefferson Davis,Lafayette,Livingston,Pointe Coupee,St.Helena,St.James,St.John the Baptist,St.Landry,St.Martin,St.Tammany,Tangipahoa,Vermillion,Washington,West Baton Rouge,and West Feliciana Counties of Hancock and Washington Counties of Barnstable,Bristol,Dukes,Nantucket,and Plymouth Counties of George,Hancock,Harrison,Jackson,Pearl River,and Stone Counties of Beaufort,Brunswick,Camden,Chowan,Columbus,Craven,Currituck,Jones,New Hanover,Onslow, Pamlico,Pasquotank,Pender,Perquimans,Tyrrell,and Washington • Counties of Beaufort,Berkeley,Charleston,Colleton,Dorchester,Georgetown,Horry,Jasper,and Williamsburg Counties of Aransas,Brazoria,Calhoun,Cameron,Chambers,Galveston,Jefferson,Kennedy,Kleberg,Mata- gorda,Nueces,Orange,Refugio,San Patricio,and Willacy • Cities of Chesapeake,Norfolk,Portsmouth,Princess Anne,and Virginia Beach Entire state Coastal regions(as determined by the 90 mph isotach on the ANSI/ASCE 7-88 map) Counties of Broward,Charlotte,Collier,Dade,Franklin,Gulf,Hendry,Lee,Martin,Manatee,Monroe,Palm Beach, Pinellas,and Sarasota Parishes of Jefferson,La Fourche,Orleans,Plaquemines,St Bernard,St Charles,St.Mary,and Terrebonne Counties of Carteret,Dare,and Hyde • All regions of the U.S.Territories of American Samoa,Guam,Northern Mariana Islands,Puerto Rico,Trust Terri- tory of the Pacific Islands,and the United States Virgin Islands STEP 3. CONFIRM THERMAL ZONE From Figure 3. Thermal(UO)zone map,identify the thermal(UO)zone for the home. Verify that the home conforms to the following rules. r • No home may be located in an area with a higher thermal zone number than Z that indicated on the data plate.(Example:a home designed for Thermal m Zone 2 cannot be placed in Thermal Zone 3.) n O • A home may be located in a lower thermal zone than that indicated on the data plate. (Example:a home designed for Thermal Zone 2 may be placed in O either Thermal Zone 2 or 1.). ;0 • In no case may a home designated for installation in the"Humid &Fringe Climate,"as identified on the data plate, be located outside of this region O (Table 2). z If the home does not conform to these rules, contact the manufacturer immediately. cZi1 D r r D --I O Z D Z C D r 1J912009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 9 F StartedGetting IR oororms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 wrt rt NON Figure 3. Thermal(UO)zone Mr NO MN map mn OR q SD t � MI W N WY N NJ NE ON W Ur CO 4 INNNN VA OE 1 t 7 u-vai„es MIS O.i ODIC TABLE 2.HUMID AND FRINGE CLIMATE ZONES Counties of Baldwin,Barbour,Bullock,Butler,Choctaw,Clarke,Coffee,Conecuh,Covington,Crenshaw.Dale, Escambia,Geneva,Henry,Houston,Lowndes,Marengo,Mobile,Monroe,Montgomery,Pike,Washington,and Wilcox All counties and locations Counties of Appling,Atkinson,Bacon,Baker,Ben Hill,Berrien,Brantley,Brooks,Bryan,Calhoun,Camden,Char- leton,Chatham,Clay,Clinch,Coffee,Colquitt,Cook,Crisp,Decatur,Dougherty,Early,Echols,Effingham,Evans, Glynn,Grady,Irwin,Jeff Davis,Lanier,Lee,Liberty,Long,Lowndes,McIntosh,Miller,Mitchell,Pierce,Quitman, Randolph,Seminole,Tattnall,Terrell,Thomas,Tift,Turner,Ware,Wayne,and Worth All counties and locations All counties and locations i Counties of Adams,Amite,Claiborne,Clarke,Copiah,Covington,Forrest,Franklin,George,Greene,Hancock, Harrison,Hinds,Issaquena,Jackson,Jasper,Jefferson,Jefferson Davis,Jones,Lamar,Lawrence,Lincoln, Marion,Pearl River,Perry,Pike,Rankin,Simpson,Smith,Stone,Walthall,Warren,Wayne,and Wilkinson Counties of Brunswick,Carteret,Columbus,New Hanover,Onslow,and Pender . . Counties of Beaufort,Berkeley,Charleston,Colleton,Dorchester,Georgetown,and Hory Counties of Anderson,Angelina,Aransas,Atascosa,Austin,Bastrop,Bee,Bexar,Brazoria,Brooks,Burleson, Caldwell,Calhoun,Cameron,Camp,Cass,Chambers,Cherokee,Colorado,Comal,De Witt,Dimmit,Duval,Falls, Fayette,Fort Bend,Franklin,Freestone,Frio,Galveston,Goliad,Gonzales,Gregg,Grimes,Guadalupe,Hardin, Hams,Harrison,Hays,Henderson,Hidalgo,Hopkins,Houston,Jackson,Jasper,Jefferson,Jim Hogg,Jim Wells, Karnes,Kaufman,Kennedy,Kinney,Kleberg,La Salle,Lavaca,Lee;Leon,Liberty,Limestone,Live Oak,Madison, Marion,Matagorda,Maverick,McMullen,Medina,Milam,Montgomery,Morris,Nacogdoches,Navarro,Newton, Nueces,Orange,Panola,Polk,Rains,Refugio,Robertson,Rusk,Sabine,San Augustine,San Jacinto,San Patri- clo,Shelby,Smith,Starr,Titus,Travis,Trinity,Tyler,Upshur,Uvalde,Val Verde,Van Zandl,Victuria,Walker, Waller,Washington,Webb,Wharton,Willacy,Williamson,Wilson,Wood,Zapata,and Zavala Z Z STEP 4. CONFIRM ROOF LOAD ZONE ® From Table 3,identify the Roof Load Zone for the home.Verify that the home con- eforms to the following rules. -1 No home may be placed in an area with a higher roof load than that indicated J < on the data plate.(Example:a home designed for the South(20 psf)Roof U) Load Zone cannot be placed in the Middle(30 psf)Roof Load Zone). Z . A home may be located in an area with a lower roof load than that indicated Z on the data plate.(Example:a home designed for the Middle(30 psf)Roof 0 Load Zone may be placed in the South(20 psf)Roof Load Zone). < There are special high roof load areas(primarily in mountains)not shown on O the map.Contact the LAHJ or SAA for information about these areas.The a. home's data plate will indicate if the home has been designed for one of these ® high roof load areas. 0 a Ramadas may be used in areas with roof live loads greater than 40 psf. z Ramadas are to be self-supporting,except that any connection to the home must be for weatherproofing only. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 10 ARWAP�WA #05 4j� Confornvv to Getting Started HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 TABLE 3.ROOF LOADS BY LOCALITY North r psf roofload) All counties Counties of Aroostook,Piscataquis,Somerset,Penobscot,Waldo,Knox,Hancock,Washington • • All counties • All counties • Counties of:Buena Vista,Butler,Calhoun,Cerro Gordo,Cherokee,Chickasaw,Clay,Dickinson,Emmet,Floyd, Franklin,Hamilton,Hancock,Hardin,Howard,Humboldt,Ida,Kossuth,Lyon,Mitchell,O'Brien,Osceola,Palo Afto, Plymouth,Pocahontas,Sac,Sioux,Webster,Winnebago,Worth,Wright Counties of Androscoggin,Cumberland,Franklin,Kanabec,Lincoln,Oxford,Sagadahoc,York County of Essex Counties of Alger,Alcona,Alpena,Antrim,Baraga,Benzie,Charlevoix,Cheboygan,Chippewa,Crawford,Delta, Dickson,Emmet,Gogebic,Grand Traverse,Houghton,Iron,Kalkaska,Keweenaw,Leelanau,Luce,Mackinac, Marquette,Menominee,Missaukee,Montmorency,Ogemaw,Ontonagon,Oscoda,Otsego,Presque Isle,Ros- common,Schoolcraft,Wexford • Counties of Aitkin,Anoka,Benton,Blue Earth,Brown,Cass,Carlton,Carver,Chippewa,Chisago,Cook,Cotton- wood,Crow Wing,Dakota,Dodge,Douglas,Faribault,Fillmore,Freeborn,Goodhue,Grant,Hennepin,Hubbard, Itasca,Isanti,Jackson,Kandiyohi,Kanabec,Koochiching,Lac qui Pade,Lake,Le Sueur,Lincoln,Lyon,McLeod, Meeker,Morrison,Millie Lacs,Mower,Martin,Murray,Nicollet,Nobles,Olmsted,Pipestone,Pine,Pope,Ramsey, Redwood,Renville,Rice,Rock,St Louis,Sibley,Scott,Steele,Sherburne,Swift,Steams,Stevens,Todd,Wa- dena,Wright,Washington,Wabasha,Winona,Waseca,Watonwan,Yellow Medicine • All Counties • - All Counties Counties of Cayuga,Clinton,Essex,Erie,Franklin,Fulton,Genesee,Hamilton,Herkimer,Jefferson,Lewis, Livingston,Madison,Monroe,Montgomery,Niagara,Oneida,Onondaga,Ontario,Orleans,Oswego,St.Lawrence, Saratoga,Schenectady,Seneca,Warren,Washington,Wayne,Wyoming,Yates • Counties of Brookings,Clay,Codington,Deuel,Grant,Hamlin,Hanson,Hutchinson,Kingsbury,Lake,Lincoln, McCook,Miner,Minnehaha,Moody,Turner,Union,Yankee All Counties • Counties of Addison,Caledonia,Chittenden,Essex,Franklin,Grand Isle,Lamoille,Orange,Orleans,Rutland, Washington,Windsor Counties of Ashland,Bayfield,Barron,Buffalo,Burnett,Clark,Chippewa,Door,Douglas,Dunn,Eau Claire,Flor- ence,Forest,Iron,Jackson,Langlade,Lincoln,Marathon,Marinette,Menominee,Oconto,Oneida,Pepin,Pierce, Polk,Price,Rusk,St.Croix,Sawyer,Taylor,Trempealeau,Vilas,Washburn to • All Counties < r • The states and counties not listed for the Middle or North roof load zone above are deemed to be within the South M roof load zone. 00 X and roof load zones? > Is the data present and the home placed in the appropriate wind, thermal, 0 YES, go to STEP 5, CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PER- 0 11111. NO, Stop installation activities and notify the home manufacturer, U) • - retailer, purchaser and HUD. D r r n z Z c r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1'1 F Getting Started #05 onform to HUD MHCSS Ii13/09 STEP 5. CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS Local regulations may set conditions for the siting and installation of a manufactured home.Consult the LAHJ,state manufactured housing association,and the state SAA (See Resources,p.4)for the specific local requirements,including: Areas subject to flooding. • Building codes that may affect the construction of site built structures and in- The foundation specifica- frastructure. tions contained in this • Local requirements regulating the installation of manufactured homes. I manual are NOT intended to address flood ivaub. if Setback requirements for property lines,streets,yards,and courts. the home is o the flood • Fire separation distances. plain,consult a registered • Development covenants for the specific property. engineer. • The locations of flood hazard areas and any special foundation requirements for homes installed in those areas. • In some areas, building permits are required to install manufactured homes. Prior to making any alteration to the site and the home,contact the LAW to determine if plan approval and permits are required. 1110 •• to ' • J Q D Z Q 2 Z O F- Q J J Q H _Z Z O H O IL w O U W Z J Y U) Skyline Corporation (448 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 12 711UD #OSPrepare the Site rnm toHCSS Prepare the Site 1/15/09 A properly prepared site is critical to a good quality installation and the long term structural stability of the home. This chapter explains the process of planning the site,evaluating the soil,and preparing the site for construction of the home's support system. Follow the Stepsbelow: ♦ STEP 1.PLAN SITE ACCESS(p.13) ♦ STEP 2.DETERMINE HOME LOCATION AND LAYOUT(p. 13) V STEP 3.CLEAR AND GRADE THE SITE(p. 14) ♦ STEP 4.DETERMINE SOIL CONDITIONS(p. 14) ♦ STEP 5.DETERMINE SOIL BEARING CAPACITY AND FROST LINE(p.14) ♦ STEP 6.DETERMINE GROUND ANCHOR HOLDING CAPACITY(p. 15) STEP 1. PLAN SITE ACCESS Planning the route to the site is typically the responsibility of the retailer or transporta- tion company.Whoever is responsible must secure state permits from the states through which the home will pass. Site Preparation.The home In planning the route,avoid obstructions that might interfere with the passage of the manufacturer has no con- home,such as low hanging wires and trees,low overpasses,and bridges not suitable trol over the site planning for the load.Contact the utility company if wires need to be moved.Do not allow and installation of the home branches,bushes,or other foliage to scrape against the home as the home is moved to unless the manufacturer is the site.Avoid ditches,berms,steep slopes,and soft ground. Identify and fill any holes responsible for the home's and soft spots into which the transporter's wheels may sink.Avoid moving over steep installation. Final responsi- changes in grade(20 degrees or more). bility for site preparation, If required,provide for home storage and staging areas on the site.Plan the delivery including soil stability and and staging of home sections and materials so that after all deliveries are complete, frost heave control,lies with home sections and materials can be accessed for use and installed in the appropriate the installer.An improperly sequence.Orient home sections so they do not have to be rotated or excessively ma- prepared site may result in the denial of a foundation- Cn neuvered during the installation process. Plan for temporary needs,such as dump- related warranty claim. _< sters, portable toilets,crew parking,delivery vehicle drop-offs and concrete mixer de- r liveries. z m Before moving the manufactured home to the site,inform the LAHJ and make sure the n site is prepared and utilities are available. O v O STEP 2. DETERMINE HOME LOCATION AND LAYOUT The home location may have already been determined by others.If not,plan the home - location and layout in compliance with the regulations researched in Getting Started, /&IrZAeJ z STEP 5.CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS(p.8).Contact utilities for Fire separation.Comply Z locations of existing infrastructure,such as underground cables,pipes,and electrical with any LAHJ fire separa- lines. tion requirements or the re- D When planning the site improvements,consider the following: quirements NFPA 501A, D • The home location should be level. 2003 edition(Chapter 6). > • Avoid contact with large trees,steep slopes, poorly drained areas,and poten- O tial flood zones. z 9 • Preserve trees and shrubs for shade,visual screens,and windbreaks. n z • Plan the driveway,parking areas,septic,well,other structures,and utility c lines. D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 13 Prepare the Site PF S Conforms HUD MHCSS • Consider future additions,such as screen rooms,porches,and awnings. 1/15/09 • Site the home away from natural water paths. STEP 3. CLEAR AND GRADE THE SITE Trim overhanging foliage considering future growth,potential storms,swaying in wind / and snow/ice-weighted branches.Remove organic material such as vegetation,wood, roots,twigs,dead branches,grass,and brush from directly under the home.Remove Site drainage.Moisture un- der the home can result in any debris that could become termite infested from the site and surrounding area.Re- move all other debris from the home location,including roots from beneath footing loca- der th, a ����It tions.Properly dispose of all items. �.1,... 1-Ua I� Uy w u�c floor system and other Crown the site(Figure 4)away from the foundation for the first ten feet with a minimum parts of the home.Failure slope of 1/2 inch per foot.Where property lines,walls,slopes,or other physical condi- to provide adequate tions prohibit this slope, provide the site with drains,swales,or grading to drain water slope/drainage can result in away from the structure.Any fill required to grade the site should be inorganic"con- moisture-related problems trolled fill"applied in a maximum of four inch layers,compacted between each layer to such as mold, mildew,and at least 90%of its maximum relative density. Direct runoff away from the site using erosion. ditches and berms(Figure 5).If the home will have skirting,start grading from two feet in from the edge of the home. Figure 4. Crown the soil un- der the home to prevent wa- »-1, ter ponding J1 Figure 5.Direct runoff away from the home Hc use y y y k_ y y y Avows Indicate direction of water flow. Grade the ground so that water under porches,decks,and recessed entries flows away from the home.If proper grading is not possible,use other methods such as a J drain tile and automatic sump pump system to remove any water that may collect un- der the home. z < The home is suitable for the installation of gutters and downspouts.When gutters and downspouts are installed,direct runoff away from the home. z O i= Q J d STEP 4. DETERMINE SOIL CONDITIONS f- Examine the soil type under the proposed home location to make sure it is suitable for / Z placement of a home.The design of the home's support system, including footing/pier spacing and size,will in part be determined by the bearing capacity of the soil,and if Soil.Inadequate soil bearing p ground anchors are used, by the soil's withdrawal strength. capacity or a support sys- The soil under every portion of the support system must meet the following criteria: tem mismatched to the soil of p • The soil must be firm and undisturbed(not previously excavated)or fill com- characteristics can result in IL pacted to at least 90%of its maximum relative density.Uncompacted fill will excessive or differential X settlement of the home, settle over time,causing the home to shift and become unlevel. O which can cause the home Fill must not contain large debrisULJ .This too will settle over time. to go out of level,resulting z The soil must not be comprised of organic clays or peat.Organic material can in jammed doors and win- decay,causing settlement,and also may harbor pests that can infest the dows,cracks in finishes Yhome. and ruptured plumbing connections. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9.22 AM 14 Prepare Q7HUD000• The water table must be below the lowest level of the planned support sys- R to tem/foundation.A soil's bearing capacity can be greatly reduced when it is H SHCSS saturated with water. Note that water tables may vary with seasonal or cli- 1n5i09 mactic conditions.Consult a geologist or the LAHJ if you are unsure of the water table level. • The soil must not be a highly expansive type. Expansive soils can expand when they become saturated with water,causing the home to shift and be- come unlevel.If soils are expansive,contact a registered engineer,or regis- tered architect to assist with the design of the foundation system. Does the soilthese1110- YES, •• to STEP 5, DETERMINE SOIL FROST • 10, NO, Consult a registered engineer, registered architect, or geologist to determine a suitable soil bearing capacity. STEP 5. DETERMINE SOIL-BEARING CAPACITY AND FROST LINE The soil under a home must be capable of withstanding the loads imposed by the / weight of the home,its support system and furnishings,as well as any loads imposed / // by wind,snow,or other climactic conditions. Soil bearing capacity.Sup- SOIL-BEARING CAPACITY port systems on soils with Determine the soil-bearing capacity in pounds per square foot(psq before designing a bearing capacities less than support system.The higher the capacity(psf),the more weight the soil can hold without 1,000 psf must be designed unduly compressing.As the soil-bearing capacity increases,footings can be reduced in by a registered engineer or size or spaced farther apart. registered architect and approved by the LAHJ. Use one or more of the following methods to determine the site's soil bearing capacity: Limitations of pocket pane- • Test the soil.Hire a registered geologist,registered engineer,or registered trometers.Pocket pene- architect to determine the soil classification and maximum allowable soil bear- trometers do not work on ing capacity by testing the soil in accordance with generally accepted engi- sand or gravel. Use Table neering practice. 4 to determine allowable • Obtain soil records.The local office of the U.S. Department of Agriculture's pressure for these types of Natural Resources Conservation Service(www.soils.usda.gov)and/or the soils.If you encounter a LAHJ may have test results and/or soil analyses on file for the area. layer of gravel,test the soil X Conduct a pocket penetrometer test.Use a pocket penetrometer to esti- under the gravel. to not • put the penetrometer on mate allowable soil-bearing capacity as follows: stones larger than its tip as m 1. Select a location that will be under a footing. this will provide an inaccu- 0 2. Clear an area of a minimum of one square foot at least four inches deep rate reading. 0 or to the depth of the bottom of the planned footing. a 3. Using the instructions provided with the pocket penetrometer,take at 0 least five readings. 4. Discard the high and low readings and average the remaining readings. p Round this result down to the nearest soil-bearing value shown in the Z right column of Table 4. Z cn 5. Confirm that the rounded result matches the soil description on Table 4. • Determine soil-bearing value by visual examination.If one of the options r-- above is not available,the values on Table 4 can be used to establish soil- r bearing capacity by visual examination.This method provides lower capacity � values than the options above.Accurate soil identification typically requires 0 special training or expertise.An engineer or building code official may be able Z to assist in classifying the soil found on the site. D Z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (448 PG. 1) 15 Prepare thel c TABLE 4.SOIL-BEARING CAPACITY BY SOIL TYPE Q7HUD 5 Soil Type(and classification) . - meloHCSS Rock or hard pan(class 1) 4,000 1/15/09 Sandy gravel and gravel;very dense and/or cemented sands; `Otto oouroe gravel/oobblcs;prclooded silts,clays and coral(class 2) Sand;silly sand;clayey sand;silty gravel;medium dense course t SOO sands;sandy gravel;very stiff silt,sand days(class 3) Clay,sandy clay,silty clay,clayey silt(classes 4A and 413) 1.000 Uncompacted fill,peat,organic clays(class 5) Professional testing required Note to table:No allowances made for overburden pressure,embedment depth,water table height,or settlement problems. • Use default capacity.Use an allowable pressure of 1,500 psf,unless site- specific information requires the use of lower values based on soil classifica- tion and type according to Table 4. Note that soil types may vary across a home site. In this case,the soil with the lowest bearing capacity should be assumed when designing the support system.Keep a re- cord of the soil-bearing capacity value;it will be used later to design the home's sup- port system. FROST LINE In climates subject to ground freezing,consult the LAHJ,a registered engineer,or reg- istered architect to determine the depth of the frost line.Figure 6 may be used as a guideline when there is no specific local determination. Keep a record of the frost depth;it will be used later to design the home's support system. 1' 2' Figure 6.Average frost 3' 415'67' 7' 6�5' penetration depth(in feet) 4' 3' 0' 3' 3' 2' z < 0' z 0 a J a to Z Will this installation use auger-type ground anchors? z .. to STEP 6, DETERMINE GROUND • - HOLDING 1110- NO, go to Construct Foundation, (p. 28). w Torque Probe.Before using 0 STEP 6. DETERMINE GROUND ANCHOR HOLDING CAPAC- the torque probe,check C) with the utility companies w ITY for the location of under- ZWhen using auger-type ground anchors to tie down the home,first,use a torque probe ground cables or pipes to to determine the anchor-holding strength of the soil on the site. avoid contact with the Use a torque probe with a shaft of sufficient length to test the soil at the depth of the probe shaft. Skyline Corporation (4-48 F 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 16 Prepare WS. 000 anchor helical plate.Augur the probe into the ground,and following the probe manufac- turers instructions,take the torque wrench reading in the area where the anchors will be installed and at the depth of the anchor helix.If the soil varies in consistency across Conforms to the site,then use the lowest reading.Based on this reading,consult the anchor manu- facturer's charts to select the anchor type(s). 1n5i09 What •- of support For pier and ground anchor, go to Install Footings, (p. 18) For load-bearing perimeter wall, go to Construct Foundation, (p. 28) Cn r z m n O O O Z Z N D r r D O Z 3 D Z c a r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 17 Install Footings AP29N.0#05 _ onrorms to HUD MIrCSs Install Footings 1/15/09 This chapter provides instructions for the design and construction of individual footings that transfer the load from a single pier to the ground.A footing and pier together(discussed in Set the Home)is referred to as a"support."A footing may also be designed to carry the load of multiple piers(often called"strip"footings).The design of strip footings is not cov- ered in this manual. StepsFollow the • - • ® STEP 1.DESIGN POINT LOAD SUPPORTS(p.18) STEP 2.DESIGN FRAME SUPPORTS(Homes Without Perimeter Blocking)(p.21) STEP 3.DESIGN FRAME AND PERIMETER SUPPORTS(Homes With Perimeter Blocking)(p.22) STEP 4.SELECT FOOTING MATERIALS(p.23) STEP 5.SIZE FOOTINGS(p.23) STEP 6.INSTALL FOOTINGS(p.26) STEP 1. DESIGN POINT LOAD SUPPORTS All homes will need supports,and therefore footings,under the frame, marriage line (for multi-section homes),exterior wall openings and other heavy point loads. The home manufacturer may have provided a blocking diagram(or tags,labels,paint High roof loads.For roof or other markings under the home)indicating the required locations and/or loads for loads of 40 psf or greater, perimeter, marriage line and/or frame supports specifically for this home. If so,the dia- a registered engineer or gram or tags take precedence over the directions provided in this manual. registered architect must Create a sketch of the home that includes the exterior walls,the frame 1-beams and the determine the maximum marriage line(s), if a multi-section home.The sketch will be used in this chapter to lo- marriage wall opening cate each support,and note the size of the corresponding footing. Figure 7 is an ex- permitted without pier or ample of such a support plan. other supports. oor Piers Figure 7.Example of sup- Perimeter Ctl,��ekinc Piers I-Beam Frame Members J (if required) `, port plan ' Q ■ r • ■ ri n a r- Z .` � > Frame Piers ® } r, M_arriage Wall Piers !— j a aR R Z o I-Beam Frame Frame Piers Z f OIL o- u ❑ Porch Post Piers Per:merer Blocking Piers a, Door Piers (if required) 0 U As the location and load for each support is determined, note it on the sketch.When z selecting locations for supports, keep in mind that increasing the spacing between sup- ports will increase the load on that support and the size of the required footing. V) jkyline Corporation (448 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Install Footings W671 #OS 00 DETERMINE LOCATIONS Point loads exist where a bearing/structural weight is concentrated and transferred to Q7D rnn to the foundation at a specific point.Locate a support under each point load,including the HCss following examples: 1/15/09 • Exterior doors on side walls at both sides of each door(blocking is not re- quired at exterior doors on non-bearing end walls). • Other exterior wall openings four feet and greater at both sides of each open- ing(including multiple windows that total four feet wide or more without inter- mediate supports,even if individual windows are less than four feet). • Marriage line openings four feet or greater at both sides of each opening. • Locations where through-the-rim crossover ducts penetrate the rim joist at the marriage line and perimeter blocking is required(not required if the home is constructed with a perimeter frame system). • Marriage line columns. Load-bearing porch posts. • Under heavy(400 Ibs or greater)items,such as heavy furniture,waterbeds, fireplaces and large fish tanks. Mark the required point load support locations on the sketch.Supports are not required where the manufacturer has reinforced the floor(such as with additional outriggers or floor joists)and so noted in the documentation provided with the home. Figure 8 and Figure 9 identify typical point load support locations. oor Piers Figure 8. Typical point-load I-Beam Frame support locations r Marriage Wall Piers r o z m 0 O O \vl D 1 Porch Post Piers O Door Piers z z to D r r D O z 3 n z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 19 PF. (�S •nInstall Footings fotl�aa to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 1 Dooror opening less Figure 9. Typical point-load than 46"in width combined span A+B i support locations along the Ridge Searn r marriage line `Co'umr post Orwell less than 16"in width ``�,r1111t111//////�/ T.�F Span D C S Ire Span ��;P�G►STER�;OG�j,�'� PE1960031.2 Main .A., - _ � �•;• STATE OF ; 47 7'� ttI Beam' O,c•••,/NAIAt4P•••• Footing Footings sized for apens G . . Footings - ,..wl,_ Footing s _. Footing _. , Fooling i� ••. , . G� sized for &D respectively (Note if sized for sized for sized for sized for ��/��S'$/ SlJ 11" Span D wall is less than 16"in Span C Span B Span A+B Span A � ONA; � width,use combined span C+D with a single pier) Jeffrey T.Legault 71 2009.01.09 CALCULATE LOADS 11:26:23-05'00' Use Table 5 to determine the loads on point-load supports. For each support,find the columns with the appropriate roof load zone and section width. Find the row(s)corre- sponding to the span (see Figure 9 for guidance on determining spans). The number in the columns under the"M"and"P"headings are the loads for supports along the marriage line and perimeter respectively(point loads in the center of a sec- tion,i.e.not along a marriage line or perimeter wall,require the load in the"P"column). Interpolation for openings between those shown in the table is permitted. Note the required loads next to each point load support on the sketch. TABLE 5. LOAD ON POINT-LOAD FOOTINGS t 1010 720 1100 770 1200 830 1250 860 1370 930 1500 1000 1490 1000 1640 1090 1800 1180 1720 1130 1900 1240 2100 1350 2200 1410 2440 1560 2700 1700 2670 1690 2970 1870 3300 2050 J ® 2430 1550 2700 1710 3000 1880 3140 1960 3500 2180 3900 2400 3850 2380 4300 2650 4800 2930 Q 3140 — 3500 — 3900 — 4090 — 4570 — 5100 — 6040 — 5640 — 6300 Q m 3850 — 4300 — 4800 — 5040 — 5640 — 6300 — 6220 — 6970 — 7800 Z m 4560 — 6100 — 5700 — 5980 — 6700 — 7500 — 7400 — 8300 — 9300 — H J M=Marriage line,P=Perimeter U) Determine from the data plate and/or other documents if the home re- H Z quires perimeter blocking. Z O 101 If perimeter blocking • required, •• to STEP 2, DESIGN FRAME SUPPORTS (Homes Without Perimeter Blocking), (p. 21). IIII If perimeter blocking -• -• •• to STEP 3, DESIGN a. AND PERIMETER SUPPORTS (Homes With Perimeter Blocking), U W Z J Y Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG- 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 20 WPAR, Install Footings CSS 1115/09 STEP 2. DESIGN FRAME SUPPORTS (Homes Without Pe- rimeter Blocking) DETERMINE LOCATIONS All homes require regularly spaced supports along all main frame I-beams.Select spacing between supports and sketch them on the support plan. Keep in mind that Spacing frame supports. frame supports under homes with 8"deep I-beams may be no more than eight feet There must be a support apart.Those under homes with 10"or 12"deep I-beams may be no more than 10 feet located near the end of apart.Generally,greater distances between supports will require larger footings. each I-beam such that there is no more than 12 Figure 10 shows typical frame support locations. inches of beam past the edge of the support. Door Piers Figure 10. Typical support I-Beam Frame Members locations for homes not re- quiring regularly spaced pe- rimeter supports i 1 r Frame Piers El B E3 E3 El >9 E3 Marriage Wall Piers 0 I-Beam Frame �' - - Frame Piers ■ Porch Post Piers \\�tNtttittrur,,� Door Piers � �Y T. LE�GgG��% rn CALCULATE LOADS T� Use Table 6 to determine the loads on frame supports.Find the column with the ap- - PE19600312 propriate roof load zone and section width.Find the row corresponding to the selected _ = Z support spacing.The number in the intersecting cell is the load. •0 '•, STATE OF : Z ; m 0 Loads on all frame supports can be assumed to be equal if support spacing is equal. O %�O�` '•��DIAN?. '�� �� However,if different support spacings are used then each support with a different spacing should be calculated separately. '���r,rrrriiiitt�"��`� O Note the location and load required of each support on the sketch. Jetfreyr.Leaault ,�o D q Pp `llg' zoos.oi os itzs:ii- � � 05'00' O TABLE 6. LOAD ON FRAME SUPPORTS FOR HOMES NOT REQUIRING PERIMETER BLOCKING Z Roof load zone and max.section width z Cn 1 i . --I _® ®� D r cL 2460 2720 3000 2740 3030 3350 3020 3350 3700 3640 3930 4340 3960 4400 4870 4380 4870 5390 4620 5130 5690 5180 5760 6390 5740 6390 7090 Z 5700 6340 7030 6400 7120 7910 7100 7910 8780 D Z C n .. to STEP 4. SELECT FOOTING . r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 21 Install Footings VT to ss STEP 3. DESIGN FRAME AND PERIMETER SUPPORTS (Homes With Perimeter Blocking) DETERMINE LOCATIONS Depending on design and location,some homes require regularly spaced perimeter supports along all of the sidewalls and marriage walls in addition to frame supports. This will be indicated on the data plate and/or documents included with the home. Spacing frame supports. If required,perimeter supports are only needed on bearing walls.Bearing walls are There must be a supportlocated near the end of thngP walls that support the ends of roof trusses or rafters(typically sidewalls and mar- each 1-bearn such that riage walls but not end walls of main units or sidewalls of tag units). there is no more than 12 To minimize the number of required perimeter supports,space them evenly between inches of beam past the point load supports as shown in Figure 11 and Figure 12(but not under spans).These edge of the support. figures identify typical support locations for homes requiring perimeter supports. Your Piers Figure 11. Typical support Perimeter Blocking Piers j,' I-Beam Frame Members locations for homes requiring perimeter supports W 1. El f1 0 Ll 1 Frame Piers Marriage Wall Piers R 0 I-Beam Frame \- Frame Piers �l f Porch Post Piers Perimeter Blocking Piers Door Piers Figure 12. Typical marriage Door or oponing loss _ Combined span A+B line support locations for Z, than ae"in width — domes requiring perimeter Q Ridge 1910arn supports 0 y Grimm.post orwall less than 16"in width JSpan C en B Spann QMain I-Beam V) z + Z20 -u,. Marriage line �.. _;� Footings r¢uf;rI M rwrwge line ,,Footing bK Fooling Footing Q supports sized for support ' sized'or p.L' sized for sized for Span C Span B Span A+B Span A 0 0 CALCULATE LOADS U Use Table 7 to determine the loads on frame and perimeter supports for homes requir- Lu z ing perimeter blocking. Find the column with the appropriate roof load(Table 3)and section width. Find the group of rows corresponding to the selected support spacing. >_ The values in the intersecting cells are the loads for the frame,perimeter,and marriage tn line supports respectively. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 922 AM 22 1u FootingsInstall HUD 1MHCSS. 1/15/09 ```` U1Huuprr���i Loads on supports of a given type(frame,perimeter,or marriage)can be assumed to :`eP rq T.�FQ9''�' be equal if support spacing is equal. However,if different support spacings are used 4-olsTFgFOG���'. then each support with a different spacing should be calculated separately. •` PE19600312 X - Note the location and load required of each support on the sketch. S-0 ' • STATE OF j�4` ''.�Oc�'•�NoIAt4l, TABLE 7.LOAD ON FRAME AND PERIMETER SUPPORTS FOR HOMES REQUIRING PERIMETER BLOCKING " 1 . V 1=911 . r . spacing ®®® = - ==I 1210 1360 1440 1210 1360 1440 1210 1360 1440 1530 1660 1850 1810 1970 2200 2090 2290 2550 2460 2720 3110 2940 3270 3730 3410 3810 4350 1660 1890 2010 1660 1890 2010 1660 1890 2010 Perimeter 2150 2340 2630 2560 2810 3150 3000 3280 3680 3540 3930 4510 4250 4750 5440 4960 5570 6370 2110 2410 2560 2110 2410 2580 2110 2410 2580 111M Mill 2760 3020 3400 3310 3640 4100 3870 4270 4800 4620 5130 5910 5570 6230 7150 6520 7320 8390 2560 2940 3150 2560 2940 3150 2560 2940 3150 11M Mill 3370 3690 4180 4070 4480 5050 4760 5260 5930 5700 6340 7310 6890 7710 8860 8070 9070 10410 STEP 4. SELECT FOOTING MATERIAL Select one of the products and materials from Table 8 for the footings. I TABLE 8.FOOTING MATERIALS Appropriate Use .- Minimum 6"thick poured-in-place concrete pads,slabs,or ribbons with at least a 28 Poured concrete All soil types day compressive strength of 3,000 psi.Cast-in-place concrete footings may also require reinforcing steel based on acceptable engineering practice,the design Cn loads,and site specific soil conditions. Minimum 4"thick nominal precast concrete pads meeting or exceeding ASTM C r" Pre-cast concrete All soil types 90-02a,Standard Specification for Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units,without z reinforcement,with at least a 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi. IT 0 Use in accordance with the pad manufacturer's instructions.Must be certified for O ABS plastic Stable soils use in the soil classification at the site,listed and labeled for the required load ca- pacity. O Proprietary systems Consult system manufac- Consult system manufacturer p turer O z footingsWill .- z 110- YES, .. to STEP 5, SIZE FOOTING, III rD- • see footing system . . on-grade footings, - Complete Exterior Work, STEP 2. INSTALL ,/ D // GROUND • O RETARDER ' then " to ' Frost protection.When se- z lecting footing materials, D STEP 5. SIZE FOOTINGS bear in mind the need for z frost protection. Not all foot- e Once the load on the footing and the soil-bearing capacity are known,calculate the ing materials are suitable D size of each footing as follows: for freezing climates. 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation(4-48 PG. 1) 23 Install Footings ��#QS 1. From Table 9 determine if the pier is to be of single-stack blocks(B inch x16 inch)or double-stack blocks(16 inch x 16 inch)pier. e C�C.nform�i;to2. Locate the group of rows in Table 10 with the soil-bearing capacity deter- Hun MHs mined in Prepare the Site,STEP S. DETERMINE SOIL-BEARING CAPAC- 1/15/09 ITY AND FROST LINE(p. 15). Use the next lowest value if the exact value does not appear. 3. Read across the table to determine the minimum required footing area and the minimum footing thickness for the corresponding footing type(single or double-stacked blocks). A The re re.+f--+inn c ..tie n�.�n 4 k-—1—finn.� i kkL ���..r. 4- �. ,q;:r,. . .. . y mar 4 y.....r y .,. �..NN.. .�pa� ing(Table 6 or Table 7). TABLE 9.PIER CONFIGURATION Confiquration Less than 36 in(except comer Single-stack blocks with long side 7001b piers more than 3 blocks high) perpendicular to l-beam Between 36 in and 67 in and cor- Double,interlocked blocks ner piers over 3 blocks high Over 67 in Double,interlocked blocks 16,000 lbs. Single-stack blocks with long side ' 54 in or less 8,000 lbs. parallel to perinleler rail(rim joist) Single-stack blocks with long side 54 in or less perpendicular to the marriage line 8,000 lbs. J Q z z 0 H Q J J F- U) z z 0 H Q 0 IL W 0 v w z J Y Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 24 FInstallFootings anforms to 11MUD MN. 1/15/09 TABLE 10.FOOTING DIMENSIONS pier(single-stack 16 in.x 16 in.pier(double-stack blo blocks) Foot-Minimum Soil Bearing Minimum Footing ing Dimensions cast-in-place min, Maximum footing cast-in-place Capacity . ... . ... . 256 16 x 16 4 800 4 800 512 16 x 32 4 1600 4 1600 500 324 18 x18 4 1010 4 1010 400 20 x 20 4 1250 4 1250 576 24 x 24 4 1800 4 1800 900 30 x 30 4 2810 4 2810 256 16 x 16 4 1680 4 1680 512 16 x 32 4 3370 4 3370 324 18 x 18 4 2130 4 2130 tti 400 20 x 20 4 2630 4 2830 576 24 x 24 4 3800 4 3800 900 30 x 30 4 5930 4 5930 256 16 x16 4 2570 4 2570 512 16 x 32 4 5150 4 5150 324 18 x18 4 3260 4 3260 400 20 x 20 4 4020 4 4020 576 24 x 24 4 5800 4 5800 900 30 x 30 6 8000 6 8910 256 16 x 16 4 3460 4 3460 512 16 x 32 6 6840 6 6840 its 324 18 x 18 4 4380 4 4380 400 20 x 20 4 5410 4 5410 576 24 x 24 6 7700 6 7700 900 30 x 30 6 8000 6 12030 256 16 x 16 4 4350 4 4350 to 512 16 x 32 6 8000 6 8620 X 324 18 x 18 4 5510 4 5510 r 00 1 Z 400 20 x 20 4 6800 4 6800 m 576 24 x 24 6 8000 6 9700 n O 900 30 x 30 8 8000 8 15000 X 256 16 x16 4 5240 4 5240 O X 512 16 x 32 6 8000 6 10400 D 324 18 x 18 4 6630 4 6630 '0 000 400 20 x 20 4 8000 4 8190 Z 2 576 24 x 24 6 8000 6 11700 (1) 1 900 30 x 30 8 8000 8 16000 D Note:The capacity values listed have been reduced by the dead load of the concrete footing. `O`�PEY T.�F0.iii D Design footings to comply with the following additional requirements: °�F . • Design each footing at least slightly larger than the base of the pier it sup- Q °: Z PE19600312 ports. • To keep footings directly under 1-beams and other support points, size them "9'•: STATE OF �Q` Z slightly larger than the minimum required area to allow slight adjustment of 0 :/'VO 'kV, the pier location during home installation. • Design footings with a footing extension(projection beyond the base of the xme0T 1.puR ffJ^] 2009.01.0911:25:38 1/9/2009 9.22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 25 Install Footings #05 9 oforMto HUD MHCSS pier)no greater than the footing thickness(Figure 13). Increase footing thick- 1/15/09 ness if necessary. Figure 13.Maximum footing extensions 16"Block •t' 6' 4'T 2a Footing Extends Extends By More 16" 16- NO YES By Its Thickness N O Than Its Thickness 24' 16, Or Less YES a a- a' a" Spit Footing Extends Split Footing Extends YES Less Than One Third NO More Than One Third Wid th dth Its Width • The footing sizes shown are for square pads and are based on the surface area(square inches). Design non-square footings such that the area and depth is equal to or greater than the area and depth of the square footing shown in Table 10,and the distance from the edge of the pier to the edge of the footing is not more than the thickness of the footing. • For four-inch thick unreinforced precast concrete footings,use the minimum footing size for the six-inch cast-in-place footing from Table 10. STEP 6. INSTALL FOOTINGS Construct the footings as follows: • Maintain the distance between adjacent piers to within 10%of the tabulated / // spacing and so the average distance between any adjacent spans is equal to Placing Concrete anchors. or less than the tabulated spacing. If anchors will be placed in • Whenever possible,place point load supports directly under the required lo- concrete,follow instructions cations. If plumbing,electrical, mechanical equipment interferes, place sup- in Install Stabilizing Sys- ports no more than 6 inches in either direction of the support point. tem(p.65)to determine • Recess perimeter blocking supports and perimeter point load supports no anchor layout.Either place J more than 10 inches from the edge of the floor with added support as shown anchors immediately after Q in Figure 14. the concrete has been n poured or drill them in after Z the concrete has set. a 14.Perimeter su Z 4x4 Or 2-2x4'S On Edge(NaYed Figure p- O Together)Spanning Minrn=2 ports Exterior Wall Fba Joists H a J J Q H to Floor Rim Plate � Typical FloorJoist Z 0 Pier Pier O a O CD 10"Max Setback uJ From Edge Of Fkxx Z J N 26 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM F ® Install ♦Oran t0 1111D MACS, 1/15/09 • If footings are rectangular,orient them so that the long side is perpendicular to the home's I-beam. • Place the bottom of footings on undisturbed soil or fill compacted to at least 90%of its maximum relative density. Excavation.If • In freezing climates protect footings from the effects of frost heave in accor- excavation is required,mark dance with any LAW requirements(see Prepare the Site,p. 13).Place the the footing locations on the bottom of the footings below the frost line(insulated foundations and mono- ground with stakes before lithic slabs are other frost protection options not covered in this manual). beginning to dig. • Make sure the top surface of the footing is level,flat,and smooth. • In accordance with the American Concrete Institute publication ACI-308, maintain curing measures before construction or installation onto the concrete footing begins,until a minimum of 70%of the specified 28-day compressive strength has been achieved.The ACI recommended time to attain this level of strength is seven days for ASTM C150 Type 1 mixtures and 10 days for Type II mixtures.Full design live and dead loads may not be applied until the 28- day duration has elapsed for achieving full strength. •• to Set the Home • 1 Cn r a m n O O D O z Z to D r r D O Z 3 D a c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 27 ConstructPF os FoundationCnnfn"-I- 1115/09ms to HUD MIICSS Construct Foundation (FOR HOMES WITH LOAD-BEARING PERIMETER WALL) This chapter provides guidelines and recommendations for the design and construction of a basement or crawlspace foundation using a load-bearing perimeter wall.A load-bearing perimeter wall foundation system uses a wall along the outer edge of the home to support the home's outside walls.This perimeter support works with interior supports such as piers,columns,and cross beams that support the home's frame and, if multi-section,marriage line. StepsFollow the below: STEP 1.OBTAIN A FOUNDATION DESIGN(p.28) STEP 2.EXCAVATE(p.28) STEP 3.CONSTRUCT THE FOOTING OR SLAB(p.28) STEP 4.CONSTRUCT THE PERIMETER WALL(p.28) `^Y STEP 5.INSTALL INTERIOR SUPPORTS(p.29) STEP 6.WATERPROOF FOUNDATION WALL(p.29) STEP 7.BACKFILL AND GRADE(p.29) STEP 1. OBTAIN A FOUNDATION DESIGN If a load-bearing perimeter wall foundation design has not been provided by the home manufacturer,it is the responsibility of the retailer and/or home owner to provide a de- / / A sign approved by an engineer or architect,licensed in the state where the home will be installed.The approved design must comply with the LAHJ regulations for foundation Using engineered designs. in- design,waterproofing,and drainage,and the following: This section is NOT tended to provide a com- • The foundation perimeter bearing wall must be supported with a concrete slab plete design for a buildable or continuous strip footing around the perimeter of the home. Interior piers foundation. A complete must be supported by a slab or footings. If footings are used under interior design must be obtained piers,they may be designed as in Prepare Footings, p. 18. that is suitable for the local • Slabs must extend to the edges of the home. area and sealed by a pro- -j Footings and slabs must be protected from the effects of frost heave by ex- fessional engineer or regis- � tending the footings to or below the frost line or by using a frost protected t architect, licensed in z shallow foundation design. thh ed e state. a Foundation ready home. 2 Make sure that homes to z STEP 2. EXCAVATE be installed on a basement O Excavate for the foundation, properly disposing of the earth that is not needed for backfill or site-grading purposes. or a crawlspace have been ordered with a recessed frame or as foundation- STEP 3. CONSTRUCT THE FOOTINGS OR SLAB ready,where the frame is Construct the foundation according to the approved design, including the perimeter designed to avoid interfer- z foundation wall,drainage system,footing(s),and/or slab. ence with the foundation z 0 wall. STEP 4. CONSTRUCT THE PERIMETER WALL Checking the water table. WUnless the approved design requires otherwise, construct the perimeter wall with mor- For basements,check for a 0 tared and reinforced concrete blocks or reinforced poured-in-place concrete. Install re- high water table.The water Q. W inforcement according to the approved design or LAHJ.Install ventilation and access table may vary seasonally 0 openings according to the approved design,or if not specified,according to the re- or based on weather condi- U quirements in Complete Under the Home,STEP 3 INSTALL SKIRTING(p.97). tions.A geologist can per- uj form an algae test to de- When constructing pockets for an H-beam system,measure the beam depth and lo- termine the water table r cate the pockets carefully. It is critical that when the home's frame rests on top of the level.The foundation de- Y H-beam,the perimeter of the floor rests squarely on the foundation wall sill plate va Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 28 oFS#05 Construct Conforms to Foundation 11UD 11IIcss 1/15/09 (Figure 15).Leave room for a two-inch nominal,pressure treated wood spacer on top sign must account for a of the wall pockets(to prevent corrosion,the steel beams must not be in direct contact high water table. with concrete).Leave at least one inch for thermal expansion at the ends of the beams Level the wall.Make sure and maintain a minimum of two inches of bearing area for the beams in the pockets the foundation is level and (yielding a minimum pocket depth of three inches). straight with no more than a Bolt a pressure treated wood sill plate(minimum 2 x 6)to the top of the foundation 1/4 inch vertical variation wall. If the home's siding cannot be nailed through,use a 2 x 10 sill plate that extends over the entire foundation into the foundation 1-1/4 inches(Figure 16).The home can then be connected to the and no more than 1/8 inch foundation by fastening the sill plate into the floor joists from below.Connect the home vertical variation over any to the foundation according to the approved design.Recess nuts into the sill plate and two-foot length. cut off the ends of bolts so they do not project above the sill plate and interfere with the Check for Plates.When us- placement of the home. ing an H-beam system, check and compensate for reinforcement plates that add thickness to the chas- sis beam at axle locations. Figure 15.H-beam installa- tion Flan FloorJUS1 Figure 16.Connection using Pressure oatad 2 x 10 sill plate ir Chassis Sill Plate Mein I-Beare _ 2 x 10 A Sit Plate Transverse H-bean Famener Limits of exca- Pr•••e•• - a vation.When a crane will Treated Plate 8 x 6 x 16-inch Concrete Block be used,excavate no more Foundation than two feet outside the Well�. foundation perimeter. Un- excavated ground will pro- STEP 5. INSTALL INTERIOR SUPPORTS vide a more stable base for Install piers,columns and H-beams to support the interior of the home according to the the crane. approved design. Footing heights.Pour foot- ings to a height that will re- STEP 6. DAMP PROOF FOUNDATION WALL duce the need to cut blocks or shim when building peri- Damp proof the foundation wall no less than up to the height of the planned backfill. meter walls and piers. Is this . basement f• •. • V /,I r z • •• . GRADE, • Backfilling. Backfill against 0 basement walls only after X the home is connected to STEP 7. BACKFILL AND GRADE the foundation or the O Backfill against the foundation wall to the height of the damp proofing.Take care to not basement walls may deflect D damage the drainage system. Grade the fill as per Prepare the Site(p. 13). inward or collapse. O z Does the approved foundation design call forground • z •• to Install Stabilizing • • • •• to • 1 D r D O z a z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 29 Set the Home OF y Conforms to HLU�tll('titi Set the Home 1115/09 This chapter describes the process of installing the first section of the home(for single section homes this is the only sec- tion)onto the foundation. Follow the Steps . - • STEP 1.PREPARE FOR SET(p.30) STEP 2.POSITION HOME SECTION(p.30) STEP 3.LIFT HOME(p.30) STEP 4.CONSTRUCT PIERS(p.32) STEP 1. PREPARE FOR SET Before beginning the home set,complete the following: • Confirm that the site is properly cleared and graded(see Prepare the Site, p. 13. Clearances under the Ensure that the footings are in place and properly located. home.After the home is • Install any utilities that will be difficult to install(e.g.those below grade be- leveled,the resulting dis- neath the home)after the home is in place. tance between the bottom of the entire chassis main Secure or remove from the home and properly store all ship loose items(refer frame beam and the to shipping documents for items shipped with the home). ground must be no less • Inspect the home interior, exterior and all provided materials,appliances,and than 12 inches. equipment.Immediately report any damage or shortages to the manufacturer. Utilize proper cribbing. • The ground moisture retarder may be installed now or after the home is com- Manufactured homes plete. See Complete Exterior Work,STEP 2.INSTALL GROUND MOIS- weigh several tons.No TURE RETARDER(p.96)for requirement and then return here. one should be under the home(whether it is mov- For perimeter bearing wall foundations: ing or stationary)unless • Check that the length and width of the home match with the foundation walls. proper cribbing is in place (Figure 17). Failure to util- • Check that the two main diagonal measurements of the foundation are equal. ize proper cribbing may J • Check that the foundation walls and other support points are within 1/4 inch of result in serious injury or Q level overall and within 1/8 inch of level within any four foot distance. death. zFor multi-section homes,check that each pair of diagonal measurements for each portion of the foundation corresponding to a home section are equal. Z 0 For multi-section homes,find the electrical bonding lugs on the front or rear O outriggers. Reverse them to the inside of the outrigger using star washers so Qthey will be accessible after the home is placed on the foundation walls. J If using an H-beam system,remove the frame's shackle hanger if it will inter- @Leveling during < fere with proper placement of the beam. jacking.Keep the home's CAI floor as level as possible Z STEP 2. POSITION HOME SECTION during jacking.Twisting or Z Position the home section in its final location (if possible,move the heaviest section of warping the floor can dam- 0 the home into place first).Then place materials needed to construct support piers near age the structure and finish- their final locations under the home as determined in Prepare Footings,(p. 18). ing. Use as many jacks as necessary to keep the floor aflat and level. CL STEP 3. LIFT HOME ® There are three primary methods available to place the home on the foundation:jack- u ing,rolling and craning.Jacks, often with roller systems,are typically used for pier and W anchor foundations; roller systems are commonly used for crawlspace foundations with load-bearing perimeter walls;and cranes are most commonly used for basement foun- >_ dations. Y 30 L;orporalion (4- 6 PG, 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Set the Home JACKS PFS If jacks are to be used,comply with all jacking safety precautions and the procedure below.Lifting the home with jacks involves potential risks and must be done with ut- form to most care and caution. Failure to follow jacking warnings and procedures may result in HUD MHCSS serious injury or death.Please read the Jacking Safety Precautions before lifting the 1/15/09 home with jacks. PRECAUTIONSJACKING SAFETY • No one should be under the home's I-beams while the jacks are being oper- ated or while the home is supported only on the jacks. • Use jacks only for raising the home.Do not rely on the jacks to support the home. • If possible,raise the home only on one side so that the other side is in contact with the ground.Leave the hitch connected to the vehicle or other stabilizing equipment. • Obey all OSHA regulations. Make sure adequate safety cribbing(Figure 17)is in place whenever the home is placed on jacks. • Use a minimum of two commercial quality jacks,each with a rating of at least 12 tons. • Jack only on the main chassis I-beam,centering jacks directly under the beam. • Do not jack on a seam Qoint between flanges of twin I-beams). • To distribute the concentrated loads from jacks to I-beam,place a minimum 3/8-inch thick steel plate,a C-channel,a 1'/zinch thick hardwood block or a commercial jacking plate,between the main chassis I-beam and the jack head. • Locate the jack base on firm ground.Never jack on freshly disturbed soil or where an underground sewer pipe may be located. Use a firm support under the jack base to prevent tipping or settling of the jack. A minimum 16"x 16"or larger wood or rigid fiberglass pad is recommended. Never use concrete blocks as a support for a jack. Follow the jacking sequence outlined below to avoid overstressing structural members: 1. Block wheels. Block the wheels so the house does not roll. 2. Install cribbing.Install safety cribbing(Figure 17). N Figure 17. Stack 4"x 6"by 5' X long timbers as shown to form r_ safety timbers. Place safety Z �) I timbers under home behind m axle area and under hitch. n O O M D 3. Level lengthwise.Locate one jack at the hitch and level the section length- p wise(such that the front and rear of the section are at the same height). Z 4. Locate frame jacks. Place a minimum of one jack just forward of the first Z spring hanger and another just behind the last spring hanger of the I-beam on D the side of the home that is lowest(making sure not to place jacks where the r piers will go).Place jacks no more than 20 feet apart and no more than 20 rD feet from each end of the I-beam. > 5. Lift the home.Operating the jacks simultaneously(or sequentially in very Z small increments),lift the home section until it is slightly higher than the final desired pier height. D Z ROLLER SYSTEMS c When using a roller system,comply with the equipment manufacturer's directions and rD- the following sequence: 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 31 Set the Home M 1. Establish staging area.Establish a staging area directly adjacent to one or both sides of the foundation. 2. Setup rollers.Set up the roller system according to the equipment manufac- turer's directions. lnln mxcss 1/15/09 3. Fasten bump blocks.Temporarily fasten wooden bump blocks on the sill plates at the ends of the foundation to stop the home from rolling at the de- sired location. 4. Roll home.Roll the home into place over the foundation. 5. Remove bump blocks.Remove the blocks before installing the next section of a multi-section home. CRANES i When using a crane,follow these guidelines: • Position the home section(s)and crane(taking the boom reach into consid- eration)such that they do not have to be repositioned during the set. • Use enough properly sized straps to maintain balance of the home and to prevent damage to the structure. • Place straps under walls or posts,including temporary posts used to support the opening. Do not position lifting straps under marriage wall openings. • Use a properly sized spreader bar to maintain a vertical lift,to avoid placing compression forces on the eaves and to reduce any tendency to slip. Connect a rope to at least one point on the home so it can be controlled while aloft. • Make provisions to retrieve the straps/cables after the home is set.If using a cradle system,notch the sill plate where the straps will fall.For a sling sys- tem,notch and reinforce the home's rim joist to keep the strap from slipping and allow the strap to be removed after the home is set. • Always set the home section farthest from the crane first so that subsequent section(s)need not be lifted over previously set sections. Have the interior foundation supports already been designed and installed as part of an approved load-bearing perimeter wall foundation? 1110- YES, •. to . or .• to Connect •. 77)for single section • •• to STEP 4. CONSTRUCT J Q Z STEP 4. CONSTRUCT PIERS 4 For the side of the home section that is up on jacks, place piers on footings or pads fol- lowing the home manufacturer's blocking plan(or tags). If no plan was provided,use O the support plan developed in Install Footings(p. 18).Start at one end of the home P section and work toward the other noting the required pier material specifications and Designing piers.Incorrect J procedure described below. size,location or spacing of J piers may result in serious Q Construct piers so as to provide a stable foundation for the home using materials listed structural damage to the in the specifications box below and based on the location of the pier and its height as home. Install piers at all re- Z measured from the top of the footing or pad to the top of the cap.See Table 12 for pier quired locations. Failure to do Z construction requirements. so may lead to sagging O_ floors,walls,and roofs,and Q could void the home's war- � ranty. O IL w O U W Z J } Y 32 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM F • oob�to I"114A 1/15/09 TABLE 11.PIER MATERIAL MINIMUM SPECIFICATIONS Component .- Nominal dimensions of at least 8"x 8"x 16";minimum load 8,000 lbs;confirming to ASTM designation Concrete Block C90,grade N. Solid masonry(nominal 4"x 8"x 16"pre-cast concrete without reinforcement);pressure treated lumber Caps (nominal 2"x 8"x 16");or steel(minimum 1/2"thick,corrosion protected by a min.of a 10 mil coating of an exterior paint or equivalent). Spacers Nominal 2"thick boards. (alsoShims called Hardwood,minimum 4"width by minimum 6"length by maximum 1"thick(nominal);plastic must be listed wedges) with maximum load capacity;used in pairs. Available in various sizes stamped with maximum load capacity and listed or labeled for the required verti- • cal load capacity,and where required by design,for the appropriate horizontal load capacity.Metal or cast concrete piers Iother manufactured piers must be provided with protection against weather deterioration and corrosion at least equivalent to that provided by a coating of zinc on steel of.30 oz per sq.ft of surface coated. treatedPressure wood With a water borne preservative,in accordance with AWPA Standard U1-04 for Use Category 4B ground contact applications. TABLE 12.PIER CONSTRUCTION Configuration Maximum offset Maximum load Mortar and . .- I top to bottom ment Less than 36 in(except Single-stack blocks with long , comer piers more than 3 side perpendicular to I-beam /' 8,000 lbs. Not required blocks high) Frame Between 36 in and 67 in 1"('/i'up to 36" and corner piers over 3 Double,interlocked blocks high) 16,000 lbs. Not required blocks high Over 67 in Designed by a registered engineer or registered architect Single-stack blocks with long ,/2"up to 36"high, Perimeter54 in or less` side parallel to perimeter rail 1"over 36"high 8,000 lbs. Not required (rim joist) Single-stack blocks with long %2"up to 36"high, 54 in or less' side perpendicular to the 1"over 36"high 8,000 lbs. Not required marriage line Construct perimeter and marriage line piers over 54 inches according to the requirements for frame piers of the same height. 1. Prepare footing surface.Make sure the footing surface upon which the pier fn sits is flat and smooth.Before placing the pier on the footing,clean dirt,rocks, X or other material off the surface of the footing. For cast-in-place concrete foot- r ings, if the footing surface is uneven,create a level,flat surface by placing a z treated board on the footing and mortaring on the first block(or manufactured m pier base),or by placing the first block(or manufactured pier base)on a layer p of premix dry sand mortar. 2. Stack blocks.Stack concrete blocks with their hollow cells aligned vertically. When piers are constructed of blocks stacked side-by-side,orient each layer at right angles to the previous one(Figure 18)and plan blocks so that split caps will be perpendicular to the blocks they rest on and to the I-beam. O z z A r r D O Z D Z t= D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 33 PFt,s Set the Home Conforms to IlUD S111CSS 1/15/09 Figure 1B.Frame pier con- struction Main Wkwn Wood Shins to F1 Gaps Up to 1'Max Main 46eam Wood Shins to Fi Optional(2)2x6cr Gaps tip to 1'Max (1)202 Space Optonal2x6 4x8x16 Concrete Cap _ Spacer - 4xBx16 Conde T sN•• �w13 Cep or 2xBx 16 P.T. I Cmcrete� -Sbck or Fmtdmod Cap Typical Bx8x16 € Concrete Block �I Typical Footing +' J Typical Foerg 3. Cap piers.Place a cap on hollow block piers to evenly distribute the structural load. Use caps the same length and width as the piers they rest upon.When using split caps on double-stacked block piers,install the caps with the long / , / A dimension perpendicular to the joint in the blocks below and to the main (- beam. Curing time of mortar. Where wet mortar is used to 4. Install shims.Use shims to level the home and fill any gaps between the construct or level piers,al- base of the I-beam and the top of the pier cap.Always use shims in pairs low it to cure to at least 80% (Figure 19). Drive them in tightly so they do not occupy more than one inch of of strength capacity(usually vertical space.When the space to be shimmed is greater than one inch and requiring 96 hours)before less than the minimum thickness of available caps or concrete blocks,use setting the home. hardwood dimensional lumber(two inches maximum thickness)or 2"or 4" thick concrete block. For split caps, install shims and dimensional lum- ber/blocks over each individual cap. Figure 19. Correct shim J placement Q IAeam— M z Shims z Space O Dimensions of QCap masonry perimeter walls. J If using a masonry perimeter Qenclosure,calculate pier < heights so that the enclo- U) sure can be built using Stan- - dard unit dimensions(with- z out cutting). O Q 5. Set up level.Set up a water level with the fluid level at the desired height of W the main piers.Carefully lower the side of the section down onto the leveled a piers,adjusting the final height with shims. W O USING A WATER LEVEL wA water level is a standard device for leveling the home.The level z_ consists of the following components: J0 One container(five gallon bucket or one gallon jug). e • 150 feet of 1/2 inch diameter plastic tubing. Level the home.The home is adequately leveled if there is Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 34 �RFN, Set the Home Conforms to 11I'D NIIR S5 1/15/09 • Fittings for container to tubing. no more than 1/4 inch differ- Valve for terminal end of tubing. ence between adjacent pier supports(frame or perime- • Liquid for system:colored water in warm climates,windshield ter)and the exterior doors washing fluid in cold climates. and windows of the home do not bind and can be properly ^... operated. - — Water level operation.To o mn. operate the water level properly,both ends of the system must be open to the atmosphere and there must _ be approximately the same amount of fluid in the tubing at all times(within a few _ - inches). How to use a water level a. Position level.Position the level such that it can reach all piers. b. Place container.Place the container so that the fluid in the con- tainer is at the same level as the desired level of the top of the supports under the home,allowing for any bracing below the level of the 1-beams. c. Uncoil tubing.Uncoil the tubing and fill with fluid,taking care not to introduce bubbles into the hose.Never allow anything to crimp or crush the tubing so as to impede the free flow of fluid. d. Bleed air.Hold the valve below the level of the water container; open the valve to bleed out any air and close the valve. e. Establish height.Locate the tubing adjacent to a pier that is set to the desired final height.Position the valve above the pier and open the valve.Move the water container up or down to where the water level is at the desired final height of the pier.Maintain the water container in that position and close the valve. f. Level piers.Move the tubing to the next pier.Hold the valve above the pier and open it.Set the pier height to the level of the water in the tubing and close the valve.Repeat this step until all piers are at the same level. Cn 6. Complete the opposite side.Jack the other side of the section up and install piers following the instructions above.At the completion of this step,the sec- z tion should be level from front to rear and from side to side. m 7. Install perimeter and marriage line piers.Install perimeter piers and for 0 O multi-section homes, marriage line piers. Position marriage line piers to pro- :a vide equal bearing for both mating sections. a O 8. Remove running gear.Remove and store,recycle or properly dispose of the D hitch,axles,and wheels.These items are the property of the homeowner unless other contractual arrangements have been made. p z Is this a single-section • Z cn •• to • D 00, • .• to • r r D O z D z C D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 35 Complete Multi- 05 onrorms eo Section Set HUD PiHCSS Complete Multi-Section Set 115/09 This chapter covers the preparation and installation of additional home sections, including the structural connections be- tween units, raising and fastening hinged roofs,and fastening the home to a load-bearing perimeter wall foundation. StepsFollow the below: STEP 1.INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE ANCHORS(p.36) STEP 2.REMOVE PROTECTIVE SHIPPING MATERIALS(p.36) STEP 3.COMPLETE HINGED ROOF(p.36) STEP 4.CHECK MARRIAGE LINE GASKET(p.37) STEP S.POSITION ADDITIONAL HOME SECTIONS(p.38) STEP 6.CONNECT FLOORS(p.39) T STEP 7.CONNECT ROOF(p.41) STEP B.CONNECT WALLS(p.43) V STEP 9.ATTACH TAG UNITS(p.45) STEP 10.REMOVE TEMPORARY ITEMS(p.46) STEP 11.FASTEN HOME TO FOUNDATION(p.46) STEP 12.BACKFILL AND GRADE(p.46) STEP 13.BUILD STAIRS(p.46) STEP 1. INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE ANCHORS J If the home is in Wind Zone II or III,install ground anchors along the marriage line now; before mating sections are joined see Install Stabilizing System(p.65).After install- ing marriage line anchors return to this point in Complete Multi-Section Set. Z Position roof jacks. Posi-tion jacks vertically to pre- Z STEP 2. REMOVE PROTECTIVE SHIPPING MATERIALS vent the jack foot from kick- 0 Remove all shipping protection and associated fasteners from both home sections to ing out or sliding. be joined, including plastic used to close up the open sides during transportation. Do Caution during roof rais- Jnot remove the temporary supports holding up the ceilings at major openings. ing.Do not enter the roof d cavity during the raising F` STEP 3. COMPLETE HINGED ROOF procedure. ? If the home has a hinged roof that has been folded down for shipping,raise the roof us- Checklists for alternate Z ing a crane or roof jacks following the procedure below: construction.If the serial 1. Position lift points.Position the roof lift points(jacks or crane lift points)fol- number(see the data plate r' or the chassis front cross < lowing the jack manufacturer or crane operator instructions.Space roof lift member)has the letters points equally along the length of the roof with no more than five feet from the iLend of the roof to the first or last lift points.Use three lift points for a roof up to "AC"before or after it,then W 48 feet long(excluding overhangs),four lift points for up to 60 feet,and five lift the Alternate Construction points for up to 72 feet. on-site check list supplied with the home must be Lu 2. Remove fasteners.Remove any temporary fasteners connecting the hinged completed and returned to portion of the roof to the vertical king posts. the home manufacturer in a >_ 3. Lift roof.Raise the roof to its intended height.A temporary slight overexten- timely manner. If the AC Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1f9/2009 9.22 AM 36 Complete Multi- S#os_ on fornis to o5HUDNII[Css I- Section Set 1/15/09 sion may be required during lifting. However,take care not to overextend the checklist relates to the roof, roof and damage the hinge.Raise the roof evenly in small increments,keep- then failure to do so may ing it level throughout the entire process to prevent racking.Do not allow roof- require future disassembly ing paper and shingles to get caught in the hinge crease.(Figure 20) of the roof and further in- 4. Secure king posts.Secure the moveable portion of the king post to the spections. ridgebeam by driving two(2)#8x3"wood screws through the beam and into the hinged king post(at Wind Zone 1). Use five(5)#8x3-1/2"screws at Wind Zone II or Ill. (Figure 21 and Figure 22). Figure 20. Typical roof lifting Lifting mechanism arrangement. The final position of the truss is shown on the truss detail included with this manual. Hinged King post Fixed King post Figure 21. Ridge beam to hinged king post fastening T. Truss with angled �� FP,.., .... • King Post ]�Ci•:Q�G Eq�co• C�, % PE19600312 2480"screws at Wind Zone I` • • I. 548x3-1/2"screws at Wind STATE OF 4Z Zone It and 111 ��i90� p I AN?':'•���\� F SS/ONAIEN������� I "" rNllIu1100 r` Jeffrey T.Legault f! 11:25: 1 09 X 11:25:07-05'00' X r_ Figure 22.Altercate ridge a beam to king post fastening m n O i` X 2-0841screws at Wind D Zone 1 548x3-12"screws at Wind Zone II and III 1 , Faclury installed O al I 2x8 it Z Hidpetxam.� I Z 5. Redistribute Insulation.Before closing up the attic space check that the in- sulation has not shifted. Re-level the insulation if needed. r 6. Install gable walls.Assembled frames or wall studs and sheathing needed for the site assembly of the gable end walls may be provided. Install the gable O end walls for each home section as follows Figure 23.End wall completion: z Studs: Install studs 16 inches o.c.with 3-12d nails or 4-15Ga.x7/16"x2- 3 D 1/2"staples,and; C • Sheathing: Install 3/8"min OSB sheathing with 8d nails or 1613a.x 7/16"x 1-1/2"staples 6"o.c. 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 37 Complete F �5 Section SetDeform.to _ HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 King Post Figure 23.End wall comple- tion Wedge Truss Top ,/ ' // C or -Hinge Inspecting vents.Fuel fired heating appliance and fire- / place vents that pass through a hinnari rnnf mi tet Tres be completed and in- spected at the site prior to energizing the appliance or occupying the home.Fail- 7. Install vents.Extend plumbing vents,exhaust fans,appliance vents,and fire- ure to comply with this pre- place stacks through the hinged portion of the roof in strict accordance with caution may result in seri- this manual(Prepare Appliances and Equipment,p.86)and/or supplemen- ous injury or death.Venting tal instructions provided by the home manufacturer. systems must be installed 8. Roof Close-up.A paper spacer has been placed between the two courses of in conformance with the shingles at the hinge to prevent premature sealing of the upper course. Re- appliance manufacturer's move this paper and fasten the upper course in place as shown on the shingle instructions and any in- structions supplied with the installation instructions. Repeat procedure on other half of home. The units home. should now be joined together. The fastening of the ridgebeam halves to- gether as specified in this manual can be accomplished either by reaching down from the roof opening at the ridge or by moving along inside the roof cavity. Care should be taken not to damage the ceiling during this operation. 9. Ridge Assembly. Some models will require the framing of the peak area of the home to be completed on site. Extend peak close off frame from each half until they meet at the mating line. (Figure 24) Fasten each peak frame block to each truss top chord w/3-10d nails. Fasten the peak rails together w/10d nails 8"o.c.or w/#8x3"screws 8"o.c. Attach the roof sheathing at the peak to the blocking w/1513a.x7/16t'x1-1/2"staples or 8d nails 4"o.c.There is not a removable piece of roof decking at the peak(for ridgebeam access with this type of construction. Install roof felt and remaining shingles to complete the peak close-off. \ Figure 24.Ridge Assembly Extend peak sections 1, � ,L�J: to mating line. J Site install roof sheathing at F•at•n pooh rain togemnr / 00Ak(shipped loose) i w110d naik or erax0'xrows 8'oc a , Hinged Uu II Z (typical) • ` • 1 0 •• J Fasten oach block to each o c�- truss w/310d nails(typical) Z STEP 4. CHECK MARRIAGE LINE GASKET Z A continuous, non-porous gasket creating a permanent air barrier must be installed on 0 at least one side of the marriage line;along the floor,end walls and ceiling (and mar- / //I riage lines for any tag units).Skyline Corp.has installed this gasket in the factory. In- spect the gasket and repair any gaps or tears. Checking through-the-rim- 0 ducts.Ensure that through- IL not installed at the factory, install a continuous gasket between the home sections the-rim-duct connections 0 along the floor,end walls,and ceiling(Figure 25). are secure and tight after U For homes with through-the-rim crossover ducts(see Crossover Connections,p.52) the home sections are to- Z inspect and if necessary,repair gaskets around the rim joist duct openings using 3/4- 9ether. inch thick fiberglass duct board or other material acceptable to the manufacturer.En- sure that duct openings are unobstructed. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 38 oet�.ms eo Multi- Section HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Figure 25.Mating Line Gas- Ridge beam ket Mating line gasket(factory installed)at endwalls,Floor mating line and ridge beam bottom flange. Mating line rim joist STEP 5. POSITION ADDITIONAL HOME SECTIONS Follow this procedure to install additional home sections: 1. Remove obstructions.Remove protruding nails and staples or anything else that will keep the home sections from fitting together snugly. If present,cut the temporary ceiling and floor plates at the edges of marriage line openings tak- @Mechanical posi- ing care not to damage ceiling or floor coverings or displace temporary mar- tioning system.For a pier- riage line support posts(these supports and the plates will be removed after set home,a mechanical the home sections have been structurally connected). positioning system(such as 2. Complete crossovers.Before moving the two sections together,complete a roller system)will make any crossover connections that require access from the open marriage line, the process easier and including the attic duct connection(if present)and marriage wall interior elec- safer and be less likely to trical connections(see Connect Crossovers,p.52). damage the home. 3. Position section.Position the section as closely as possible(ideally within six inches)and line up with the previously set section. If using a mechanical ®/ /® positioning system or crane,follow the system manufacturer's instructions or the crane operator's directions. 4. Construct piers.With the outside walls of the home aligned,construct the Sealing gaps.Prior to com- piers for the home section according to the instructions in Set the Home(p. pletion of the exterior close- rn 30)before continuing to the steps below. up,gaps that do not exceed one inch are permitted be- r 5. Level section.Lower the section onto the outside piers first, inside piers last. tween structural elements z Before releasing the mechanical positioning system,check interior doorways provided that the gaps are m and other openings for misalignments that may cause problems during trim- closed before completion of 0 out.The floors should be flush, level,and tight and the roof section should close-up,the home sec- O have little,if any,gap at the top of the marriage line.Use at least two come-a- tions are in contact with v longs to pull the sections snugly together and use the water level or other lev- O each other,and the mar- eling device to set all piers and shims. riage gasket provides a D 6. Shim gaps.Shim any gaps up to one inch between structural elements with proper seal. dimensional lumber. If any gaps exceed one inch,re-position the home to O z eliminate such gaps. Z cn STEP 6. CONNECT FLOORS y Make floor structural connections according to one of the methods described below. r r Method 1: Install fasteners through rim joists With the home aligned at the floor and supported by its foundation,join the floors as O shown in Figure 26 using the fastener type,size,and spacing indicated on Z 9 Table 13. A gap of 1"is allowable. Gaps larger than'/z'must be filled with plywood or lumber shims. Z D r 119/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 39 Complete Multi- Section Set PFM5 I to HWMHCSS 11111111111119 TABLE 13.FLOOR CONNECTION FASTENING SPECIFICATIONS Fastener Spacing Type Size Wind Zon Wind Zone 11 Wind Zone III Lag screw with 3/6"x 3"' 24-36 in. 24-36 in. 24-36 in. washer 'increase fastener iengths by 3 inches for aoubie rim joists. I Marriage Figure 26.Floor connection Line Floor Fastener Decking Rin Joists Along Marriage Marriage Line Line Gasket Fastener Staggered At Next Spacing Interval Install additional fasteners as indicated below, making sure to repair any openings in the bottom board with tape specially made for that purpose(may be provided). • Install two additional fasteners at each end of the home at approximately a 45 degree angle(+/-5 degrees)from horizontal. Patch bottom • If the home has a through-the-rim crossover duct,install one additional fas- board.Use adhesive tener at each side of the duct opening. spray, mastic,and/or diver- gent staples in combination • After installation of fasteners,repair tears or holes in the bottom board using with bottom board tape for tape specially made for that purpose. a more secure and durable connection. J Q Z Q Z _O i-- Q J J Q f— _Z Z _O Q W O a W O U ua Z J Y V) 40 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM ooro�m. Multi- Section HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 STEP 7. CONNECT ROOF If the marriage line along the roof is not snug, position jacks every 20 feet or less along the outside I-beam and uniformly lift the section until the roof area is tight. Check to make sure the ceiling joint is flush before installing the connections.If not, Closing the roof gap.Level use a jack and tee to raise whichever ceiling is low,starting at the front and working to and fasten the marriage the rear of the home. Fasten the roof along the marriage line using one of the methods line joint at the floor before below for either double or triple-section homes. jacking to tighten a roof gap. DO NOT use roof fas- DOUBLE-SECTION HOMES teners to close any gaps. Make roof structural connections in double-section homes according to the method de- Separation of the ridge scribed below. beams and trusses may Install fasteners through ridge beam occur. To obtain access into the ceiling cavity,fold back the underlayment paper and remove the 16"wide sheathing panel(s)at the peak. The beam halves may be bolted or lag screwed together. Install bolts or lag screws at 24"o.c.with 6 additional bolts/lags over interior beam supports.(Figure 27). Predrill'/."piliot holes for lag screws at 1-1/2" down from the top of the beam and with a maximum offset from horizontal of 45 de- grees. Use fastener sizes as specified in Table 14.Stagger fasteners on each side of marriage line.Spacing indicated is on-center,both sides of ridge. NOTE:(1)When beam support consists of column instead of Centerline bearing wall,use 6 bol[sllags at 3"o.c.each side of column. Figure 27.Ridge beam fas- Lenin (2)Beam marked with paint at column locations. g 1 2*�L 24" * 24' t 2,r .{e 21 l I�� 24 24' Roof Ridge Beam l Endwall Hall bearing wall TABLE 14.ROOF CONNECTIONS SPECIFICATIONS SpacingFastener . Zone Bolts with washers both 3/8"x 4-1/2" 24 in. 24 in. 24 in. sides Lag screws with washers 318"x 5" 24 in. 24 in. 24 in. X r z m 0 O O X D O z z n r r n O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. I 41 Complete #0tD 5tonfomo Section Set CS S� HDMH 1/15/09 In Wind Zones II and III an optional metal cap or straps may be installed as follows: Caps V ' /, • Select metal caps made of minimum 8"x 30 ga galvanized steel or 0.019" aluminum. Installing lags. If lags are • Install caps continuously,overlapping by minimum of four inches at splices. used to connect roofs,usepilot holes and use appro- • Fasten caps with 1"x 1"x 16 ga galvanized staples or 12 ga 1-1/4"long x 3/8" priately sized washers. diameter head roof nails or#8 x 1-1/4"sheet metal screws at two inches o.c. When to use metal straps. both sides of ridoe. _ 11 G ttdge VCr IL will be III- Straps stalled,use straps instead • Select metal straps made of minimum 1-1/2"wide x 26 ga galvanized steel or of a continuous cap. 0.019"aluminum. • Space straps a minimum of 96 inches o.c.for Wind Zone II and a minimum 80 inches o.c.for Wind Zone III. TRIPLE-SECTION HOMES For triple-section homes where roof lines run parallel to each other on adjacent units (Figure 29),follow the instructions in the appropriate method below to complete the connections at the roof. Method 1:Install fasteners through pre-installed sheathing For homes where sheathing is in place on both sides of the marriage line(Figure 28) install fasteners from the low side of the roof on an angle so as to penetrate roof beams on both sides of marriage line, using the fastener specifications and spacings indicated on Table 15. Center Section Outer Section Figure 28.Triple-section roof connection Method 1 Factory-Installed Underlayment Factory-Installed J Shingles Q See Skyline Corporation M —Field-installed Manufactured Home Adden- d Shingles dum for Triplewide homes for additional information. Z Shingles 0 Asphalt Roofing Cement Betwee � 13c,v�eEn Layersd Q Underlayment Min 6"Wide J � J a Z Z 0 P Q 0 IL 0 Metal(Optional) Fastener U LU Z J Y to 42 Skyline Corporation (4--18 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 5 Complete F #0 i Multi- Section oaforms to HUD MHCSS 1r15r09 Figure 29.Triple-section Marnt ge Lne home Ridge Line Mordogo Line i L— Plan Gloanan TABLE 15.ROOF CONNECTION SPECIFICATIONS Fastener I Spacing Type —T—si-e I Wind Zone I I Wind Zone 11 Wind Zone III Lag screw 3/8"x 4-1/2" 24in. 24in. 24in. Bolts 3/8"x 5' 24in. 24in. 24in. Method 2:Install fasteners with ship loose sheathing For homes where sheathing is shipped loose to be installed on site(Figure 30)fasten field-installed sheathing to all underlying blocking and framing with 15 ga 7/16"x 1-1/2" staples at four inches o.c.in field and perimeter. Field installed shingles Figure 30.Triple-section roof Field installed sheathing connection Method 2 f Field installed underlayment / Asphalt roofing cement hwlween layers l of underlayment(min 6"wide) r Factory installed shingles � 1 Factory installed underlayment Factory,installed sheathing X r STEP 8. CONNECT WALLS m Once the home is secured along the marriage line floor and roof,secure end walls, in- 0 tenor doorways,and marriage line partitions according to the appropriate method de- 0 scribed below. '13 O END WALLS Install toed fasteners through sheathing Toe fasteners through sheathing from the exterior at an approximately 45 degree angle Z 5 degrees)(Figure 31)according to the fastener specifications and spacing re- _ quirements in Table 16. z va D r r D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 43 Complete Multi- F ,1050 Section 'onforl"toIIUD MHCSs 1/15/09 Gasket Figure 31.End wall connec- Walt i tion toed through sheathing Exterior or ExUndorlai Ir/ Fastener TABLE 16.END WALL FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS Fastener .- Lag screw with washer 5/16"x 5" 12in.o.c. Wood screw #a x 3" Bin.o.c. Nail 16d bin.o.c. MARRIAGE WALL COLUMNS,OPENINGS AND INTERIOR PARTITIONS Make connections inside the home along the marriage walls(Figure 32 and Figure 33) by installing fasteners according to the specifications and spacing requirements in Table 17.Toe screw 2 x 4 or 2 x 6 studs;through-screw 2 x 3 studs. Inwi-wall Figure 32.Marriage wall Marriage Walls Marriage W W. alls connections Plart Sher III WN Covering W I I hars Occurs III Applied At 2 III II. Mauulaulwiuy III III II I(I Facility Fastercn III I I III:<, III I : - III II MOMI� III !I' Door i'' 'I Ilf•,. II II � II 111 � 11I z nteners Optional:Field Applied Gyp Board 0 Not Less Than 24'Nor Larger Than 480.Fasten Per Notes F05e"ers Figure 33.Marriage line col- ® umn connections � Marriage Une Q W 4- V Z Supprn!Ports V) 44 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM • • Multi- Section #00 TABLE 17.MARRIAGE WALL CONNECTION SPECIFICATIONS Q7HUD rm•to SpacingFastener type Size HCSS 1/15/09 Wood screw #8 x 4' 16 in.o.c. Do additional sections (non tag) remain to be positioned? •• to STEP 1. INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE GROUND • - • 00, • continue below. Is there a tag unit? .• to • 00, • continue below. hingedIs there a roof? 1110- YES, •• to STEP 3. COMPLETE • • • • • •• to • STEP 9. ATTACH TAG UNITS After the main unit has been set on its foundation, install all tag units according to the following procedure: / / 4 1. Position and block the tag.Position the tag unit as close to the main unit as Piers under tag units. possible at its intended location. Use a hitch jack to obtain approximate level- Some tag units have spe- ing and install pier supports according to Set the Home,STEP 2.POSITION cial piering needs due to HOME SECTION(p.30).Determine whether the tag and main unit floors are the roof and/or floor con- designed to line up flush or are offset by a step and adjust the tag pier heights struction.These will be de- accordingly. tailed in supplemental pier- 2. Level the unit.Using a water level(p.34),verify that the piers are level.The ing plans supplied with the elevation of all points along the lower flange of the I-beam should be no more home. Note that tag unit than 3/8 inches from the desired height and should not deviate more than 3/4 end walls are typically load inches overall. bearing rather than side 3. Connect floors.If the floor of the tag unit is level with main unit floor,connect walls. the floors together as described in STEP 5.CONNECT FLOORS(p.39). Connect walls.Secure the tag unit walls to the main unit sidewall using#8 x 4"screws at 12 inches o.c. (see Figure 34).The sheathing shown in the detail cn may not be included by the manufacturer. If included,the sheathing over the X last stud bay was tacked in place at the factory for easy removal at the site. r< Once the wall connections are complete,re-install the sheathing and complete the siding installation. M O Sidmali Studs Figure 34. Tag unit wall X (Main UM) Fa.IR.. g g Sh-thng connection O (F)old Inalated) Wall studs A (Tag Unit) O Z Z ul D Main lk• r r O E:Ion• Z sldlq Tag Unt > Z 4. Connect roofs.Connect the tag unit roof to the main unit roof using#10 x 5" c screws or 3/8"x 6"lag screws,toe screwed at each main unit vertical struc- r- tural member(stud or truss)location.See Figure 35 for flush roof connections 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 45 Complete FS#05 SectionED :informs to HUD MHCSS 1/15109 -- and Figure 36 for roof connections with an offset greater than two inches. Roof connections with an offset less than two inches do not require screws. Nnp°Irsta1nhhFzt- Figure 35. Taq unit flush roof l Fhehhg Rat SMngba Ova JoM connection - Inrr Fastens F.- Figure 36. Tag unit onset Rmf Oedchg roof connection Man Link Tag Ut Man 1}il Melal FbshFg ~ (a Top Cmnse � &Mryl Siding) Raul IN&bg J III Fastens y STEP 10. REMOVE TEMPORARY ITEMS Once the home is property supported and the marriage line connections are completed, remove the temporary ridge beam supports and wall/ceiling plates used to brace the ridge beam during shipment.Take care not to damage the ceiling. Remove and store or properly dispose of or recycle the hitch,axles,and wheels.These items are the property of the homeowner unless other contractual arrangements have been made. Is the home supported on a load-bearing perimeter wall? .. to STEP 11. FASTEN HOMETO FOUNDATION, • . 00, • .• to • STEP 11. FASTEN HOME TO FOUNDATION Fasten the home to the foundation (typically to the sill plate)according to the fastening schedule provided by the manufacturer. J When to backfill.Backfill QIs the home supported on a basement foundation? against basement walls z only after the home is con- No- • to STEP 12. BACKFILL AND GRADE, ' ' • nected to the foundation or z 00, NO, .• to Complete Roof • the basement walls may O_ deflect inward or collapse. ~ Cutting the chassis.Do not STEP 12. BACKFILL AND GRADE cut,notch, bend,or alter in QBackfill against the foundation wall to the height of the waterproofing,taking care to not any manner beams,cross- damage the drainage system. members,and other parts Z Grade the site as described in Prepare the Site,STEP 3.CLEAR AND GRADE THE of the steel chassis. 0 SITE(p.14). H STEP 13. BUILD STAIRS O Construct the basement stairs in compliance with the local building code.Take care a- that adequate headroom is maintained under beams and that there is sufficient landing pspace at the bottom of the stairs. U z go to Complete Roof and Exterior Walls (p. 47). LU Y Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9.-22 AM 46 F . Complete Roof and onforn,s toExterior Itl'U)111(titi 1/15/09 Complete Roof and Exterior Walls This chapter covers closing up and weatherproofing the home by completing the roofing and siding. StepsFollow the below: STEP 1.COMPLETE ROOF(p.47) STEP 2.COMPLETE TAG UNIT ROOF(p.49) STEP 3.COMPLETE SIDE WALLS(p.49) STEP 1. COMPLETE ROOF RIDGE CLOSEUP For multi-section homes,the first step in completing the exterior is sealing the roof along the ridge line(Figure 37).For homes with asphalt shingles,follow the procedure below. For homes with metal or other roofing materials,follow the instructions that come with the roofing materials or provided as a supplement to this manual. U�d,,wyrncrl Figure 37.Shingle installa- / ` Mel twna Zane tion at ridge / \ Y83 Factory Installed Shingleses / / ' /, ` Factory Installed Weatherproofing.It is vitally \Inglas w,darlaYmrxu important to close up the home quickly to protect the RooF Deck interior from damage due to inclement weather. 1. Install underlayment(when sheathing at the ridge is installed on site).Make Removing shipping protec- sure the roof sheathing is already installed(see Complete Multi-Section Set, tion.Remove shipping pro- STEP 6.CONNECT ROOF, p.39).Install 15#felt or equivalent continuously tection from the roof prior to along the length of the ridge, covering all exposed sheathing and overlapping completing roofing. sheathing joints by at least five inches on each side. Fasten using 1"x 1"x 16 A ga galvanized staples. For Wind Zones II and III,also apply a six inch wide r strip of roofing cement along each side of ridge under the underlayment. z 2. Install shingles.If shingles have been left off at the ridge line for site installa- m tion,install them now using 1"x 1"x 16 ga galvanized staples or 12ga 1-1/4" p long,3/8"diameter head roof nails.For Wind Zone I,fasten at 5/8 inch above each tab cutout slot and one at each end of the shingle one inch in from the 0 edge(four fasteners for a three-tab shingle)(Figure 38). For Wind Zones II and III,use two fasteners 5/8 inch above and on either side of the tab slots and one at each end of the shingle one inch in from the edge(six fasteners for 0 a three-tab shingle).Do not fasten through the shingle tar line. Z I- a6 Shingle — 3WShingle - — Figure 38.Shingle fastener ((n ` - locations for Wind Zone 1 '� i (left)and Wind Zones 11 and 171 12 Ill ri ht D it =� %Fastener Lo®dons Z 3. Install underlayment.Install 15#felt or equivalent underlayment that is at D least 10 inches wide continuously along the ridge. Fasten with 1"x 1"x 16 ga Z galvanized staples. For Wind Zones II and III,also apply a six inch wide strip n r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 47 Complete Roof #05- A • ExteriorWalls, deforms to HUD MHCSS 1/1S/09 of roofing cement on both sides of the ridge under the underlayment. 4. Install shingle cap.Starting at the opposite end of the home from the prevail- ing wind,install ridge cap shingles provided by the manufacturer or use 12"x • 12"shingles(36"shingles cut into three equal pieces)(Figure 39).Install us- Installing a ridge vent.If a ing 1"x 1"x 16 ga galvanized staples or 12 ga 1-1/4"long,3/8"diameter head ridge vent is to be installed, roofing nails spaced 5-5/8 inches from bottom edge and 1/2 inch to 1-1/2 follow the ridge vent manu- inches in from both edges.Cover the exposed fasteners with tar or cement. facturer's instructions pro- vided with the material or as an addendum to this _I:_1:_.. _L.._J�..1�.. I I1CMUG1 111 IICU UI UIIUCI IGy— ment over ridge line and shingle cap. Cut shingle into three pieces Figure 39.Shingle cut into as sho.v by dnBed line thirds 1 d 1 2 3 HINGE ROOF CLOSE-UP For homes with hinged roofs,complete roofing underlayment and shingles along the hinge line(Figure 40)as follows: 1. Install underlayment.Attach the underlayment to the roof deck with a mini- mum of six-inch wide strip of cement.If necessary,trim the underlayment to allow the lowest shingle above the hinge of the roof to seal to the topmost shingle on the lower portion of the roof. Figure 40.Shingle installa- tion at hinge line Site Install Shingles In Hinged Area Per The Instructions On The Shingle Package Shipped Loose With The Home. �1SSO, R After Roof Is In The Raised Position, Trim The Shingle UnderlaymentTo i Installing metal Allow The Shingle Of The Upper / flashing.Install optional Roof Section To Seal Onto The Last metal flashing over the roof Shingle Of The Lower Roof Section. decking before applying _J HMO roofing cement. Fold back kCA —_� the underlayment and fas- G / ��j10`� ten 30 ga x 6"wide mini- Asphalt Roofing ~~ mum galvanized metal with underlayment — roofing or nails 16 ga x 1" Z Between Layers of r Q UnderlaymentMinumum crown staples of sufficient Q6"Wide length to penetrate the roof 2. Install shingles. Install missing shingles according to the shingle manufac- sheathing.Space fasteners Qturer's instructions. four inches o.c.or less near the edge of the metal. z Overlap the metal by at COMPLETE TRIPLE-SECTION ROOFS Complete roofing along triple-section home marriage lines according to one of the fol- least two inches at joints. ® lowing methods based on the construction of the home. QMethod 1:Dual ridge beams W 1. Install underlayment.Fold down the underlayment of the outer section roof aand apply a minimum six-inch wide strip of roofing cement to the sheathing. W Lay the underlayment of the center section on top of the cement(see Best O Practice tip for optional metal flashing).Fold down the center section roof un- Lu w deriayment on this cement. z 2. Install shingles. Install missing row(s)of shingles,securing them per the _ shingle manufacturer's installation instructions(refer to the shingle wrapper). Y rn Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 48 Complete Roof and F S Exterior Conforms to HUD MHCSS Canlar Seclm Outer Ser.9m 1/15/09 Figure 41. Triple-section roof connection Method f Factory-Installed Underlaymerd Factory-Installed Shingles See Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Adden- hingles saalled S dum for Triplewide homes for Shingle additional information. Shingles Asphaltg Roofin Cerrterd Between en Layers of Underlayment Min T Wlde C Metal(Optional) Fastener Method 2:Field-installed sheathing 1. Install underlayment.Fold down the underlayment of the outer section roof and fold up the underlayment on the center section roof.Apply to the lower roof underlayment a minimum six-inch wide strip of roofing cement centered on the sheathing joint.Cover with the shipped loose underlayment.Apply an- other minimum six-inch wide strip of roofing cement to the ship loose under- layment centered on the upper roof sheathing joint. 2. Install shingles.Install missing row(s)of shingles per the shingle manufac- turer's installation instructions(refer to the shingle wrapper). Field Installed shingles Figure 42. Triple-section Field installed sheathing roof connection Method 2 Field installed underlayment Asphalt roofing cement bwtween layers / of underlayment(min T wide) i 1 Fa}ctoly installed shingles � i X Factory installed underlayment Z 1711 0 O X Factory installed sheathing O O Z Z to D r r STEP 2. COMPLETE TAG UNIT ROOF If the home has a tag unit,complete roofing for this unit now.The process for complet- ing the roof is different for flush and offset roofs.Follow the instructions in the appropri- z ate section below. D Z FLUSH ROOFS C For flush roofs,complete roofing along the marriage line and at the valley line as fol- lows(see Figure 43): 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 49 Complete Roof Fs#05 And Exterior Walls VOOO 'onforma to 11UD N1HCSS 1/15/09 Nrgb underhyment Figure 43. Tag unit flush Instal Fhshhg Fit roof connection Over Joid Fastener See Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Adden- Tag lht Main lht dum for Triplewide homes for additional information Marriage line Method 1: Install metal flashing(minimum 30 ga x minimum 6"wide)over the joint between the main roof dormer and tag unit roof.Secure the flashing to the roof decks on both dormer and tag unit roofs with roofing nails or 16 ga staples with a one inch crown and long enough to fully penetrate the roof decks. Space fasteners maximum two inches o.c. near the edge of the flashing.Overlap seams in the metal by at least two inches.After flashing is complete, install shingles per shingle manufacturer instructions and ridge cap/vent according to STEP 1.COMPLETE ROOF(p.47). Method 2: Install two layers of roofing underlayment or equivalent over the joint between the main roof dormer and tag unit roof lapping the factory installed under- layment a minimum of six inches on each side and fully cemented at the laps. In- stall shingles per shingle manufacturer instructions and ridge cap/vent according to STEP 1.COMPLETE ROOF(p.47). Valley line Along the bottom of the valley,shingles and one or more layers of roll roofing may need to be installed. If fastened to the roof at the factory, unroll the roofing,overlap the tag roof and trim the roofing to the roof edge. If shipped loose, install the roll roofing at the valley,lapping it under the factory installed roll roofing a minimum of 12 inches and fully cement the roofing at the lap.Complete shingles at the valley either by interweav- _J ing them or by trimming back approximately four inches from the valley line and fully cementing the exposed shingle edges. < OFFSET ROOFS E If there is a gap between the main unit dormer overhang and the tag unit roof of less z than two inches,fold up the main unit dormer fascia,slide the underlayment and flash- 0 ing from the tag unit roof behind the fascia,and bend the fascia back down and secure Qinto sub-fascia with metal screws(Figure 44). J J Q H f/d Z Z O 1= Q 0 a 0 U W Z J } Y <n Skyline Cui poi ation (4 48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 50 #r , Complete Roof and W45 , Exterior Walls C'onformc to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Main Unit Roof (Shinto.Not Figure 44. Tag unit roofing Factory4ntallad Flashing Shown on Main connection with less than Underla Unit for Clarity) —Drip Edge ymen[Carried Up Into Donner SutrFasda Fascia two inch height difference Fascia Main Unit Dorms Fashing rot Flashing Shingles SNirgW Undnda}+tron! K—UfWarlboymnam — Distance Between Main Unit Dormer and Tag Unit Roof May U roerlayment Qver Ro1ed Vary(<"1 ")xt.}"to Max oft RoaringCarried Upkdo TR oag Unit d Dormer SuMFascia M in.3" Tag Unit Truss Main Unit Dormer Truss If the gap between the main unit dormer overhang and the tag unit roof is two inches or more,bend up the inside corner trim at the dormer overhang and main unit sidewall, fold up the factory installed flashing on the tag unit roof,fold the inside comer trim back down,and secure into dormer wall with metal screws(Figure 45) Figure 45. Tag unit offset - _ Shi^glos roof connection 1 Metal JIt Fascia Roof Decking Main Un't Srangkcs Metal Fk3shhg (a Tap Co�3r- rse of Vinyl Sieckitg Tag Unit Fastener LH r z STEP 3. COMPLETE SIDE WALLS m Siding necessary to complete the exterior has been provided with the home.Follow the n siding manufacturer's instructions(found on or with the packaging or as an addendum to this manual)and to complete the exterior siding as follows: Covering the HUD label.Do 0 1. Remove shipping protection.Remove temporary shipping protection from not cover the HUD label on D walls. the exterior of the home. --i 2. Complete crossovers.Complete any crossover connections in the walls, in- Removing shipping protec- z cluding:electrical,stereo speaker,doorbell,telephone,and intercom wires. tion.Remove temporary z 3. Install siding.Fasten siding only at stud locations,avoiding electrical wires shipping protection from that are present in the walls. walls before installing sid- n ing or serious moisture r 4. Install close-up of strips.If siding has been installed on the end walls at the damage may result. r factory,fasten close-up strips securely along both edges and seal the edges > with a waterproof sealant. 0 5. Install trim. Install any matching trim required to complete the installation. Z 6. Seal penetrations.With a waterproof sealant,seal any penetrations in the y siding that may have been caused by temporary shipping protection. C 110- n .• to • r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 51 Connect PFS4j #®5 Crossovers 'onforma to HIUD MHCSS Connect Crossovers 1/15/09 This chapter covers crossover connections between units of multi-section homes,including ducts and electrical,water, waste,gas,telephone,and cable TV connections. Follow the Steps below: STEP 1.CONNECT DUCTS(p.52) ♦ STEP 2.CONNECT ELECTRICAL CROSSOVERS(p.56) 'F STEP 3.INSTALL ELECTRICAL BONDING(p.58) STEP 4.CONNECT WATER LINES(p.59) V STEP 5.CONNECT DRAIN,WASTE,AND VENT LINES(p.60) tr STEP 6.CONNECT GAS LINES(p.61) STEP 7.CONNECT TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV WIRING(p.62) STEP 1. CONNECT DUCTS There are three main types of duct crossover connections. Based on the location of the duct,follow the installation steps on the page indicated below: • Under the floor(p.52). Qualified personnel.Use • In the roof cavity(p.54). only qualified personnel to • In floor,through-the-rim joist(p.54) make crossover connec- tions.Consult the LAHJ for To prevent air leakage,seal all ductwork connections, including duct collars using one licensing or any additional or more of the following materials: crossover connection re- Galvanized metal straps in combination with galvanized sheet metal screws. cues for s Access for service.When- For Fnr rigid air darts and connectors,tape and mastics listed to UL 181A. ever possible maintain ac- Q • For flexible air ducts and connectors,tape and mastics listed to UL 181 B. cess to connection areas z UNDER FLOOR FLEXIBLE CROSSOVER DUCT for future maintenance. 0 Make tight connections. F When heating or cooling equipment is installed in the home,the flexible crossover duct is provided by the manufacturer. In all cases the crossover duct must be listed for exte- Permanent,durable,and nor use. tight crossover duct con- nections are critical to the f— There are four common configurations of under floor crossover ducts depending on the proper performance of the U) number of home sections and the furnace/air handier location.See Table 18 to locate home.Leaky ducts can re- z the appropriate figure. suit in severe moisture 0 problems in the home,dis- TABLE 18.UNDER FLOOR DUCT CONFIGURATIONS comfort from rooms not re- W Furnace location Two home - Three home sections ceiving the proper amount aFurnace over trunk duct See Figure 46 See Figure 48 of conditioned air,and high a utility bills from wasted 0 Furnace offset from trunk duct See Figure 47 See Figure 49 heating and/or cooling en- U ergy. w z J Y G'9 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 52 WConnect Crossovers 1/15/09 Furnace I Air Figure 46.Furnace over A section Handler B Section trunk duct two home sec- lil tions Floor Heat Dud Tap-Out Collar I•_<Dud Field-Installed Flex Support Straps Duct Furnace/Air Figure 47.Furnace offset A Section Handler B section from trunk duct, two home sections Floor Heat Du Tap-Out Collar Field-Installed FlexDUd Flex Duct Support Straps "1/"-Box Under Fumace Furnace l Air Figure 48.Furnace over Li Handler trunk duct, three home sec- A Section — ® B Section C Section tions Floor Heal Du Tap-Out Cdkx Field-Installed Flex Dud 'V Box Under Furnace 'k x Dud Support Straps A Section Furnace/Air B Section C Section Figure 49.Furnace offset Li LU Handler i LU Llfrom trunk duct, three home sections Hear Dua Tap Cut Colar Field-Insaled Flex Dud Y-Boc Under Furnace lexDuctSupportShaps For under floor flexible crossover ducts follow the steps below: 1. Locate collars.Locate the metal crossover collars(or V-box)connected to the main trunk duct(or furnace)under the home and remove temporary ship- ping protection. to Securing the T 2. Install inner duct.Slide the crossover duct inner liner over the crossover col- crossover.Between Step � larN-box as far as it will go.Temporarily fasten the inner liner in place with 5 and Step 6,drill three or Z duct tape. Install a large nylon zip-tie over the inner liner just above the"ridge" more 1/16 inch holes an m around the crossover collarN-box.Apply mastic completely over inner liner equal distance around and n and collarN-box(alternately,the mastic may be applied to the collarN-box 0 just below the bottom edge � prior to sliding the duct inner liner over it). of the nylon zip-tie. Install 3. Connect duct insulation.Bring the duct insulation up over the zip-tie and #12 pan head screws in 0 above the home's bottom board into the floor cavity.Temporarily duct tape it these holes,through the against the base of the trunk duct/V-box. flexible duct and into the 4. Pull duct wrap.Pull the crossover duct outer wrap over the top of the insula- metal crossover collarN- Z tion and temporarily secure it to the trunk duct/V-box with duct tape. box.The screw heads Z 5. Install zip-tie.Feel for the nylon zip-tie that was installed over the inner liner. should be against the zip- tie. Place another nylon zip-tie just under the first one to permanently secure the > crossover duct insulation and outer wrap. r­ 6. Trim duct.Trim the crossover duct to length such that the installed duct will i /, D be straight with no kinks or unnecessary bends. ' p 7. Connect other end.Follow the same procedure(steps 1 through 5)to con- Cover exposed metal. Z nect the opposite end of the crossover duct and any other crossover ducts. Completely cover all ex- y 8. Seal joints.Seal the joints between the bottom board and the crossover duct posed metal connectors c with foam or mastic. with insulation.Apply seal- D 9. Support duct.Support the crossover duct(s)above the ground using nylon or ants and tapes only to sur- (— galvanized metal straps and saddles spaced every 48 inches o.c.or less. faces that are dry and free 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 53 Connect Crossovers to 7no 5 HCSS 1/15/09 Choose straps at least 1/2 inch wider than the spacing of the metal spirals en- of dust,dirt,and grease. casing the crossover duct.Install the straps so they cannot slip between spi- Avoid ground contact. In- rals.Secure metal straps with galvanized screws. stalled crossover ducts ROOF CAVITY CROSSOVER DUCT must not be in contact with For ducts installed in the roof cavity,follow the steps below: the ground. 1. Access duct.Access the crossover location through an access panel in the Unobstructed airflow.Ex- roof and remove any temporary shipping protection. cess length, kinks and bends in the crossover duct 2. Join ducts.Using the provided flexible duct,join the distribution boxes in will restrict airflow and de- each section of the home as shown in Figure 50,cutting off any extra duct grade the home's HVAC length to keep the duct as straight as possible.The duct is connected to one system performance. side of the home. 3. Fasten ducts.At each connection point between ducts and between ducts and distribution boxes or connectors,secure the inner duct liner with a nylon strap,apply mastic completely over the connection area, pull the duct insula- tion and outer liner over the connection area,and secure them with a second nylon strap. 4. Reinstall panel.Reinstall and secure the access panel. Figure 50.Duct crossover Oist&wbnan. On 6A so, located in the roof cavity f IN THE FLOOR CROSSOVER DUCT Where one or more crossover ducts are built into the home's floor system,connect them either through(note openings in rim joists)or under(note access panels in bot- tom board)the rim joist depending on the design of the home. Additional marriage line support.If the duct runs Method 1: Flex duct through rim joist through the marriage line Connect flex ducts that pass through the rim joist(Figure 51)as follows: rim joist,a perimeter pier is 1. Access duct. From underneath the home,cut through the bottom board and required under the mar- part the floor insulation to access the duct. riage wall at the crossover 2. Extend duct.Extend the flex duct from the side of the home with the furnace location unless otherwise through the rim joist opening and connect it to the opposing duct using the noted on the manufac- Q provided splicing collar. turer's blocking plan or other supplemental docu- D 3. Connect duct.Connect the ducts using the procedure for joining under floor ments,or unless the borne Q flexible crossover ducts(p.52). is constructed with a peri- 2 4. Seal bottom board.Move the floor insulation back to its original location and meter support system. z seal the bottom board with tape specially made for that purpose(may be pro- 0 vided). Figure 51. In-floor duct with Marriage Line Splicing Collar d flex duct connection though the rim joist(shown with peri- Z Rim Joist looring Decking _Z meter frame system) c-�T�-cam-cam c-�-cam-c -r O 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I I ! 1 1 I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 1 Q 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 1 iLFlexible Dud Beam O Bottom Board Lu Access Area Z _ _ J Y t� Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 54 Or Connect Crossovers opforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Method 2:Gasketed Type through the rim joist With a through-the-rim joist design,the duct in each floor section terminates at an opening in the marriage line rim joist.Fixed through-the-rim crossovers employing a marriage line gasket such as in Figure 52 were completed in Complete Multi-Section Set,STEP 4.CHECK MARRIAGE LINE GASKET(p.38)and require no additional work here. Figure 52.In-floor duct with gasket between halves. TX14'reclengula:to S(or 07 round adapter Typical each sWe of mating One i Typical ire/nsl/xta/eA/oar loisl 1311E min r WV— duct board gasW WUM l ne dm joist betvteen dni juials Faclay i-1.1lad To Eeolrro neub;e duct U3 SPF W W Not required W M Dual quad or Integral Floor unds Under the rim joist In this configuration,flexible crossover ducts from adjoining sections pass through the floor and dip under the rim joist at the marriage line where they are joined(Figure 53). Pull each pair of ducts through the openings provided in the bottom board,under the marriage line rim joist and connect them using the provided splicing collar and the pro- cedure for joining under floor flexible crossover ducts(p.52)or the duct manufacturer instructions if provided. Figure 53.In-floor duct with Marriage Line Iextae o ucl flex duct crossover under the Rim Joist i foorDacking rim joist InsUaticn rl r .�� n 1 �Bottom { 1 1 1 I I 1 I1 ��� PI Plywood Board / !1 1 1 1 1 1 I I l I t l ` .� i yw RairAactrg Play 0 (Ty p.Each Side) Spitting Collar � Strap 0 z z cn n r r n 0 z 3 D z C D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 55 Connect #05 Crossovers 00 unforlm to I 00 — —HUD MHMS 1/15/09 STEP 2. CONNECT ELECTRICAL CROSSOVERS Multi-section homes may have one or more electrical crossovers located in the wall(s) and/or floor(s)along the marriage line(s). / /, JOINING WIRES Use qualified electricians. Two types of connections may be present at these locations—snap connectors and All electrical work must be junction boxes. Identify matching circuits if multiple circuits exist at a single crossover performed by a qualified location.These will be coded for identification.Connect snap connectors according to electrician and comply with the connector manufacturer's inctollatinn inctrnrtinnc inclnriinn fac}ener ramiirementc the 2005 NEC. Connect wires in junction boxes as follows(Figure 54): Disconnect power.Turn off power to the home before Pull wires.Pull circuit wires into the junction box,sliding them through a romex con- making connections. nector and secure snugly.(Figure 54)Do not over-tighten. Proper use of GFCI cir- 1. Strip wires.Remove the outer jacket that holds the circuit wires together pro- cuits.Ensure Ground Fault viding a minimum of four inches of free wire in the box. Circuit Interrupted(GFCI) 2. Connect wires.Connect wires together matching like colors,using appropri- circuits are connected to ately sized wire nuts.Use the ground wire to ground the junction box and/or the proper GFCI protected cover plate(s), if metal.Junction boxes may contain single or multiple 15 or circuits from the power 20-amp circuits,or a single 240-volt appliance circuit. supply. 3. Replace cover.Reposition the junction box cover and secure using machine (not sheet metal)screws. Figure 54. Types of junction box wiring connections A ppruyed C"e t— Connalos Approved('.o nnecbis I _ WLib "—Wlti ..Whp L,k *Ground ed Anv�rc d F 1.fic — bzbl Box Bbr" Qypoiworound Oro B _ WN" vx] Hte '�murd lark m �r_Unr,c PerType Mck 4Bnx Used(typical) ,..�n�1 W g tdetel Boxes Orly) ourd Lug tuletal Boxes Only) n un d Lug teletel Boxes Orly) Single 15 or 20 AMP Circut Double 15 or 20 AMP circuits 240V Appliance Circuit FLOOR CROSSOVER When making electrical connection(s)in the floor,use one of the wiring options de- �� Z scribed below: • A 2 Method 1:Access panel Using snap connectors.Do Z 1. Access wires.Find the crossover location(s)and remove the access panel(s) not use oversized nails or 0 if attached. If access panel openings are not provided,cut through bottom drive nail heads into snap Qboard to expose the wiring(Figure 55). connectors. Some connec- J tors are designed for one- 2. Route wires.Pass the wires through predrilled holes or notches in the rim time use only—a new con- joist or if there is a single bumped-out access panel as in Figure 56,then un- nector must be used if they vJ der the rim joists. If holes or notches have not been provided and there is no become separated. Z bumped-out access panel,drill maximum one-inch diameter hole(s)half-way Z up the rim joists on each home section,making sure the holes align and feed Protect cables.Cover all 0 the wire through the hole. cables with conduit or other P suitable weather-resistant < 3. Connect wires.Connect wires via a junction box or snap-connector(s)as de- and protective material. Ix O scribed above. W 4. Secure wires.Secure wires with staples to adjacent joists or studs within Q eight inches of junction box or snap-connector(s). U 5. Install smash plates.For notched perimeter joists,install steel wire protec- Lu Z tors(smash plates). 6. Seal bottom board.Replace insulation and re-install access panels and/or Yseal the bottom board with tape specially made for that purpose(may be pro- tn vided).The access panel(s)may be temporarily installed near the crossover Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 56 #0 Connect Crossovers Conrorros to HUD M11CSS 1/15/09 location or shipped loose with the home. Figure 55.Electrical cross- over floor wires with flush access panels ; ; Rim Joist � r L Junction Box or __FIf Joists Are Notched,Steel Protectors May Snap-Connector Be Provided With the Flome I I I I '---_Amass Panel May lBe Provided Figure 56.Floor electrical crossover wires with bumped-out access panel I J J_ Judo"Box or Srap Cbmeeta PmtectNe Cove (B Nd Pmvidad Patch Bdom Braid.) Method 2:Junction box with conduit 1. Access boxes. If junction boxes are not exposed,access them inside the floor by cutting the bottom board or by removing the access panel(s).Remove the junction box covers. 2. Connect wires. If wire is coiled inside one junction box,insert it into provided flexible conduit and pass it under the rim joists to the opposing box and make the connection as described above. If no coiled wire is provided,install pro- vided ship-loose conduit with wire making connections in both boxes(Figure 57). 3. Cover boxes.Replace and secure covers on junction boxes. 4. Seal floor.Replace any displaced insulation and replace access panel or seal the bottom board with tape specially made for that purpose(may be provided). r Variation to Method 2:Ajunction box may be installed only on one side with the Z other side containing conduit behind an access panel.Bring the conduit to other m side and make one connection in the junction box. n O ads.�r Figure 57. Under the rim joist electrical crossover 0 connection with conduit !� z Junction Box(May Be Under Wire For Crossover Z or Alongside Floor Joist 1a18a Coiled Inside N Junction Box D f hxolo Conduit r r D WALL CROSSOVERS 1 z Connect electrical, phone,cable television,and stereo speaker wires in marriage walls � � � and/or partition and end walls. D Avoid damaging crossover z If access panels into the marriage walls are not provided,then the connection should wires.Carefully fold mar- C have been made prior to bringing the home sections together. If access panels are riage wall crossover wires provided in marriage,end or partition walls,remove the panels,join the wires as so they stay within a single described above using the provided snap-connector,junction box,or at a receptacle, bay and are not sand- 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 57 ConnectF Crossovers to HUD MHCSS 1/15109 and re-attach the access panel(Figure 58 for marriage walls and Figure 59 for wiched between studs partitions and end walls). when the sections are pulled together. Connect Wires Figure 58.Inside marriage at Junction Box, wall crossover connection Receptacle,or r Snap-Connector -� Optional Access Panel L J Figure 59. Inside partition or Endwall Access to Junction Endwal end wall electrical crossover Side'A' Qox-Inside Home Side'B' connection 1=actory4nslaled Wire ProtectorsMarriage Llne STEP 3. INSTALL ELECTRICAL BONDING To ensure all metal parts are effectively grounded,electrically bond all chasses to- gether as follows(Figure 60): 1. Find lugs.Determine if solderless ground lugs are provided on the front or rear frame outriggers or headers. 2. Attach wire.If lugs are provided,uncoil the bonding wire(#8 minimum bare copper wire)from one side of the home and connect it to the lug provided on z the opposing side using the provided paint penetrating star washer,tighten gthe set screw firmly on the wire and repeat for any additional home sections. Z Figure 60.Electrical bonding O r Mardage Line of multi-section homes Q J J Q H Z Z O Rear Outrigge rat #8 Min.Copper Solderless Lug Each Marriage Line Gmund Wire Half of Home a 0 O 3. Attach strap. If ground lugs and copper wire are not provided,attach the pro- vided four-inch bonding strap to each pair of adjacent chasses with two#8 x O 3/4"self-tapping metal screws(one screw each side). U W Z J Y Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 58 PF #°` Connect Confarm%to • • IIUD MIIGSS 1/15/09 STEP 4. CONNECT WATER LINES Connect water lines inside the floor through access panels or below the bottom board as follows: / /� WATER LINES ACCESSED THROUGH PANELS Applying cement.Follow 1. Remove panels.Remove access panels from each home section. cement manufacturers in- structions with respect to 2. Remove caps.Remove shipping caps from ends of water lines. application and drying time. 3. Pull lines.Pull water lines through holes in rim joist. If holes are not provided, Allow cement to fully cure drill round holes in the center of the rim joist,with a maximum diameter of one before filling pipes with wa- third the rim joist depth (Figure 61). ter. 4. Connect pipes.Connect threaded water lines using provided connector fit- tings(do not use lubricants or sealants).Connect non-threaded water lines using provided fittings and cement, inserting pipe to full depth of each fitting(a short connector pipe may be provided to bridge the gap between sections). 5. Test.Test connections for leaks. 6. Seal floor.Securely replace insulation and access panels. "'- - Figure 61. Waterline cross- over with access panels WATER LINES DROPPED BELOW BOTTOM BOARD 1. Remove caps.Remove protective shipping caps from ends of pipes and make sure pipe ends are clean and smooth. 2. Connect pipes.Connect threaded water lines using flexible pipe or a rigid Choosing cement type. connector line(if provided)and connector fittings(do not use lubricants or Use the proper cement for sealants). Connect non-threaded water lines,pipe,and elbows with cement water lines as it may differ provided, inserting pipe to full depth of each fitting(Figure 62). from the cement used for 3. Test.Test connections for leaks. the DWV system. 4. Protect pipes.Wrap water lines with insulation and bottom board shipped loose with home or otherwise protect to prevent freezing.Tape bottom board using tape specially made for that purpose(may be provided)and staple with cn 7/16"x 1/2"staples at four inches o.c.around bottom board using a divergent A (stitch)stapler or equivalent.If heat tape is used it must be listed for manufac- r tured home use and be installed in compliance with manufacturer instructions. 2 ' m Supply Side ~ Marriage Line Figure 62. Waterline cross- 0 (Side With Water Heater) I Receiving side over through bottom board 0 'JJa1 x L nw i- We Lh \ V V V / / 0 Z Direction of Rovw O!k!l 2 cn Cap to Be Pia"dwe Cap D Removed on Site r r D _Water Lila and MUM 0 SUMad Loose to be Z Added on Ste D Z C D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 59 Connect #05 Crossovers Conforms to HUD MIICSS 1115/09 STEP S. CONNECT DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT LINES / t // Complete portions of the drain,waste,and vent(DWV)system that are below the floor Providing required clear- as follows: ances.Provide the drain 1. Remove caps. Remove shipping covers from pipes extending through the outlet with a minimum bottom board;inspect pipes and fittings and clean them of dirt,obstructions, clearance of three inches in and burro. anv direction from all Darts 2. Assemble pipes.Using the drain schematic drawing provided with the home, of the structure or any ap- begin assembling the DWV system starting at the location farthest from the purtenances and with not sewer/septic connection and working towards the outlet,fastening the pipe less than 18 inches unre- with cement or adjustable screw-clamp connectors,if provided(Figure 63). stricted clearance directly in As the system is assembled,support the piping with temporary blockin front of the drain outlet. y pp p p g p ry g'Unless otherwise noted on the schematic diagram,provide a minimum 1/4 Provide any cleanouts with a minimum clearance of 12 inch per foot slope towards the sewer/septic using a plumber's level.Where a inches directly in front its slope of 1/4 inch per foot cannot be maintained,use a minimum slope of 1/8 opening. inch per foot and install of a full-size clean-out at the uppermost point of the run(Figure 64). Cement Cowkv Figure 63.Drain crossover (Provided)to Ed ur Pipes connection lo Support Straps Orakr Pipe l _ FasEn Coiplirg Direction of Row and Sbpe Sup LLL Diection of Flow and Slope (Provided(b Piping Coupling With Clamps Connection Pipe Coupler Figure 64.DWV system ,t� A _J rein Pipe ISani rein rain Dropout Supports Dropout SIo ustCo%W Z u � � �—Long Tum 81 CoverZn-b E Long Turn Tee Wye 0 (Subsitutebrt7bow ,lean•OulPlug ar Turn FJI 9 and ProHde a Full l Size Clean Out When QTo Sewer/Septic Required) 3. Test.Conduct a two-part leakage test on the completed drainage system as Z follows: Z Part 1.With all fixtures connected,and all tub and shower drains plugged, ' / A O fill the system with water to the rim of the toilet bowl through a higher fix- Choosing lues.Use only Qture.Release all trapped air,replace tub and shower plugs,backfill fix- solvents glues com y w tures,and allow the system to stand at least 15 minutes. Check for leaks. patible with the pipe(ABS Drain the system. If leaks are found,repair and retest. LL or PVC). Follow manufac- W Part 2.Plug all fixtures,sinks,showers,and tubs and fill with water.Re- turer's instructions. U lease the water in all fixtures simultaneously to obtain the maximum pos- es sible drain piping flow.As water is draining,check for leaks. If any are Z found,repair and retest. J 4. Connect to outlet.Connect the main drain line to the site sewer/septic hook- up,using an approved elastomer coupling(Figure 65). Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 60 #01 Connect Crossovers onforms to HUU MIICSS in5io9 Figure 65.DWV connection to sewerlseptic MFloor� Examples of Connection Pipe and Fittings(Not Supplied by the w Manufacturer) Support Strap at Maximum of 4 Feet on Center Cap and Chain Approved C ouplcr r Site Sewer Hook Up 5. Install supports.Install permanent drain line supports at a distance of four feet o.c.or less(see Figure 63,Figure 65,and Figure 66). i2)0.131"Diax3;"Neils Figure 66.DWV pipe sup- Min.2x3Lumber poet options 0.131"Diax3 Nai Galy.or Akm.Skip Min. mb 31u 0.1 (2)0.131"Dla x 3 Nails Into Flaor Jdst Protect pipes from freez- N(D,ainplpa 2);x 2"x16GA ing.If the home is to be leftSlaplesa(2) unheated in cold weather, Nails Each Endpour antifreeze solution into all drain traps,including (2)Staplesa sinks,tubs,and toilets.Be Screws Ea I sidesure that the antifreeze is Galy.or Alm strip safe for the fixtures and P- Min.W Lumber traps. Installing quick disconnect fittings.Do not use tools, 6. Insulate.Replace all insulation and make sure all potentially exposed portions lubricants,or sealants with of the DWV system are well insulated to protect against freezing. Cn quick disconnect fittings. Gas test precautions.Do STEP 6. CONNECT GAS LINES not connect to gas service z The gas crossover connection may use quick disconnect fittings or threaded connec- until tests described in m tors. Find the connection location below the floor at the marriage line and gather the Connect Utilities have been n connectors(they may be shipped loose if not present under the home). successfully completed. X a For quick disconnect fittings(Figure 67),remove any dust caps and then with one 0 hand,pull back on the quick disconnect device,snap it over the quick disconnect adap- tor and release it to complete the connection. For threaded connectors(Figure 68),remove the black cap and nipple(or any other z plugs,such as a black iron plug)from both the supply and receiving sides and screw Z the connector onto the supply and return pipes as necessary. Cn Check for leaks before connecting to gas service(see Connect Utilities,STEP 3. n CONNECT GAS SERVICE,p.83). r D O z D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 61 Connect #OS • • Deform•to HUD MHC_SS_ 1/15/09 JFemale aids-0is g Flax Figure 67.Gas crossover Fittlng Flexry Installed snla-0lrvanre with quick disconnect fittings -0isconnea I„k�l san Figure 68, Gas crossover e Fitting ri-Conneto. with threaded connectors Fxtury InmadudCap Cap Female Capri Or i /, installing wiring.When in- Male Cap stalling telephone and ca- 1 Direction of Gas Flow Dkeceon of Gee Flow ble television wires,do not damage electrical wires, STEP 7. CONNECT TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV WIRING plumbing lines, ducts. Serious personal injury or Install telephone and cable television wiring in accordance with the requirements of the death could result from LAHJ,the NEC,and NFPA No.70-2005.When making crossover connections or in- damage to electrical wires. stalling telephone or cable television wires,do not run them in the same raceway as,or in close proximity to,high voltage electrical conductors or cables. Wires should only be installed by trained professionals. .. to • J Q z a z O a J J a H (n _Z z O F- O IL W O U LU z J Y U) 62 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Complete the ® Interior *01* s to 900 HUD MHCSS Complete the Interior 115/09 This chapter covers the completion of the home's interior finishes including finishing walls,ceilings,flooring,trim,and mis- cellaneous items. Follow the S - • below: STEP 1.ALIGN MARRIAGE WALLS(p.63) STEP 2.FINISH GYPSUM BOARD(p.63) STEP 3.COMPLETE WALL AND CEILING FINISHES(p.64) V STEP 4.COMPLETE CARPET(p.64) V STEP S.COMPLETE TRIM(p.64) STEP 6.INSTALL SHIP LOOSE ITEMS(p.64) STEP 1. ALIGN MARRIAGE WALLS Align and secure walls at marriage line openings as follows: 1. Align walls.Align walls and clamp in place. 2. Fasten walls.Secure clamped walls together with metal straps or long screws so they do not move when the clamps are removed. Insert wood wedges in gaps between walls,and glue and screw to create a tight connec- tion. 3. Fill gaps.Fill any remaining gaps with wood or sheathing material. Does the home require patching and finishing gypsum board walls or ceil- 1110- YES, go to STEP 2. FINISH GYPSUM BOARD, (p. 63) 110- • .• to STEP 3. COMPLETE . 64). T� r STEP 2. FINISH GYPSUM BOARD m Finish all unfinished gypsum board walls and ceilings as follows: i // 0 1. Install panels.Install ship loose gypsum panels using a 1/4 inch diameter • ;a bead of adhesive on all framing members and minimum 1-1/2 inch long dry- Fastening gypsum.When p wall screws, nails,or staples at six inches o.c.along panel edges and 12 attaching gypsum board, X inches o.c. in the field into framing members. depress,but do not break > 2. Mud seams.Mud and tape all seams and corners,filling all fastener depres- the paper face with the fas- p sions.Follow mud manufacturer's directions. tener.Breaking the paper z 3. Paint.When the final coat of mud is dry, prime and paint all unfinished gyp- will weaken the connection. z sum board to match existing paint color and finish texture. Using alternative materials. I Obtain the home manufac- D r _ the home have pre-finished _ , wall panels _ turer's approval before us- r- ing interior finish materials > 1110- YES, •• to STEP 3. COMPLETEAND other than those provided p •' with the home. z 00, • •• to STEP 4. COMPLETE • D z C D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 63 Complete the Interior F00 STEP 3. COMPLETE WALL AND CEILING FINISHES Qo MS to Install interior ship loose wall and/or ceiling panels using a 114 inch diameter bead of HUD MHCSS polyvinyl acetate(PVA)adhesive on all framing members and fasten with minimum 1- 1/15/09 1/2 inch long staples or nails at six inches o.c.along panel edges and 12 inches o.c.in the field into framing members. STEP 4. COMPLETE CARPET Install and seam ship loose or rolled carpet as follows: �'4I 1. Prepare floor.Clean the floor of all dirt and debris and smooth the floor deck AW AT AW AW A at the marriage line seams as necessary to ensure a level and smooth sur- Installing carpet.Only ex- face. perienced carpet installers 2. Lay pad.Lay down the carpet pad,if provided. should install carpet. Fail- 3. Stretch carpet.Ensuring all carpet"grain"runs in the same direction,fit and ure to follow the carpet secure the carpet using a power carpet stretcher.Stretch the carpet up to the manufacturer's directions seam and tack it down temporarily until the carpet is seamed. may void the carpet war- 4. Butter carpet."Butter"with carpet adhesive the edges of the carpet along the ranty. seam. 5. Seam carpet.Place heat bond tape under the seam with the glue side next to the carpet and apply heat from a seaming iron to the top of the seam,press- ing the carpet into the glue. Stagger seams. 6. Keep scraps.Retain reasonable size carpet scraps to protect carpet and Stagger all seams.For ex- flooring during move-in. ample,locate the carpet pad seam three inches to STEP 5. COMPLETE TRIM left of marriage line and the Using fine gauge wire staples or pin nails,install ship loose molding and wainscot pan- carpet seam three inches to eling to finish trimming out ceilings,marriage line walls,front and rear end walls,and right of marriage line. passageway doors where necessary. STEP 6. INSTALL SHIP LOOSE ITEMS Remove all strapping,blocking,and packaging from appliances,windows,and doors. Install any drapes,mini-blinds, mirrors,door stops,closet shelves,and hardware per the product manufacturer's installation instructions. Proceed based on . • • type:J . anchor, •. to • 100- Load bearing perimeter wall, go to Connect Utilities (p. 77). Z Q Z O a J J Q H Cn Z Z O a rx O a- m O U W Z J U) 64 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM PF #0S Install Stabilizing 9Conforms toSystems HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Install Stabilizing Systems This chapter covers the design and installation of the stabilizing system which secures the home against lateral and upward forces caused by wind.The system covered here uses earth(or ground)anchors and steel straps connected to the home's longitudinal steel beams and/or exterior walls.Stabilizer plates may also be used to prevent the anchor head from moving laterally in the ground.An anchor,strap,and stabilizer plate(if used)together are referred to as a tie-down. Anchors can also be mounted in concrete footings when there is enough concrete mass(weight)to resist the lateral and upward forces.This type of system is not covered in this manual. StepsFollow the below: VJ STEP 1.DETERMINE ANCHOR LOCATIONS(p.65) V STEP 2.DETERMINE TIE-DOWN CONFIGURATION(p.71) ® STEP 3.SELECT ANCHORS(p.71) STEP 4.INSTALL ANCHORS(p.72) STEP 5.INSTALL STRAPS(p.73) V STEP 6.TIGHTEN AND ADJUST STRAPS(p.76) STEP 1. DETERMINE ANCHOR LOCATIONS Create a sketch of the home plan showing the exterior walls,marriage line(s)(if any)and frame I-beams(this will be similar to the base sketch created in Prepare Footings,page 18). Need for a stabilizing sys- See Table 19 for a list of anchor locations,types,and where they are required. Pages tem.The manufactured where the requirements are provided are noted in the last column. home must be secured As each anchor location is determined, mark it on the sketch,noting important dimen- against the wind by the use sions such as spacing between anchors.When complete,this will be the home's tie- of an anchor assembly or down plan(Figure 69 and Figure 70). an alternative foundationsystem.Where site or TABLE 19.ANCHOR LOCATION TYPES other conditions prohibit C4 the use of the manufac- X Location Typ Wind Zone I ...- turer's instructions,a regis- r Frame Yes Yes 66 tered engineer or regis- m Sidewall tered architect must design Vertical Not Yes 70 the stabilizing system. p Frame Sometimes Yes 70 Flood and seismic forces. Marriage line Vertical Sometimes Yes 70 The stabilizing system re- O quirements in this chapter X Frame Yes Yes 70 n Tag Unit do not consider flood or Vertical No Yes 70 seismic loads and are not O •. Vertical No Yes 70 intended for use in flood or Z • Yes Yes 70 seismic hazard areas: In N those areas retain a regis- Connect any factory-installed sidewall tie-down straps to a ground anchor regardless of the wind tered engineer or regis- D zone in which the home is placed. r z tered architect to design r Install marriage line anchors prior to moving the home over the top of the anchor locations and the stabilizing system. > then return to Set the Home or Complete Multi-Section Set respectively. O Figure 69 and Figure 70 illustrate typical anchor locations for a double-section home in Z Wind Zone I and Wind Zones II and III respectively. D Z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 65 Install Stabilizing #05 onforms to Systems q000 HUD M11Css 1/15/09 ,Sidewall Frame Tie-down Figure 69. Typical anchor locations for a double- section home in Wind Zone I Marriage wall vertical tie-down(some homes) ................. ....... .. .--- -- ---- ...... Marriage Line h K Anchor Head Strop ®�Vertical Tie-down Sidewall Frame Tie-down Figure 70. Typical anchor locations for a double- section home in Wind Zones ,l 11 or 111 o ! 1 ! Marriage wall vertical tie-down. —I ------------ R Extend strap to far I-Beam Marriage for Doublewide units with `_�' Line 5/12 Roof pitch. Endwall Tie-downs v 01 Sidewall vertical tie-down SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHORS ' // Use Tables 20,21,and 22 to determine the spacing between anchors for Wind Zones I, II,and III, respectively.Spacing requirements will vary depending on the type of home (single or multi-section),the slope of the roof,the width of the floor for each section,the Maximum spacing re- sidewall height,I-beam spacing,and the height from the ground to the strap attachment quirements.The LAHJ point.Determine the values for the home.Using the table for the appropriate wind zone, may have anchor spacing determine the column and row that corresponds to the characteristics of the home.The requirements that super- value on the tables is the maximum distance between anchors. Keep in mind that side- cede the values provided wall frame tie-downs must be located no more than two feet from each end wall. in this manual. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9.22 AM 66 Install Stabilizing � r Systems onfOttin■to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 TABLE 20.WIND ZONE I SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHOR MAXIMUM SPACING Height from Roof slope maximum 4.35/12 Roof slope max. Roof slope max. ground to ( 1 degrees) t Sidewall I-beam spa strap . Floor .. ■. �Do.ble Up to 25" — 8'-0" ```�1111111111111/��7j/ t 48"to 67" — 8'-0" `.�'� .1S..... E/q�. Up to 25' — U-0" 'Q 25"to 48" — PE19600312 8'-0" - - --Less[liar 48"to 6T - B'-0' • • a STATE OF Up to 25" — 7'.0" : '90 P•�,.•'4 4i • 26"to 48" — T.O. �i AN,., NMore than � ��`` 48"to 67' _ T O" i���iSSIONA' ```I�N d Up to 25' — 7'-0" F ,�eKrey T.tegault 25"to 48' — T-0" "jq 2009.01.0$ 48'to 6T — T-0" — Up to 25" 10'-9" 11'-3" T-6" 6'-6' 25"to 48" T-6- 8'-0' 51-0" 4'-0' 48"to 67" 7'-6" 8'-0" 6-0" 4'-6' Up to 25' 8'-3' B'-9' S'-9' 5'-0. 25"to 48" 7'1" 8'-0' 5'-0" 4'-6" Moi-than48'to 67" T-6' 8'-0' 51-0° 4'-0' Up to 25" 9'-0" 10'-0' 7'-0" 6'-0' More than 25'to 48' T-9" T-3- 6'-0' 4'-3' 48"to 67" 6'-9" 7'•3" 5'-0" 4'-3' Up to 25" 7'-0' T-9' 5'-3- 4'-9' 25"to 48" 6'4 7'-3' 5'-0" 4'-3' 48"to 67" 6'-9' 7'-3' 5"-0' 4'-3' Up to 25" 11'-9' 13'-9" 8'-3" 7'-3" 25"to 48" 9'-' 10'-01 6'-0- 5'-3' Up to 1 48"to 67" 7'•9' 8'-3" 5'1" 4'-3" _ Up to 25' 1 V-6" 12'-0" T-6" 6'-0' 25"to 48" 7'-9" 8'-3" 5'-0" 4'-3" More than 48'toBr 7'-9' 8'-3" 5'-0' 4'-3' Up to 25" 9'-T 12'-3" T-9• 6'-9" (n or 25'to 48" 8'-0' 9'-0' 5'-9' 5'-0' A More than < 48"to 67" 7%0' T-3" 4'-9' 4'-0' r Up to 26' 10'-6' 11'-0' T-0' 6'-0' Z m 25"to 48" T-0" T-6' 4'-9: 4'4" n "to 67' T-0" T-T 4'-9- 4'-0' O Up to 25" 11'-9" 14'-0" 8'-3' T-O" 25"to 40" 11'-0' 12'-0' 6'-9• 51•9' 0 M 48"to 67" 9'-0" 10'-0" 5'-6' 4'-9' D Up to 25' 13'-0° 14'-0' 614' T-0- 25"to 4B" 10'-0" 11'-0" 6'-0" 5'-3' Z More 11haii 48'l0 67" 8'-0' 8'-9" 5'-0'15 Up to 25" 9 3- I T-O" 7'-9" 6'-T N 25"to 48' 9.3' 10'-9' W-6- 51-W D More than r 48"to 67" 8-3- 9'-0" 51-3" 4'•6' r Up to 25" 11'-9' 13'-0' T-0' 6%6" n 9-0 25"to 48" 9'-0. 9'-9" T-6i" 5'-0" (� 48"to 67" 7'-0" 7'-9" 4'-0' 4'-0" Z D Z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 67 --Qonkren�t- 1/15/09 HUD MH TABLE 21.WIND ZONE 11 SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHOR MAXIMUM SPACING Rnof slope maximum 5/12 . . •. Up IU 22" 22°to 48" - M.A. ````�.��P�`(T.L��'•9(�,�4 40°to 67" - N.A. �tV .P�GISTEgF, Up to 25' NA - �• FE19600312 25"to 48" - N.A. 48'to 67' - N.A. • t STATE OF = ¢ Up to 25" - 4'-0' %9 ••'.!NpIAlOP••:'�a���• 25°to 48' - N.A. ''���4�s`SJONAL EN6.``�``• 48"to 67" -- N.A. JJJlfllflllllN\\,\\ Up to 25' - NA '�►��0 g 2009.01.09- 25"to 48" - N.A. `y'- 1123:58-0V0' 48"to 67" - NA - Up to 25" 5'4" 64" - 5'-4" 25'to48" N.A. N.A. - 5'_4' 40"to 67" N.A. N.A. - 5'-4' Up to 26' 4'-0' 4'-0' - 6'-' 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. - 514 48'to67" N.A. N.A. - 514 Up to 25" 4'-0" 4'-0" - 514 25"to 48" N.A- NA - 514 More 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. - 5'4' Up to 25" NA N.A. - 5'-4' 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. - 5'-4' 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. - 5'3' Up to 25" 5'.4" 5'4" - 5-4- 25.to 48" 4'-0' 4'-0' .. 514 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. - 5'-0' I 1p to 25" 5'-4" 5'4' - 64 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. - 5'-0' 48-to 67' N.A. N.A- - - 5'4' • Up to 25" Tll" 5'-4" - S'-4 25"to 48" NA NA — 5'-' 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. - 5'-4' Up to 25" 4'-0' 4'-0' - 5'4' 25"to 48" N,A. N.A. - 5'4' 48"to 67" NA NA. - 5'4' Up to 25" 5'»1. 5'4- - 5'-0' 25'to 48' 4'-0' 4-0' - 5'4 48"to 67" 4-0, 4'.0' - 5'-0' Up to 25" 6'-" 51d" - 6'-4' 25"to 48" 4'-0' 4'-0" - 5'-4' 48"to 67' N.A. N.A. - 5'-4' Up to 25" 5'4" 5'4" - 5'-4' 25"to 48" 4'-0' w- - 6`-4' 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. - 5'4' Up to 25' 5'4° 5'-4' - 5'-' 25"to 48" 4'-0" N.A. - 5'4' 48°to 67" N.A. N.A. - 5"4' 68 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Ft o HUD MHCSS Systems 1/I5/09 TABLE 22.WIND ZONE III SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHOR MAXIMUM SPACING Height from Roof slope maximum 4.35112 Roof slope maximum 5/12 Sidewall I-beam ground to t degrees) strap at- Single �. �. ion Floor 25"to 48" - N.A. `\.� PEY T-LEG�G,� ae^to 67" - N.A. .QF�GtSTE�q�O lam' Up to 25" - N.A. PE 19600312 25"to 48" - N.A. 48'to 67' - N.A. "o STATE OF t gr Up to20" - 4'-0" �i90.pMore than ''.!NOIANP.�'\a4'�.` 20'to48' — N.A. 48"to 67" - N.A. AAItONA'tt1t`,`�: Up to 25" - N.A. �'JJf� r 2009.01.%- 25"to 48" - N.A. 7 / 11:23:46-05'00' 48"to 87" - N.A - Up to 25" 4'-0" 4'-0" - 4'-0" 25"to 48' NA N.A. - 4'-0" 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. - 4'-0' Up to 25' N.A. N.A. - 4'-0' 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. - 4'-0" More than 48"to 67" N.A NA - 4'-0' 11 [o13 Up to 25' 4'-0" 4'-0' - 4'-0" 25"to 48' N.A N.A. - 4'-0" More tha 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. - 4'-0" Up to 25" N.A. N.A. - 4'-0' 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. - 4'-0" 48"to 67" N.A- N.A. - 4'-0' Up to 25" 4'-0' 4'-0' - 4'-0" • 25"to 48' N.A. N.A. - 4'-0" 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. - 4'-0" Up to 25" 4'-0' 4'-0' - 4'-0" 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. - 4'-0" More than 48"to 67' N.A. N.A. - 4'-0' Up to 25' 4'-0' 4'-0" - 4'1" Cn 25"to 48' NA N.A. - 4'-0' X More than � 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. - 4'-0" r • Up to 25' 4'-0" 4'-0" - 4'-0" Z 9 0. 1T1 25.to 48" N.A. N.A - 4'-0" 0 48"to 67" N.A N.A. 4'-0" 0 Up to 25" 4'-0" 4'1" - 4'-W a 25'to 48' 4'-0" 4'-0" - 4'-0' 0 M 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. - 4'1" D Up to 25' 4'-0' 4'-0' - 4'-0" 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. - 4'-0" Z More thin 48"to 67" NA N.A - 4'-0" Z Up to 25" 4'-0" 4'-0" - 4'-0" fJ! 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. - 4'-0' A 48"to 67" N.A. N.A. - 4'-0" r r Up to 25" 4'-0' 4'-0' - 4'-0' > 25"to 48" N.A. N.A. - 4'-0" 0 48"to 67' N.A. N.A. - 4'4r Z D Z c D r 1/9/2009 9122 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 69 Install Stabilizing Systems #05 SIDEWALL VERTICAL ANCHORS �HUDMHCSS Homes designed for Wind Zones II and III also require vertical tie-downs along the side-walls.The vertical tie-down anchor straps(or brackets for connecting to the home)are factory installed and indicate the locations.Vertical and frame sidewall tie-downs may 1/15r09 connect to one double-headed anchor or each to its own dedicated anchor. Any factory-installed sidewall tie-down straps must be connected to a ground anchor re- gardless of the wind zone in which the home is placed. END WALL FRAME ANCHORS End wall frame tie-downs are especially important for homes that are wider and have higher roof pitches because those features increase the surface area exposed to wind loads at the ends of the home. Use Table 23 to determine the number of end wall frame anchors required at the each end of each home section. End wall frame tie-downs are not required at Wind Zone I. TABLE 23. END WALL FRAME ANCHORS REQUIRED PER HOME SECTION ON EACH END OF THE HOME \`\��uniuurrrirr��� sidewall Ma) rn section section section section section section ��� PEY T. LFG �ii heiyht roof pitch width w'idth width width width width 4.35/12 2 4 4 4 4 4 5/12 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. NA = PE 19600312 4.35/12 4 4 4 4 4 4 = • • '• STATE OF 5/12 N.A. NA N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 9 r Oo './NDIAN�•'.�� 4.35/12 3 3 3 3 3 4 '� F ••• 6/12 3 3 3 3 4 4 �'ii���s'9/ON A>.1��G 4.35/12 3 3 4 3 4 4 Jeffrey T.Legault 6/12 3 3 4 3 4 4 2009.01.09�� 11:23:28-05'00' MARRIAGE LINE VERTICAL ANCHORS In Wind Zones II and III, marriage line anchors are required along the marriage wall. In Wind Zone I marriage line anchors are sometimes required.(Figure 80) ,/ • // There may be manufacturer-installed brackets indicating required tie-down locations When to install marriage (may be identified by tags or paint),If necessary to avoid Interference with tie-downs,the line anchors.Anchors mduiage line pier lurrdliun may be uffsel horicontally frurn the column by a maximum of 6 along the marriarga line inches. must be installed prior to the second half of a multi- TAG UNIT FRAME ANCHORS section home being set. See Addendum to these installation instructions for tie-down requirements for tag units. Setting the strap angle. When straps are con- TAG UNIT VERTICAL ANCHORS nected only to the near I- See Addendum to these installation instructions for tie-down requirements for tag units. beam, (Figure 71)the an- gle the strap makes with PORCH POST ANCHORS the ground should be be- At Wind Zone II or III install tie-down strap to a ground anchor through the factory in- tween 30 degrees and 60 stalled bracket. Install ground anchor and tie-down strap at each factory installed degrees. Angles greater bracket. than 60 degrees may re- OFFSET UNIT ANCHORS quire closer anchor spac- See Addendum to these installation instructions for tie-down requirements for offset ing. units. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 70 Install Stabilizing Systems Q7r= STEP 2. DETERMINE TIE-DOWN CONFIGURATION to There are two primary tie-down configurations:the near beam and the far beam meth- Hcss ads. Skyline Corporation use the near beam method for all Wind Zone I applications. 1/15/09 The near beam method is also used at Wind Zones II and III,except when a unit has a 5 in 12 roof pitch,and then the far beam method is used. The two methods are described below: • Near Beam Method.Connect an anchor strap from the anchor head to the beam closest to the anchor.(Figure 71). In addition for Wind Zones II and II, connect a vertical sidewall strap from the sidewall of the home to the anchor head using a double-headed anchor. • Far Beam Method. Connect an anchor strap from the anchor head to the out- side beam.(Figure 71). In addition for Wind Zones II and II,connect a vertical sidewall strap from the sidewall of the home to the anchor head using a double- headed anchor. The far beam method is only required for Figure 71.Lateral tie-down Sidewall Vertical Tia-down r configurations (Wind Zone II or III) r `+ 3m Frf I-Beam 1 Gro,+nd Level Noar Beam sldowall frame / fie-down 1 Strap Angle-30 to 60 degrees ar Beam aid wall frame tie-down(5112 Roof pitch units at Wind Zone II or III) •-'-- Stabilizer plate Ground Anchor Cn STEP 3. SELECT ANCHORS z Use the torque probe results from Prepare the Site,STEP 5.DETERMINE SOIL- m BEARING CAPACITY AND FROST LINE(p. 15)and the anchor manufacturer instruc- 0 tions;select the type and length of anchor to use.The installed ground anchor size 0 (length)must be listed (i.e.approved)for the soil class. a O Make sure the anchor is of sufficient length such that the top of the helix is below the frost line.Select a shaft diameter sufficient to resist excessive torsion,"ring-off"(when the helix or anchor head separates from shaft)or shaft splitting.Consult the anchor sup- p plier for guidance. Z Review all of STEP 3.INSTALL ANCHORS(p.71)and STEP 4.INSTALL STRAPS(p. N 72)before making final anchor selections to determine when single-headed vs.double- n headed anchors should be used.Follow the specifications in Table 30 when selecting r stabilizing system components. y O Z ic D Z C r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 71 Install StabilizingSystems qS#os onform.1 to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 TABLE 24.ANCHOR SYSTEM MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS Anchors must be tested and listed to resist a minimum ultimate load of 4,725 Ibs and a minimum allowable working load of 3,150 Ibs or ultimate and corresponding working load limited by soil conditions and anchor length.The working load is the maximum load the designer can use.Ground anchors must be provided with protection against weather deterioration and corrosion at least equivalent to that provided by a coating of zinc on steel of not less than 0.30 oz per sq ft of surface coated. Straps must be minimum 1-1/4"x 0.035"zinc-coated(0.30 oz per sq ft)steel strapping conforming to ASTM D3953-97,Type 1,Grade 1,Finish B with a minimum allowable working load capacity of 3,150 Ibs and a minimum ultimate load of 4,725 lbs.Slit or cut edges of zinc-coated strapping do not need to be zinc coated. The size and type of stabilizer plate,if required by the ground anchor manufacturer,will be specified in the anchor manufacturer's instructions.Stabilizer plates must be provided with protection against weather Stabilizer plates deterioration and corrosion at least equivalent to that provided by a coating of zinc on steel of not less than 0.30 oz per sq ft of surface coated.Alternatively,ABS stabilizer plates may be used when listed and certi- fied for such use. STEP 4. INSTALL ANCHORS Before beginning anchor installation,check for obstructions under the home such as piers and frame members that may interfere with the tie down strapping. Check with util- ity companies to determine the location of underground utilities,such as electrical and phone lines,and water,sewer, and gas pipes that may be buried in potential anchor lo- cations.Also check for homeowner-installed wires and pipes,such as those connecting Grading area exterior lighting or sheds to the home.These must also be avoided. around anchors.Anchor heads should not rest in FRAME ANCHORS sunken spots.Grade the Frame anchors can be installed in two ways, in-line and against a stabilizer plate.The ground so that water does two methods are discussed below: not collect around anchor heads, but runs away from In-Line Configuration the anchor and out from The in-line configuration(Figure 72)for homes can be used in Wind Zone I only.Typi- under the home. Do not cally, in-line anchors are used under high homes where the anchors can be installed bury anchor heads. from under the home after the home is set. In-line anchors can also be installed before the home is set, however, precisely aligning the anchor with the home both vertically and horizontally is difficult. Using swivel connectors for the strap to beam connection can provide some horizontal flexibility. To install in-line frame anchors,drive the anchor into the ground at an angle and location such that a straight line can be drawn from the tip of the anchor through the anchor head and to the connection point on the I-beam(Figure 73). Figure 72.In-line anchor configuration Figure 73. Stabilizer plate Mah —Main configuration Beam Beam Sidewall Frame Sidewall Frame Tie-Down Strap Pier Tie-Down Strap Pier Ground Ground Anchorwith Anchor Stabilizer Plate Stabilizer Plate Configuration Stabilizer plate configurations(Figure 73)are suitable for homes in all wind zones.An- chors may be installed after the home is set.A stabilizer device,typically an ABS or metal plate,is used to prevent the top of the anchor from slicing through the soil when the load is applied.Stabilizer plates are available in a variety of widths.Choose the wid- est plate that can be driven into the soil to maximize resistance to movement.The LAHJ Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 72 InstallStabilizing Systems #l15 may have stabilizer plate requirements. m Q7HUD a Install anchors with stabilizer plates as follows: HCSs 1. Locate anchor.Select a location for the anchor under the home but within six 1/15/09 inches of the exterior wall(Figure 74).Aviod locations that will interfere with skirting. Figure 74.Determining an- chor and stabilizer plate lo- cation �l 6"max. I Beam 15 deproe\ 12"or 78" F. - Stabilizer plate 2. Install anchor.To assure that the anchor attachment point will end up at the stabilizer plate,start the anchor insertion approximately 12 inches back from from the desired location if using a 48 inch long anchor,or approximately 16 inches if using a 60 inch long anchor. Install the anchor at about 15 degrees off vertical,with the head tilted away from the home.Install the anchor to a depth of @Soil depression. approximately one half its length. Do not locate anchor 3. Drive stabilizer plate.Drive the stabilizer plate into the ground to its full depth heads in soil depressionswhere water may pool. at the point determined in Step 1. 4. Complete anchor installation.Screw the anchor the rest of the way into the ground.The finished anchor must be installed to its full depth. VERTICAL ANCHORS X To install vertical anchors,screw the anchor into the ground directly under the strap at- tachment point on the home until the bottom of the anchor head is flush with the ground Z or no more than one inch above grade. m n STEP 5. INSTALL STRAPS Follow the instructions below to connect straps from the home to sidewall frame,end wall p frame and vertical anchors. D Always protect straps at sharp comers including around I-beams with radius clips or other methods(Figure 75).Radius clips may be fabricated from 26ga(min)by 1 '/.-inch z wide galvanized steel strap formed to fit around comers. Z to Figure 75.Radius clips n r Longitudal D Brack T --I Pmlecl Top and 0 Bottom of seem if_ I�eam Z fV Strap Ie Wrapped Amund Beam � n Z C r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1). 73 Install • • • Systems Q7HUD00SPLICING STRAPS 6 Splicing may be required when a pre-cut strap is of insufficient length.Splices in tie-down H 10 CSS straps are not permitted in a'Y'configuration.Overlap straps by 12 inches,applying one 1/15/09 splice clip from above and the other from below; use a crimping tool to tightly seal the splice clips(Figure 76).Do not run any portion of the splice through an anchor head bolt. Figure 76. Tie-down strap Apply Splice I splice Clips In Direction of Arrows �_ Strap 'Y'Splice i Approx. 12" T Not r N O Permitted SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHORS Install straps to sidewall frame anchors as follows: 1. Connect strap to home.Connect one end of the strap to the home connection point using approved buckles or clips(swivel or hook clip preferred). Figure 77.Strap to beam connection To to ' \ i I �np'or oara �x Strap to beam connection. Regardless of the strap 10Wrap strap around main O Connect hook totopof supplier's recommenda- beam main beam and connect tions,the strap must be other end ofstrapto connected to the top of the anchor head. mein beam to prevent damage to the structure.2. Connect strap to anchor.Connect the other end of the strap to the split bolt in the anchor.Leave enough strap length to be able to make at least three, but no more than five complete turns around the bolt before it becomes tight(approxi- mately 2 1/2 inches per turn or 7 1/2 to 13 inches total). Fewer than three turns and the strap may not hold onto the bolt when force is applied.Conversely, more than five turns may not fit within the U-channel of the anchor head.Follow the procedure outlined in Figure 78. I 74 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Install Stabilizing Systems 4 Verms to MHM 1/15/09 OInsert the tension bolt into the O Place the strap through the slotted O Using a 15/16"socket or open end anchor head and loosely attach shank of the tension bolt and bend wrench,rotate clockwise,wrapping the hex null. up to 90". the strap around the tension bolt. li 4 0 OOnce tensioned tothepdntthat O Once fulytensioned,align the If approved by the manufacturer, counterclockwise resistance square neck of the bolt with the double head anchors may be used appears,use a 516"open end square recess in the anchorhead for both diagonal and vertical wrench to hold the square neck and tighten the hex nut. This will tie-down strap tensioning.Tension while repositioning the15/16" draw the two together and lock the the diagonal lie-down strap first. tensioning wrench to continue system into final position. Follow Steps 3 through 7 to instal tensioning. Repeat as required. straps to anchor head. Figure 78.Procedure for connecting the strap to frame and anchor 3. Pretension anchor.For anchors with stabilizer plates,pretension the anchor by pulling it up to the stabilizer plate using the strap and take-up bolt to move the anchor head.Continue pulling the strap until the plate moves a small amount(about 1/2 inch).This is called packing the plate and it will yield the Cn strongest resistance(the bottom of the anchor head should be maximum 1/4 Anchor head location.As inch above the top of the stabilizer plate). the anchor is pulled up to END WALL FRAME ANCHORS meet the stabilizer plate, Z the head of the anchor will m Attach straps to the bracket welded by the manufacturer to the frame(Figure 79).If no rise.In its final position,the n brackets have been installed, use approved beam clamps designed specifically for this O bottom of the anchor head purpose,available from anchor suppliers.Connect straps to anchors following same pro- should be no more than cedure as for sidewall frame anchors. 1/4 inch above the top of O the stabilizer plate. I Bracket Figure 79.End wall frame p anchor attachment method Z Main Beam Z . n r Pier _ End Wall Tie- a 30-45 Down Strap degrees\ O Z D Z C Anchor with D Stabilizer Plate r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (448 PG. 1) 75 Install Stabilizing Systems MARRIAGE LINE VERTICAL ANCHORS rm to If vertical straps have been attached to the home by the manufacturer,connect the other HUDMMHCSS end of the straps to the anchor heads. Factory installed marriage line uplift straps must 1/15/09 be attached to anchoring equipment. The types of straps used are shown below. (Figure 80)Type 1 is a strap used at Wind Zone I only. Some Wind Zone I units do not require marriage line vertical uplift tie-downs. These units will not have any of the straps shown below factory installed and will have double marriage line walls. Type 2 and 3 are used at Wind Zone II or III only. All Wind Zone II or III multi wide units require marriage line vertical tie-downs. Figure 80.Marriage line ver- tical tie-downs Uplift connector caparary .3114 tbs.each to be 1 Y1, 3 resisted by anchoring equipment Foci"installed standard Uplift connector capacity is hurricanestrap Capacity 12d21bs.each to be rested by TYPE 1 Type 2 /is 3150 lbs anchoring equipment 114"cable thimble inserted in connector hole 7132"or 1/4" _� % galvanized steel Slot in strap is for ~�---to be con hurricane is cable. Tension ottaeh n"I of standard to he connected Pei manufacturer hurricance strap. directly to an instructions approved ground anchor STEP 6. TIGHTEN AND ADJUST STRAPS After all anchors have been installed and pre-tensioned,recheck all anchor straps to as- sure that they are tight and that the anchor shafts have remained in contact with the sta- bilizer plates. Do not over-tension straps. •• to • Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 76 Connect Utilities Q7D HCSS Connect Utilities 1/15/09 This chapter contains procedures and requirements for the connection and testing of utility hook-ups.Responsibility for making utility connections varies by location.Consult the LAHJ and the utility before connecting the home to any utilities. StepsFollow the STEP 1.CONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICE(p.77) STEP 2.CONNECT WATER SERVICE(p.80) O STEP 3.CONNECT GAS SERVICE(p.83) STEP 4.CONNECT OIL SERVICE(p.84) STEP 1. CONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICE The home is designed for connection to an electrical wiring system rated at 120/240 volt AC. All electrical field work must be done by a licensed electrician or other person ap- proved by the LAHJ. Special precautions when FEEDER WIRE AND EQUIPMENT SIZES installing electrical ser- The current rating(in amperes)of the home can be found on the tag located on the out- vice.Installation of the side next to the feeder or service entrance,and on the electrical distribution panel.Using electric power to the home this information,determine the required feeder wire size from Table 25.These sizes are can cause exposure to live based on an ambient temperature of 86 degrees Fahrenheit and do not take voltage drop electrical circuits.Exposure into consideration. to live electrical circuits or improper grounding of the Acceptable conductor types are: RHH, RHW, RHW-2,THHN,THHW,THW,THW2, conductor in the panel THWN,THWN-2,XHHW,XHHW-2,SE, USE, and USE-2. board may result in severe TABLE 25.ELECTRICAL FEEDER WIRE AND EQUIPMENT SIZES FOR COPPER shock or possible electro- CONDUCTORS cution.A qualified installer must make the connec- Main Minimum Conductors(Cu) tions for the electric power. Breaker Size Size in Junction Raceway Red& White Green Bare Panel box size Conduit Black DiameterBox U) 50 6x6x6 1 #6 AWG #6 AWG #10 AWG #8 r< 100 8x8x4 1-1/4 #3 AWG #3 AWG #8 AWG #8 Z m 125 10x10x4 1-1/2 #2 AWG #2 AWG #6 AWG #6 0 150 10x10x4 1-1/2 1/0 AWG #2 AWG #6 AWG #6 200 12x12x4 2 3/0 AWG 1/0 AWG #6 AWG #4 0 O 225 15x12x4 2-1/2 3/0 AWG 1/0 AWG #4 AWG #4 D O Z z D r r D O Z 3 D Z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 77 000 Connect UtilitiesFS#o5 onfor__to 11M)MIICSS 1/15/09 FEEDER CONNECTIONS Feeder connections are made from above or from below the home as follows: i // From above—mast weatherhead feeder The routing,connection,and support of the service drop must meet local codes. Homes Power supply.A large equipped this way contain all necessary conduits to the electrical distribution panel. enough power supply must However,the feeder conductors(not provided with the home)are installed on site.If the be available at the site.An masthead is located above the roof overhang,allow a minimum clearance of eight feet inadequate power supply above all roof points that the conductors pass over.There are two exceptions to this rule: may result in improper op- (1)The vertical clearance may be reduced to three feet if the roof has a minimum slope eration of and possible of 4 in 12;and(2)The vertical clearance may be reduced to 18 inches if no more than damage to motors and ap- four feet of service-drop conductors pass above the roof overhang,and if they terminate pliances.It may also in- at a through-the-roof raceway or approved support.A minimum clearance must also be crease electricity costs. provided from the final grade to the service-drop conductors.This measurement may vary from 10 feet to 18 feet,depending on the types of traffic anticipated below the ser- vice drop(refer to the NEC).Unless impractical,locate service heads above the point of attachment of the service-drop conductors and make them rain-tight. If individual conduc- tors do not extend downward,form drip loops. From below—underside junction box feeder A section of conduit is factory installed through the floor cavity.Connect to that conduit with approved fittings and conduit(not provided with the home)to the point where the service entrance cable enters the crawl space.Install properly-sized service entrance conductors from the main power supply to the panel board. Depending on the location of the main panelboard inside the home,or the point at which the service entrance conduc- tors enter the crawl space,a separate service disconnect may be required. Refer to Table 25 for the conductor and junction box requirements.The installer must provide the supply connection including the feeder conductors,junction box,and conduit connectors. Protect conductors emerging from the ground from a minimum of 18 inches below grade to eight feet above grade,or to the point of entrance to the home.The distance meas- ured from the top surface of a buried cable, conduit,or raceway to the finished grade must meet the minimum burial requirements outlined in the NEC. Use a moisture-proof bushing at the end of the conduit from which the buried cable emerges. GROUNDING The home must be properly grounded to protect the occupants.The only safe and ap- proved method of grounding the home is through an electrically-isolated grounding bar in the manufactured home distribution panel board.This grounds all non-current-carrying Grounding the electrical metal parts to the electrical system in the home at a single point. system.Do not provide Each neutral conductor must be connected to the system grounding conductor on the the electrical power until the z supply side of the main disconnect in accordance with Articles 250.24,250.26,and grounding electrode is in- g 250.28 of the National Electrical Code,NFPA No.70-2005. stalled and connected. is z Where the meter base has a disconnect(typically when the meter is more than 6 feet When the meter base O from the service electric panel,although this may vary by LAHJ)the ground and neutral not on the house never use should be bonded at that disconnect and then grounded to the driven earth ground.Four the neutral conductor of wires will leave the service electric panel to the disconnect.Three wires will enter the the feeder cable as a a disconnect from the meter base(refer to Figure 81). ground wire. F— Where there is no disconnect on the meter base or between the meter base and service z electric panel(typically when the meter is within 6 feet from the service electric panel,al- z though this may vary by LAHJ),the main circuit breaker in the service electric panel be- 0 comes the first disconnect. In this case,the neutral and ground are bonded in the service aelectric panel and connected to the driven earth ground from the service electric a panel.Three wires lead between the meter base and the service electric panel(refer to O Figure 82). a W O U w z M } Y N 78 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Connect •�foems to HUD 11 ffa 1115/09 Service Entry Figure 81.Electrical feeder —Main Panel (May Be Above Or Below Ora") Enclosure connection when meter has a disconnect installed(typi- �2' °Ce;;� cally more than 6 feet from Equipment Neutral Bus ear service electric panel). Ground Bus Bar Meter By UtilityI elerbase Companyround From Meter Enclosureisconnect Bonding Skap2'Conduit Not Installed Disconn Grounding W9 2'Conduit (Fused) To Chassis ounding Rod r Metallic Conduit Or Fr ngs To Be Effectively Grounded To Equipment Ground —Black-'HOT"To A Or B Red-"HOT"To A Or B White To Neutral Bus Bar Ground To Equipment Ground Figure 82.Meter base wir- -M�Penal Siu kos En„y ing when there is no sepa- End... (urow Or Balm Ground) rate disconnect installed 2•Condulf To Neuter 8.11.Haad (typically within 6 feet of ser- Ground nl— Bus Bar vice electric panel). Equon Bus Bar Malarayumy G.V-y MI Enl—, Bong BhaP 2'Condui In9allad By Manuladurer Grounding Lug 2'Canduil To O,asek To Grounding Rod To Me,n ♦Panel Malaf c Corduft Or Fittings To Be EgxfneyG—&dTo Equpmenl -Bloat-'tiOT'TaAAB Gmund Red-'HOT To A Or B MR.To Neutral Bus Bar In all cases,a grounding electrode conductor and a ground wire must be installed ac- cording to the following specifications: CAI 1. Grounding wire to be per Table 25 provided by the manufacturer.If manufac- turer provides a minimum 1/2 inch EMT or conduit raceway,the#6 minimum bare copper wire is provided by the retailer for installation. Z 2. The clamp connecting the grounding wire to the electrode shall be suitable for m .direct burial and located flush or below ground level. n O 3. Use a listed 5/8 inch diameter by eight foot long iron electrode or nonferrous rod a of at least 1/2 inch diameter by eight feet long for grounding(larger sizes may 0 be required by the IAHJ due to soil impedence). 4. Drive the electrode to a depth of not less than eight feet so that at least eight O feet of the electrode is in contact with the soil. Z 5. When rock is encountered,the electrode may be driven at an angle not to ex- 2 ceed 45 degrees from vertical or buried in a trench that is at least 2-1/2 feet i deep. r r D FIELD INSTALLED METER BASE O When a meter base is installed in the field,Figure 83 and the following requirements Z must be adhered to: D • Install the meter base according to the manufacturer's instructions. Z c • Use straps to support any conduit. Do not use the meter base equipment for D support. r • Use exterior equipment and enclosures listed as weatherproof and entrance 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 79 Connect Utilities (ED V 5 onforms to -tm Fi HCSSS 1/15/09 conductors listed for wet locations. • The grounding bar may be installed separate from the neutral bar for purposes of testing the electrical system. • The grounding bar may be isolated during the electrical check and re-attached, after the tests are completed. • Check with the local electrical utility to verify meter base requirements and loca- tions and distances for the main panel and meter box. • The field installed meter base enclosure must be installed in accordance with its listing_Fasten securely to exterior wall ch lrtc and inmVida far a weather-tight p. seal. • Check the local code for any requirements regarding the location of the meter base. -Exterior Wal Maier Encimn Figure 83.Meter base Metre� clearances. 114"Air Space Belween Meter E w1asut'And Exterior Wal STEP 2. CONNECT WATER SERVICE CONNECTION To connect the home's water system to the water source,identify the water inlet located • under the home(usually below the water heater compartment or utility room)and follow Selecting heat tape.Use the procedure described below(refer to Figure 84): only pipe-heating cable J 1. Flush pipe.Flush field-installed water piping free of all debris prior to connec- (tape)listed for manufac- tion to the home's water inlet. tured homes,and install it z 2. Clean threads.Ensure that pipe threads are clean. in accordance with the ca- g 3. Install pressure-reducing valve. If tho local water supply exceeds 80 psi in- ta(tape)manufacturer in- s z stall a pressure-reducing valve. tallation instructions. O 4. Connect valve.Install a main shut-off valve between the water supply and the Maximum water pressure. Qinlet on the home.Locate the riser for the shutoff valve underneath or adjacent The water system for the � to the home. Select a full flow gate or ball shutoff valve,or equivalent valve.To home was designed for a maximum inlet pressure of Q prevent the possibility of fresh water contamination install an anti-siphon valve Cn on all field installed exterior faucets. 80 psi. z z O i= a tY O a M O U w _z J rA Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 80 onConnect Utilities Lotmato _ HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Figure 84. Water system connection i / A c Factoryanstetad Turning on Water Service. WalerPipe Do NOT turn on the water Optional Hose Sb service to the home until the (Not Suppled) drain lines have been com- ConnectToT -- _________------_ pleted and connected to the Here For Water System Test service sewer system. Connection—' (Not Suppled) Locate Water Riser Underneath or `_1.1,,nd-mar.Shut-Off Adjacent to Home Valve(Not Supplied) 5. Install water heater discharge drain.Inspect the drain opening on the water heater to ensure that it is clear of any obstruction. If the home is to be installed on a basement or enclosed crawlspace, install drain pipe connecting the dis- charge from the water heater temperature and pressure relief valve to the out- @Using check side or to a sump. valves.Install a check 6. Install water heater drip pan drain.Assure that the drain for the water heater valve on the water inlet to drip pan does not terminate under the home. Using the materials provided and prevent water system the accompanying instructions run a drain line from the water heater drip pan drainage in the event of a through the floor to the exterior of the crawl space.Terminate the line between loss of water pressure from six and 24 inches above grade.(Figure 85).Make the termination point rodent the source.Such pressure proof. loss could cause the water heater to drain,exposing the heating elements of electric water heaters causing them to fail. Water Heater(factory installed) Figure 85. Water heater drip \ pan and drain to X Exterior Wall Note 1.Water heater drip pan drain pipe has been fate Water installeeater d) n tory installed through the m rra�to�/installed) bottom board. A 90 degree 0 elbow has been factory in- 0 stalled to accept the pipe ex- 0 Floor decking tension. 0 Floor joist Note 2. Insert the CPVC or PVC drain pipe extension 0 (factory provided—field in- Z stalled)into the factory in- z stalled 90 degree elbow. Be I - - sure to provide'/4"per foot CPVC or PVC water heater Bottom board of slope to provide positive >r drip pan over-flow drainage drainage. pipe(factory installed). See 0 Install screen over end of CPVC or PVC pipe extension note 1. Z pipe extension(not ` (field installed) See note 2 3 provided). D Support pipe extension every 4-0" Z C D r 1/9/ 09 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 8'I ConnectF HUD MHCSS 7. Insulate.In areas subject to freezing temperatures, protect with insulation or 1n5i09 heat tape pipes,valves and pressure reducers that are exposed to the out- doors;and pipes in water heater compartments with non-insulated doors.Con- nect heat tape to the electrical outlet under the home near the water supply • A inlet. Selecting heat tape.Use only pipe-heating cable (tape)listed for manufac- TESTING tured homes,and install it After testing the electrical system and connecting the water lines check the water system in accordance with the ca- for leaks using one of the procedures described below.Before testing,close all water ble(tape)manufacturer in- faucets,spigots,and toilet-tank float valves. stallatio��instructions. uctio�is. Hydrostatic(preferred): Testing water lines.Only use pneumatic(air)testing 1. Bypass water heater.Bypass the hot water heater by disconnecting the hot when hydrostatic testing is outlet and cold inlet water lines from the water heater and joining them together. not practical.Air under This will protect the hot water tank from damage and protect those involved in pressure is explosive.Ex- the test from possible injury. ercise extreme caution and 2. Fill water heater.Confirm that the water heater tank is full of water. notify all site personnel of 3. Pressurize system.Connect a hydrostatic pump,valve,and gauge to the loca- the test.Wear protective tion shown in Figure 84.Pressurize the system with water at 100 psi,and then eyewear and take precau- isolate it from the pressure source.Bleed all air from the highest and farthest tions to prevent impact points in the system. damage to the system while the test is in pro- w. Hold pressure.Monitor the pressure for at least 15 minutes. gress.Do not pneumati- 5. Fix leaks.If the pressure drops below 100 psi,locate and correct any leaks by cally test CPVC systems. cutting out and discarding bad pipe sections or joints and installing new pipe or Pneumatically test Flow joints with couplings. Guard Gold systems only 6. Repeat.Repeat the test until all leaks have been eliminated. at low pressure levels(20 psi or less). Pneumatic: Pressurizing water lines. 1. Bypass water heater.Bypass the hot water heater by disconnecting the hot When pressurizing the wa- outlet and cold inlet water lines from the water heater and joining them together. ter system,connect the This will protect the hot water tank from damage and protect those involved in pump to a location above a the test from possible injury. closed shut-off valve so as 2. Pressurize system.Connect an air pump and pressure gauge to the water not to introduce pressure inlet,pressurize the system to 100 psi and isolate the pressure source from the into the municipal water system. supply. 3. Hold pressure.Monitor the pressure for least 15 minutes. If the pressure drops below 100 psi,locate any leaks by applying soapy water to the connections and Q looking for bubbles. Z4. Fix leaks.Correct any leaks by cutting out and discarding bad pipe sections or joints and installing new pipe or joints with couplings. z 5. Retest.Repeat the procedure until all leaks have been eliminated. 0 6. Restore connections.Reconnect the water heater and the water supply. H J FREEZE PROTECTION FOR UNOCCUPIED HOMES If the home is to be left unheated in cold weather, protect water lines from freezing as fol- lows: Cn Z 1. Disconnect supply.Turn off the water supply and disconnect the water supply Z inlet. 2. Drain water heater.Turn off the water heater;if necessary,attach a hose to the valve to direct water away from under the home,open the drain valve and 0 drain the tank completely. o. 3. Drain faucets.Open all faucets throughout the home(including the laundry parea if plumbed,and any exterior faucets)and let them drain completely. v 4. Drain toilets.Flush toilets and drain water tanks completely. w Z 5. Close faucets.Close all water faucets with the exception of one. 6. Connect compressor.Connect a maximum of 30 psi air supply to the water inlet connection using a low pressure compressor. 7. Open faucets.With the air supply on the system,open one faucet at a time Skyline Corporation (448'PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:2.2 AM 82 Connect ,- F #o0 throughout the home. 8. Disconnect compressor.After the entire system has been drained of all water, onrorma to Qdisconnect the air supply and close the water inlet valve. HUD MHcss 9. Pour anti-freeze.Pour an antifreeze solution into all drain traps,including 1n5i09 sinks,tubs,and toilets. Be sure that the antifreeze is safe for the fixtures and P- traps. STEP 3. CONNECT GAS SERVICE CONNECTION If the home uses natural or liquid petroleum gas(LPG,also known as propane)for water • or space heating,cooking or other appliances,follow the procedure described below: Installing gas lines.Only 1. Inspect vents.Assure that all exhaust vents on gas-fired equipment are se- qualified professionals may curely connected and that roof jacks and stacks have not come loose during connect and test gas ser- transit and they are properly installed. vice. 2. Review appliance instructions.Review each appliance manufacturers in- structions before the home is connected to the gas supply.Most gas appliances are typically configured to operate on natural gas. If the gas supply will be LPG, consult the appliance manufacturer's instructions to determine what changes need to be made. For homes located above 3,000 feet,appliances may require a different orifice. 3. Remove cap.Remove the protective cap from home inlet pipe and install a full flow shut-off valve at the supply inlet(Figure 86). 4. Install regulator.The gas piping system is designed for a pressure that is at least seven inches of water column(4 oz.per sq in or 0.25 psi)but not more than 14 inches of water column(8 oz.per sq in or 0.5 psi). If gas from any sup- ply source exceeds,or could exceed this pressure, install a regulator if required by the LAHJ. 5. Connect supply.Using matching threaded fittings,connect the gas supply to the inlet side of the shut-off valve. 6. Close valves.Close all valves at appliances prior to opening the main supply valve. Figure 86. Gas service con- nection Full Flow Shutoff � Valve Required Floor Cn (Supplied By Others) r' Z rn 0 O Dust Cover 0 1� Union(Supplied 8y Olhers) 0 Source of Gas Z Z TESTING m Test the gas piping system in the following two ways: 1)piping only and 2)entire system. D Consult with the LAHJ for any additional testing or start-up requirements. Before testing is begun,the temperature of the ambient air and the piping should be ap- Fill gas water heaters.Be- proximately the same. Conduct the tests when and where air temperatures will remain fore lighting the pilot on a Z constant. gas powered water heater, 9 Piping only test(all appliances isolated) fill the tank with water. Fail- z 1. Isolate appliances. Isolate all appliances from the system by closing all appli- ure to do so could damage c ance shut-off valves. the water heater. D r 2. Attach gauge.Attach to the home's gas inlet a mercury manometer or slope 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 83 PF �� Connect Utilities oto�.to HUD MHCSS gauge calibrated in increments of not more than 1/10 lb. 1/15/09 3. Pressurize system.Using an air compressor,pressurize the system with com- pressed air to three psi and isolate the pressure source from the system. 4. Monitor pressure.Monitor the pressure for at least 10 minutes. 5. Check for leaks. If pressure drops below three psi,check for leaks by applying a non-corrosive, ammonia-free gas leak detection fluid to the joints at all valves, appliance connections,and crossover connections(do not use dish washing de- tergents,soap,or other household chemicals). If bubbles form,tighten the con- nection and recheck. 6. Repair leaks.If leaks persist,replace defective pipes or Fittings with u.—A m� terial and retest. 7. Release pressure.Release pressure and open all appliance shut-off valves. 8. Rinse connections.Thoroughly rinse all tested connections with water to re- move leak detection fluid. Entire system test(with appliances) 1. Close appliances.Close all gas equipment controls and pilot light valves ac- cording to the individual gas equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Open valves.Assure that gas shut-off valves for all gas equipment are in the open position. 3. Attach gauge.Attach to the home's gas inlet a pressure gauge calibrated in ounces. 4. Pressurize system.Pressurize the system with compressed air to six to eight ounces(3/8 to 1/2 psi,or 10 to 14 inches of water column). 5. Check for leaks.Check for leaks as described above in step 4 of the Piping only test.Replace defective pipes or fittings with sound material and re-test. 6. Rinse connections.Thoroughly rinse all tested connections with water to re- move leak detection fluid. GAS APPLIANCE START-UP Open the shut-off valve for each appliance and adjust the burners according to the appli- ance manufacturer's instructions.Verify that the furnace and water heater thermostats are operating properly and set them to the desired temperatures. STEP 4. CONNECT OIL SERVICE Homes that are equipped with oil burning furnaces must have oil supply piping installed i // � and tested on site by a qualified professional in accordance with NFPA 31,Standard for Q the Installation of Oil Burning Equipment,2001 or the requirements of the LAHJ,which- D Testing oil tanks.All oil Z ever is more stringent.The home manufacturer does not supply oil piping or tanks. � storage tank and piping in- OIL CONNECTION stallations and tests must Z Consult the furnace manufacturer's instructions for proper pipe-sizing and installation meet all applicable local O procedures.Where piping is run through the bottom of the home,ensure all holes in the regulations and should be Qbottom board are sealed tight with foam, mastic,and/or tape specially made for that pur- made only by experienced, pose and made rodent proof. qualified personnel. HWhen equipping the home with an oil storage tank, comply with the following: Cn Z a Install the pipe with a gradual slope toward the fill end or drain plug(if so Z equipped)to facilitate pumping or draining of water and sludge. O 0 Provide a readily accessible approved manual shut-off valve at the outlet,in- stalled to close against the supply. O Equip the tank with an approved oil filter or strainer located downstream from iL the tank shut-off valve. Use a filter or strainer containing a sump with a drain to W trap water. v & Equip under ground tanks with a filler neck extending one foot above grade and W a minimum 1-1/4 inch diameter vent pipe extending at least two feet above Z M grade. Locate the tank to be accessible for service and inspection, and safe from fire and other hazards. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 84 1 Connect Utilities F 0 • If the tank is located inside a compartment of the home,provide ventilation at the bottom of the compartment to permit diffusion of vapors. If the tank is fixed 0 to to the home,provide for filling and draining from the outside. °D�"�CS HUD MHCSS • Insulate interior tanks from the structural members of the home.Provide tanks 1n5i09 so installed with an outside fill and vent pipe and an approved liquid level gauge. • Install tanks that feed vaporizing type oil furnaces so that oil flows by gravity.To achieve efficient gravity flow,make sure that the bottom of the tank is at least 18 inches above the furnace oil control level. • Tanks for gun type oil furnaces(these furnaces include a fuel pump)may be in- stalled above or below ground. OIL SYSTEM TESTING Before operating the system,fill the tank to capacity with the fuel to be burned and visu- ally check all joints in the system for leakage.Replace(do not repair)parts that leak. POP- go to Prepare Appliances and Equipment (p. 86) r Z m n O O O z Z Cn D r r D O z 3 D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 85 Pre 000 #05. . Pr_to Equipment nfoFIICS HUD MS 1/15/09 Prepare Appliances and Equipment This chapter provides instructions for installing and/or preparing appliances and other equipment.While the items below can be completed in any order,the last item,CONDUCT ELECTRICAL TEST,must be done last. Follow - • • - • INSTALL AIR CONDITIONER OR HEAT PUMP(p.86) PREPARE HEATING SYSTEM(p.87) tr INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT(p.87) V PREPARE VENTILATION SYSTEM(p.88) V PREPARE FUEL-BURNING WATER HEATER(p.88) V PREPARE CLOTHES DRYER(p.89) PREPARE SMOKE ALARMS(p.90) PREPARE FIREPLACES(p.90) / PREPARE KITCHEN AND BATH APPLIANCES/FIXTURES(p.92) 7 INSTALL EXTERIOR LIGHTING(p.93) INSTALL CEILING FANS AND LIGHTING(p.93) TEST ELECTRICAL SYSTEM(p.95) _J INSTALL AIR CONDITIONER OR HEAT PUMP (if applicable) CENTRAL UNITS Q. Install split system or unitary central air conditioners and/or heat pumps as follows: • .E 1. Check suitability.Check the home's Comfort Cooling Certificate(may be in- Use listed appliances.All Z cluded with the data plate)to confirm that the home is suitable for installation applicable appliances must ® of central air. If so, note the air distribution system's rated duct capacity be listed or certified by a d (BTU/hr),any equipment sizing guidance provided by the manufacturer and nationally recognized test- J information provided to calculate the home's heat gain. ing agency for the applica- < 2. Select equipment.Select equipment with a rated heating capacity(BTU/hr) tion for which the unit is in- not exceeding the maximum indicated on the home's data plate and a rated tended and installed in ac- z cooling capacity sized in accordance with Chapter 28 of the 1997 ASHRAE cordance with the terms of Z Handbook of Fundamentals or ACCA Manual J, Residential Cooling Load,8th its listing or certification. _® edition.Information needed to calculate the home's heat gain can be found on Properly sizing equipment. ¢- the home's comfort cooling certificate.Choose equipment with a min.circuit Oversized cooling equip- amperage(found on the equip. rating plate)no greater than the branch circuit ment can lower energy effi- arating of the exterior air conditioning receptacle(indicated on the adjacent ciency,reduce comfort, tag),if present. shorten equipment life,and ® 3. Install A-coil.When installing a cooling A-coil in a down-flow furnace that in- may cause moisture prob- U lems in the home(including corporates a fresh air intake duct,position the duct in the furnace cavity ac- ( g Lu Z cording to the furnace manufacturer's instructions(Figure 87).For electric potentially damaging the down-flow furnaces,trim the ventilation duct as needed to allow installation of home's structure).Sizing >_ the A-coil and secure the duct to the wall of the compartment or to the top of guidance is provided by the ,) Manufactured Housing Re- Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 86 PF �� Prepare Appliances ,b vote...to and Equipment HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 the A-coil.Do not restrict the flex duct opening;allow the duct insulation to search Alliance Cooling contact the A-coil,or allow the duct to become kinked,restricted,or config- Equipment Sizing Guide- ured to form a trap. lines available at www.mhrahorne.org. WA Figure 87. Whole house ventilation flex duct in an electric down-flow furnace. s From left to right:as pre- pared in the factory,-proper T``'n installation with A-coil;im- proper installation with A-coil "While House" House" / Flex Duct Flex Duct C A-col /-C\. Selecting A-coils. Use only Y A-coil units compatible and listed for use with the fur- Fumace _ Fumace nace in the home and in- t'nniac,, Fumace CaWnet Fumace stalled in accordance with the furnace manufacturer's instructions. PREPARE HEATING SYSTEM Installing flue stacks with a If the home does not contain a factory installed heating appliance, install a remote hinged roof.If flue stack heating appliance according to INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING components are installed EQUIPMENT,p.87.Prepare fuel-buming heating systems included with the home as above the finish roof line follows: (as is often the case with 1. Inspect for damage.Inspect the furnace and report any damage to the home hinged roofs), n terna- tive Constructioo len letter is manufacturer. normally required along 2. High altitude.If the home is located more than 2,000 feet above sea level or with a follow-up inspection. as indicated in the furnace manufacturer's instructions,derate gas furnaces Contact the factory for 4%for each 1,000 feet above sea level.This work must be done by a qualified guidance. (and in some jurisdictions,licensed)technician. Venting appliances to the 3. Convert for LPG gas.If LPG gas(propane)will be used,convert the appli- outside.Vent to the exte- ance from natural gas to LPG gas use.Conversion must be made by a quali- rior of the home all com- fied and(if required by the LAHJ)licensed technician. bustion appliances except 4. Install intake air pipe.Consult the appliance manufacturer's instructions for ranges and ovens. maximum allowable pipe run length,requirements for air dampers, locations Selecting ducts. Exterior m relative to expected snow levels(check with the LAHJ for expected snow lev- ductwork for remote units n els),acceptable materials,pipe supports,and pipe termination requirements. must be provided by the in- O 5. Install flue.For combustion appliances, install the flue roof cap and stack as- staller or HVAC contractor. T1 sembly as described in PREPARE FIREPLACES,Chimneys(p.90). Ducts must be approved for O exterior installation and INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT should be wrapped with in- sulation of at least R-4 un- O Install remote units in compliance with all heating and cooling equipment requirements der a vapor barrier with a z in this chapter above and the following: perm rating of not greater m 1. Locate connections to the home.Find the manufacturer-installed connec- than one. (For ENERGY --I tors,labels,or tags under the home indicating the required connection points STAR homes,the R-value for supply and return air. If connectors are not provided nor location indicated, must be at least that speci- r select a supply duct location such that there are approximately equal numbers fied on the manufacturer's D of supply registers forward and rear of the connection point.Locate the return ENERGY STAR Site Instal- O duct in the center of the home. lation Checklist—generally z 2. Install ducts.Install the appropriate supply and return ducts(not provided) a minimum of R-6 or R-8.) D between the remote unit and the home(Figure 89), making connections ac- Z cording to the instructions for crossover ducts in Crossover Connections(p. D 52). 3. Install dampers.If installing a remote cooling unit in a home with a factory in- 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation(448 PG. 1) 87 Prepare . . �� #05 • . Equipment Conforms to HUD NMCSS 1/15/09 stalled furnace,install dampers between the furnace and the home's air duct system,and between the remote unit and the home's air duct system to pre- vent warm air in heating mode from escaping to the remote cooling unit and vice versa. Figure 88.Remote unit damper locations .craw ___Ext�lacAD_ Denpen Remote Urit 1 4. Connect wiring.Install a thermostat containing a fan switch.Connect utilities in accordance with all manufacturer's instructions and local codes. 5. Seal penetrations.Repair or replace all floor insulation disturbed during the duct installation and seal holes in the bottom board using foam,mastic,or tape specially made for that purpose. Air Conditioning or Figure 89.Ducts connecting Heating Equipment exterior heating and/or cool- ) Suppy Marriage Supply Return ing equipment to the home Q Duct Line Duct Duct Z t Z Support Straps at upport Block "11 4B"in.O.C.Minimum QMinimum Clearance Between J Ducts and Ground to be4in. J PREPARE VENTILATION SYSTEM Z Prepare the whole-house ventilation system according to the ventilation system manu- Z facturer's instructions.Confirm that any fresh air intake ducts extend to the exterior and O do not draw air from the crawlspace under the home.Do not allow any fresh air ventila- tion intake ducts to become kinked or restricted,forming a trap(Figure 89). Choosing pipe lengths. Q The appliance manufao- W turer may designate the a PREPARE FUEL-BURNING WATER HEATER length of the pipe run W The water heater discharge and drip pan drains should have been installed in Connect based on the pipe diameter 0 Utilities(p.77). and the number of turns in V w In homes with direct-vent water heaters(that utilize gas,oil, or other combustion fuel), the pipe run. z and where the water heater is not independently vented to the exterior through a grilled J P Y 9 9 � Yopening,provide combustion air from under the floor using pipe and cement acceptable U) to the appliance manufacturer or through the roof via a double-walled flue pipe. If pro- vided through the floor,run the air piping to the exterior of the home,with supports �kylwe (,OIporration (4-48 PG 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 88 yPrepare Appliances %P Cenfenmv3s to • • Equipment HUD MHCSS 1/15109 spaced every 3-1/2 feet o.c.or less.Terminate the pipe facing downward a minimum of 12 inches above the ground surface and provide a screen on the pipe vent cap. Venting exhaust systems. PREPARE CLOTHES DRYER Exhaust vents must extend DRYER VENTS to the home's exterior If the home includes a clothes dryer,the components for ventilating the dryer are in- through skirting.Termina- cluded with the home(but not necessarily installed)and a vent opening has been tion of the dryer exhaust roughed in either in the wall or floor. (If a dryer is not installed,seal all dryer vent open- underneath the home can ings). cause condensation and moisture damage to the Run the dryer vent to the outside through the exterior wall or through the floor to a point home.Lint and dust accu- beyond the perimeter of the home,using materials approved by the clothes dryer mulation can ignite,causing manufacturer(see Figure 90). a fire.The exhaust system must not contain reverse slope. Vent Below Floor Vent Through Exterior Wall Figure 90. Clothes dryer Elbow WM Clampm ventilation ductwork through Rlgkl Duct Vent Cap igld or Flex Duct floor(left)or exterior wall (right) Clamp to Dryer Extorlor Connection Wall Dryer Vent Cap Clampto Seal Bottom Vent Cap Board Clamp to Dryer Elbow With Connection Dryer V,yx Rigid Duct Cap Support Strap Rigid or Flex Duct Wood Frame Secured to Bottom of RimPlateor Instal Ttrough Skirting Install the vent as follows: 1. Remove temporary caps.Remove any temporary seals and duct caps from the vent rough openings. • m 2. Install ductwork.Install ductwork using clamps(do not use screws or other Avoid damaging structural fasteners that penetrate into the duct)and support the duct with metal straps elements.Do not cut or r connected to the floor joists or chassis at two feet o.c.or less.Ensure duct otherwise damage struc- z connections are internally overlapped to prevent inhibiting the flow of air and tural elements such as floor m therebycausing lint accumulation. n 9 joists or wall studs for the p 3. Install cap and damper.Install an approved dryer vent cap with damper on installation of the dryer ex- the exterior termination of the duct. If the vent terminates at skirting,secure haust system. O the cap to framing or skirting with sheet metal screws and seal edges with Gas.Ventilation components caulk or sealant. If the vent terminates through a wall,apply a bead of sealant that may be included with to the back of the cap around the opening and secure with sheet metal screws the home for an electric O to metal,hardboard or fiber cement siding or with wood screws to a mount dryer may not be accept- z block for vinyl siding. able for gas dryers.Consult 4. Seal opening.Seal openings inside and outside of the home including at the the gas dryer manufacturer floor,interior walls,siding and skirting(with caulk),and at the bottom board instructions. using foam, mastic and/or tape specially made for that purpose. D GAS DRYERS 0 O If the home was not fitted for a gas dryer, installing one requires substantial alteration z to the home.Gas supply piping and adequate venting must be provided as specified by Installing ducts. 3 the dryer manufacturer and installed by a trained professional. Do not cut major struc- Keep ductwork straight and n tural elements to accommodate a gas dryer. smooth as possible without c excess slack.Slope it D slightly downward towards the exterior to facilitate 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 89 Prepare Appliances, 000 • Equipment Q7,1050_ rm to HCSS 1/15/09 moisture drainage. PREPARE SMOKE ALARMS The home has several factory installed smoke alarms that are wired to a 120-volt cir- cuit.If the home was designed for placement on a basement,an additional alarm is provided for installation at a pre-wired location under the home.Connect the basement smoke alarm and test all alarms as follows: 1. Check circuit.Ensure that electrical power to the home is activated and that the smoke alarm circuit is on. 2. Remove batteries.Make sure backup batteries(if any)are removed from all smoke alarms. 3. Test alarms.Press the test button on each alarm sequentially.All alarms should sound simultaneously when the test button on any one smoke alarm is pressed.Replace(with the same brand as those installed elsewhere in the home)any alarms that do not sound and retest. 4. Replace batteries.After successful test,replace the backup batteries,dis- carding the protective tabs. PREPARE FIREPLACES Install chimneys,chimney flashing and roofing,fireplace combustion air inlets,and hearths according to the manufacturer's instructions and the procedures described be- low. CHIMNEYS Fireplace and wood stoves may require on-site installation of additional sections of ap- proved chimney pipe,a spark arrestor,and a rain cap assembly.Follow the manufac- turer's instructions and the procedures described below: 1. Remove coverings.Remove protective materials covering the roof flashing and any foreign material from the installed part of the chimney. 2. Install chimney pipe.Assemble and seal the chimney per the fireplace or wood stove manufacturer's installation instructions and if there is a conflict be- tween the instructions and the figure,follow the instructions.To assure suffi- cient draft for proper operation,extend the chimney at least three feet above the highest point where it penetrates the roof and at least two feet higher than any surface within 10 feet of the chimney(Figure 92).Use additional sec- t tion(s)of chimney pipe(not provided)if required by local code or if the site has obstructions within 10 feet of the chimney. z Q z O H a J J a cn z z O a O a a O U w z J } ]C 1n Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 90 Prepare Appliances . • Equipment® o0toFMHCSS HUD :QdToIi 1/15/09 Figure 91. Chimney and R.I.Cep combustion air intake duct Spxk Arrei. installation Chimney Cap A6ptr 3'Min T"ple wall Phe Storm Ccbr / /S Roof Hei¢t Selecting the appropriate Firentop Thhtb flue.Wood fireplaces use larger diameter flues than gas fireplaces.Make sure flue matches the appliance type.Gas fireplaces cannot burn wood because the flue is too small and smoke will back up into the home. If wood fireplaces are con- verted to gas the flue will be too large resulting in ex- cessive heat loss through the chimney. 9' r i r Alo— nOv Love Air Intake From Ookille Less-rhm1C Figure 92. Chimney clear- ance ?'Min. VA. 11 2'Mh 1p 3'Mn Cn r z m n 3. Install shingles. Install shingles up to the edge of the flue cut-out in the roof O deck.Secure shingles installed under the roof flashing with asphalt cement. 4. Install flashing.Place flashing over pipe section and shingles and set in as- O phalt cement.Secure flashing to roof deck at top two corners with roofing nails. 5. Complete shingles.Cut shingles in successive courses to fit around the pipe O and embed them in asphalt cement where they overlap the flashing.Secure z shingles with roofing nails through flashing and apply asphalt cement over nail Cn heads.The completed installation should appear as shown in Figure 93,with D the lower part of the flange overlapping the lower shingles and the side and r upper shingles overlapping the flange. r D O z 3 D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation(4-48 PG. 1) 91 Prepare Appliances "5 • • • • ororms to HUD MHCSS 1/16/09 Figure 93.Roof flashing and Push Down Upper and Side shingle installation around Caulking —Roof Shingles rg a Overlap Flanangee and Are Set In chimney Flange Asphalt Cement Flerge S form Cola I I I I \\ 3 eiif Drffi rdm Di shoat Mofai Rue Pip. Lower Pan of Flange hes lt wl To Make Overlaps Lower Shingle Flashing Lay Flat On Roof COMBUSTION AIR INLETS Combustion air inlets provide combustion air through the floor or an exterior wall to a combustion appliance.If through an exterior wall,site installation is not required. If • through the floor,extend the duct from its point just below the floor to the outside(addi- Installing combustion air tional duct material required for this may or may not be provided with the home).Lo- inlets.Do not install the cate the inlet damper above expected snow levels(contact the LAHJ for snow levels). combustion air inlet such Follow the fireplace manufacturer's instructions(typically in the fireplace/stove or with that material from the the chimney parts). hearth can drop beneath the home. HEARTHS If shipped loose,install the fireplace hearth according to the fireplace manufacturer's instructions. PREPARE KITCHEN AND BATH APPLIANCES / FIXTURES Install kitchen and bath appliances according to the manufacturer's instructions and the procedures described for each appliance below. COOKING APPLIANCES Installing exhaust ducts. If the home is provided with a range,cook top and/or grill containing its own exhaust Route exhaust ducts so system that penetrates the floor,complete the exhaust system as follows: they do not terminate be- I. Remove covers.Remove the cover on the factory-installed exhaust pipe pro- Heath the home. trading from beneath the floor near the appliance. 2. Install termination fitting.Secure the provided termination fitting at the outside edge of the floor. 3. Install duct.Use the provided flexible metallic duct to connect the elbow pro- = trading from the floor and the termination fitting. Refer to the manufacturer's z installation instructions for guidance on supporting the duct and making the Q connections. z SITE-INSTALLED GAS APPLIANCES O Install only appliances with a Btu capacity equivalent to or less than the capacity of the Qfactory-installed piping and at the location of a factory-installed gas riser. REFRIGERATOR a Prepare the refrigerator as follows: In Remove straps, blocks,or other securement devices used for shipping and z patch any resulting marks on floors or walls. O If the refrigerator has an icemaker,check water lines for leaks upon installa- tion and a few days later to make sure no leaks have developed. O a SITE-INSTALLED APPLIANCES AND FIXTURES X If sinks,tubs,showers or other fixtures or appliances are to be site-installed,follow the 0 manufacturer's installation instructions. Use only products listed for use in manufac- Lu tured homes and follow all applicable PPlicable local codes. z J } Y <n Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 92 #U5 )Prepare Appliances Q7RUD ® r HCSS 1/15/09 INSTALL EXTERIOR LIGHTING Install exterior lighting according to Figure 94 and the following: 1. Remove cover.Remove the screws and cover from electrical junction box. / z 2. Install flash ring.Place the non-combustible flash ring over the junction box. Lighting installation.A 3. Connect wires.Connect fixture wires to house wires in the box, black to qualified electrician should black,white to white,and equipment ground to equipment ground,using listed install lighting. Before con- wire connectors.Push wires into the box. necting lighting,disconnect 4. Connect fixtures.Connect the fixture to the junction box or strap using power to the lighting circuit. screws provided with the light fixture. Ground all exterior light fix- tures. 5. Weatherproof.Weatherproof/caulk around the base of the fixture,leaving a Using a non-combustible small gap in the caulking on the bottom to permit drainage of water that may ring.Install a non- accumulate. combustible ring completely 6. Complete installation.Install bulb and globe on the fixture and verify proper covering any combustible operation. surfaces the fixture may be mounted on(e.g. hard- board,clad wood and vinyl siding),or when ceiling ma- terial is exposed between the light fixture canopy and the junction box. Wire From SNich Figure 94.Exterior lighting N—C_bo t1CNR+g WirF— W1feNd connection (If Requledl Wi.o Nut SMZh ITYPauI l TYPc�JI Fixture Carps wn1 1'''Ii1� 'e Whib lode •I .� i1 Installing ceiling fans.A qualified electrician should �I Jr install lighting and fans. Be- Pigtail for Ground Cor" fore connecting the ceiling Wirreetto Other Folre Junctionfan or light,disconnect Wire power to the fan wires.Any unit installed outside of the INSTALL CEILING FANS/LIGHTS home(such as in a porch cn ceiling)shall be listed for � Install ceiling fans with the trailing edges of the blades at least six feet-four inches wet locations. above the finished floor.Comply with all unit manufacturers'instructions and the re- z quirements below. Electrical boxes for use with ceiling fans have a maximum allowed rn weight(usually 35—50 Ibs). This is stamped inside the box. Check the maximum 0 weight of the fan versus the allowable weight for the electrical box before installing the 0 fan. O CEILING FAN/LIGHT MOUNTED TO FACTORY-INSTALLED ELECTRICAL BOX y IN CEILING Before installing the unit,make sure that adequate structural bracing is present in the O ceiling. If uncertain,check with the manufacturer. Follow the fan or light manufacturer's z instructions to connect the unit and complete the wiring.If the instructions are not z Cn available,connect the wiring as shown in Figure 95. n r r n 0 z n z C n r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 93 Prepare ' • • J • Equipment onforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Ground Wire Figure 95. Wiring for a ceil- ing fan or chain-hung light fixture. Color Ccrx Wires GIOUnd $rrap Wire Nut— a6np Ceiling 11w Mounting —t. . or Saew NancomhusUble Q Ring(If Required) Chen CEILING FAN/LIGHT MOUNTED ON SITE-INSTALLED DECORATIVE BEAM Where the electrical box will be mounted in a site-installed decorative center beam at- tached to the ridge beam,connect the fixture as follows(see Figure 96): • 1. Cut hole.If the decorative beam(shipped loose)does not contain a precut Choosing ceiling fan junc- hole for the electrical box,cut a hole with a diameter approximately 1/4 inch tion boxes.Connect ceil- larger than the box's using a hole saw.Align the hole with the supply wire lo- ing fans only to junction cation and center on the beam. boxes listed and marked for 2. Install box.Install the box in the hole and secure the flange(plastic boxes ceiling fan application in only)to the decorative beam with four#6 x 1"screws. accordance with Article 3. Insert wire. Insert the ceiling wire through a knock-out hole in the side of the 314.27(b)of 2005 NEC. electrical box. It may be necessary to cut a notch in the top of the decorative Always ground metal junc- beam(on the supply wire side of the center beam hole)allowing the supply tion boxes. wire to be inserted into the electrical box without binding against the beam Selecting fan weight.Do during installation.Leave approximately four inches of wire free in the box. not use any ceiling fans or 4. Attach beam.Secure the decorative beam in place over the center line joint, light fixtures that exceed checking that the supply wire is not pinched or penetrated by beam fasteners. the weight rating of the box Secure the electrical box to the ridge beam with#8 x 2 1/2"wood screws (35 Ibs unless otherwise through the two holes in the top of the box. noted). 5. Strip wires.Strip about 3/4 inch of insulation from the white and black con- Grounding electrical de- ductor ends of the supply wire. vices.Ground fans/lights using a fixture-grounding 6. Position ring.Position the non-combustible flash ring(provided)over the device or a fixture- electrical box so that the finished surface(adjacent to electrical box)which is grounding wire as specified to be covered by the fan canopy is not exposed. in the manufacturer's in- 7. Install and wire unit.Follow the unit manufacturer's installation instructions structions. for mounting the fan/light assembly to the box and for electrical wiring.Use J provided electrical connectors for splicing wire. D Figure 96. Ceiling fan/light z — mounted to flush ridge beam z 0 Ridge Beam a J J In z p Caling 2x6 Center Beam-Shipped Loose for Field Installation a � Supply Wire Coiled And i i Hole for Box Cut Through 2x6 Secured for Shipment (May Be Cut in Plant arm Feld) a w Notch Beam at Hole if Necessary for Wire Chase 0 Secure Box to Ridge Beam U (field Installed) W Secure Box to 2x6 Center z Beam(field-installed) ElectdcalBox J Supply Wire Inserted In Field Through Side Knockwo(Box 94 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM -),Prepare Appliances • • Equipment Q7HUD TEST ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ,,, After completion of all electrical wiring and connections,including crossovers,appli- acss ances, lights,and ceiling fans,inspect and test the electrical system as follows: 1n5/09 1. Fill water heater.Fill water heater before turning on power to the home or switching on the circuit breaker. 2. Test continuity.Before turning on the electrical power to the home,conduct an electrical continuity test to ensure that exposed metallic parts of the home and the chassis are effectively bonded. 3. Test operation.After turning on the electrical power to the home,conduct operational tests of all devices(except water heaters,electric ranges,electric furnaces,dishwashers,clothes washers/dryers,and portable appliances)to demonstrate that they are connected and in working order. 4. Test polarity.After turning on the electrical power to the home,conduct elec- trical polarity checks to determine that connections of electrical equipment in- stalled or completed during installation have been made properly.Visual veri- fication is an acceptable electrical polarity check. •• to • •. N r z m n O „ O D 0 z z D r r D O z 3 n z c n r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 95 Complete Work of �5 _ oor.rm.w HUD MHCSS Complete Exterior Work 1/I5/09 This chapter covers sealing the bottom board,installing the ground cover and skirting,preparing wind protection shutters, and completing site-built structures. StepsFollow the below: STEP 1.REPAIR AND SEAL BOTTOM BOARD(p.96) STEP 2.INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER(p.96) t� STEP 3 INSTALL SKIRTING(p.97) STEP 4 ASSEMBLE OPTIONAL WIND PROTECTION SHUTTERS(p.97) STEP 5.COMPLETE SITE43UILT STRUCTURES(p.97) STEP 1. REPAIR AND SEAL BOTTOM BOARD Tears and openings in the bottom board can result from transportation or installation activities.Inspect for holes and gaps the entire bottom board,especially areas around / / A service penetrations,crossover connections, pipe and duct hangers,foundation ele- ments,and the perimeter of the floor. Using approved materials appropriate for the type of repair,repair the bottom board wherever torn or loosened as follows: continuous and sealed bot- tom board is critical for 1. Insulate.Replace any missing insulation prior to closure and repair of the bot- home performance,energy tom board,paying particular attention to insulation gaps that may have been efficiency,protection created at P-traps. against moisture problems, 2. Repair large openings.Repair large openings with a durable patch made of prevention of pipe freezing, bottom board fabric or other compatible material and fastened with vinyl bot- and protection against in- tom board tape held in place by fasteners installed with a divergent stapler. sects and rodents. Seal the edges around patches with foam or mastic. For large openings,in- Bottom board sealing stall a rigid backer board behind the bottom board to provide a fastening sub- methods.Tapes shall strate for the patch. never be used alone to re- 3. Repair small openings.Repair small gaps and tears with a combination of pair a bottom board.Diver- vinyl bottom board tape,patches, mastic,or foam sealant. gent staples or mastic must be used in tandem with STEP 2. INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER tape to prevent future tear If the space under the home is to be enclosed with skirting or other materials, a ground off. Z moisture retarder of a minimum six mil thick polyethylene sheeting or equivalent must Fastening vinyl siding.Do Q� be installed covering the ground under the home. Moisture retarders are not required in not install fasteners directly Z and regions(less than 15 inches of rainfall annually)with dry soil conditions. If on- into vinyl siding.Allow for 0 grade(surface)footings are used,install the ground moisture retarder prior to placing siding thermal expansion Qthe footings,or install it around the footings after all other work under the home is com- by pre-drilling minimum 1/2 plete. inch diameter fastener -u holes or fastening skirting Install the ground moisture retarder as follows: to a ledger under the home Z 1. Apply sheeting.Unroll the ground moisture overlapping joints in the sheeting a (see Best Practice tip). Z minimum of 12 inches and covering the entire area under the home except for O areas under recessed entries,decks,and porches. 2. Seal joints.Seal joints in the retarder with mastic. 0 3. Weigh down.To keep the retarder in place,weigh it down with stones,concrete @Avoiding radon. CL W blocks,or other heavy,durable materials. For enclosed perimeter wall 0 crawlspace foundations in U 4. Repair tears.Repair any voids or tears in the retarder by patching with like ma- areas where radon is com- es terial,maintaining a minimum 12-inch overlap and sealing joints with mastic. Z monly found in the soil, continue the moisture re- tarder up the perimeter wall Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) u 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 96 "5 -) Prepare Appliances and Equipment -onformy to HUD MZSS 1/15/09 at least 12 inches,sealing STEP 3. INSTALL SKIRTING the edges and between the Skirting is any structural or non-structural perimeter crawlspace enclosure.Complete seams with mastic. site-built structures(see STEP 5.COMPLETE SITE-BUILT STRUCTURES,p.98)that Attaching vinyl siding.To abut the home(such as porches,attached garages,and steps)prior to installing skirt- install skirting on vinyl- ing. sided homes,screw a treated 2 x 4 on edge to the TABLE 26.ANCHOR SYSTEM MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS underside of the floor joists Component Specification two inches back from the edge of the home.Screw Skirting must be of weather-resistant materials or provided with protection skirting tight to the 2 x 4. against weather deterioration at least equivalent to that provided by a coat- ing of zinc on steel of not less than 0.30 oz per sq ft of surface coated. Skirting made from wood or wood products and used within six inches of the ground needs to be made of materials naturally resistant to decay and termite infestation or pressure treated. Avoid backfilling against Ventilation openings must be covered for their full height and width with a skirting.Do not backfill perforated(1/4 inch maximum opening in any dimension)corrosion and against non-structural skirt- weather-resistant covering that is designed to prevent the entry of rodents. In areas subject to freezing,the coverings for the ventilation openings must ing. have an operable damper,permitting them to be in the open or closed posi- tion depending on the weather. To design and install skirting,comply with the skirting manufacturer's instructions(if provided)and the following: 1. Configure skirting.Run the skirting along the perimeter of the home's heated,conditioned space.Do not enclose with skirting areas under recessed entries,porches, or decks(whether constructed as part of the home or added on site)unless skirting is of the fully vented type and installed so as to allow water to freely flow out from under the home. 2. Fasten skirting.Recess the skirting under the siding or trim and attach it to the home in a manner that prevents water from being trapped between the siding or trim and the skirting.For wood, aluminum,or fiberglass skirting,in- stall a skirt rail(lumber strip)under the floor inset at least 1-1/2 inches from the edge of the siding for attachment of the skirting.Allow for frost heave when installing skirting in areas subject to frost. 3. Provide ventilation.Unless the skirting has integral ventilation openings that meet the following ventilation requirements, install equally sized ventilation openings on at least two opposite sides of the foundation.Size ventilation area to equal at least one square foot or each 150 square feet of under-floor area(or for each 1,500 square feet if a ground moisture retarder is installed according to STEP 2.INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER,p. 96). Z Place vents as high above the ground as practical. rn 4. Install access.Provide an access opening not less than 18 inches wide and n O 24 inches high and located so that any utility connections located under the home are accessible. O 5. Extend vents,drains,and inlets.Run appliance exhaust vents,combustion D air inlets,and air conditioner condensation drains through the skirting to the outside and terminate each as instructed in the sections of this manual corre- sponding to each appliance. z z STEP 4. ASSEMBLE OPTIONAL WIND PROTECTION SHUT- D TERS r- If desired, prepare temporary protective window covers for use during severe wind D storms and hurricanes according to Figure 97,Table 27,and the procedure below. 1. Assemble extension framing using with two 16d common nails at each con- z nection. 2. Assemble shutter panels as shown in Figure 97. Z 3. Store the shutters such that they are protected from the weather,are not in di- c D rect contact with the ground,and are easily accessible by the homeowner. r- 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 97 Complete Exterior #05 • pl%00 onforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 To attach shutters to the home: 1. Fasten extension framing to wall framing materials with 16d double-headed nails or#8 x 3"screws,toe nailed/screwed,per Table 27. 2. Fasten assembled panel(s)to extension framing with 12d nails,per Table 27. After use, remove shutters from the home,patch nail holes with caulk and store them as above. Out it oesw Figure 97. Wind protection PL .i shutter construction ct•iui.1' APprex.30 UeOrees Extension Fm V S3 or Stud Grade SPF 2x3 orM Secure OSB ar Pytww la StuddM2 Wilk 12d _ Naps at E O.C. / Stu idi SPF Stu dimRmood —d. / OS13 sad Is)da / OSB Used Is ne or Loss In TNdcness TABLE 27.SHUTTER CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS Panel Fastening to extension Fastening to wall framing Fastening to wall framing Window Fxtp.nKion thickness width trarning (I n) � screws screws 2 x 3" 7116. 112 6 in.o.c. 8 in.o.c. 22 in.o.c. 6 in.o.c. 16 in.o.c. 2 x 3 23/32,314 6 in.o.c. 8 in n.c, 22 in a c. 4-1/2 in.o.c. 12 in.o.c. 2 x 3" 7116, 112 4 in.o.c. 5 in.o.c. 14 in.O.C. 3 in.o.c. 8 in.o.c. "2 x 3 perimeter extension with 2 x 4 studding at 16 inches o.c. STEP 5. COMPLETE SITE-BUILT STRUCTURES DInstall site-built structures such as steps,landings,garages,awnings,carports, d breezeways,porches,decks, railings,sheds,and utility rooms according to manufac- A < turer's instructions(if any),in compliance with all local regulations including fire separa- Designing site-built struc- z tion and electrical requirements,and according to the following: tures.All site-built struc- O • Construct site-built structures to be structurally independent unless provided tures must support their Q for in the design of the home(instructions will be provided by the manufao- own dead,live,and wind J turer). loads and must not < 0 Do not damage the integrity of the home's structural or weatherproofing sys- transmit any loads to the cn tem. Seal any weatherproofing connections between the site-built structure home's structure.All car- ? and the home and flash any roof connections. ports should be freestand- z 0 Utilize only GFCI outlets for site-built structures. ing. O QInstall and test smoke alarms in any site-built structures according to local code. O a .. to Prepare Home for Occupancy(p. .. O L) w z �e U) Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 98 Prepare Home • Occu • . Prepare Home for Occupancy q rD Follow these steps for final inspection and completion of the home. • •w the Steps • • STEP 1.VERIFY ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION(AIC)INSPECTION(p.99) STEP 2.COMPLETE INSPECTION CHECKLIST(p.99) STEP 3.COMPLETE ENERGY STAR CHECKLIST(p.99) STEP 4.CLEAN THE HOME(p.99) STEP 1. VERIFY ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION (A/C) IN- SPECTION This is normally the responsibility of the retailer and the manufacturer,however,the in- stallation is not complete until the alternative construction inspection has been passed and documented. STEP 2. COMPLETE INSPECTION CHECKLIST After all previous steps have been accomplished, inspect the home to verify that it has been completely and properly installed using the checklist starting on p. 100. Correct any deficiencies found,if possible,or if not possible,inform the retailer or manufacturer immediately. STEP 3. COMPLETE ENERGY STAR CHECKLIST For ENERGY STAR qualified homes(check with the retailer or manufacturer),this step is to be completed by the manufacturer's designated representative.Ask the retailer or the manufacturer who this is. Cn The manufacturer's representative must complete the Energy Star Site Installation Checklist,obtain signatures on the ENERGY STAR label,and return the completed r ENERGY STAR Site Installation Checklist to the manufacturing plant. z m STEP 4. CLEAN THE HOME o Remove and properly dispose of all installation-generated dust,debris,and packaging materials from the home and the surrounding property. Ensure that the home is in p "move-in"condition. X D I CompleteInstallation is o z z cn D r r D O z D z C D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 99 ' Complete Installation Checklist atlbrms to 1/15/09 Complete Installation Checklist Use this checklist to confirm that the listed aspects of the installation are complete and correct. FOUNDATION Footings properly sized and constructed for the soil conditions V t // Pier spacing per data plate and applicable table and roof load zone Limits of the checklist.This Piers properly constructed and vertical checklist is not all-inclusive. Perimeter blocking installed(if required) Some homes have impor- Piers at each side of large sidewall openings tant features not listed here.Completing this Center line piers installed at columns checklist does not guaran- Shims in place and tight tee that all installation re- quirements have been met. ANCHORS Approved anchors are used Anchors are installed at correct angles Anchor spacing and installation correct Longitudinal ties installed(if required) Anchor straps are tensioned UNDER THE HOME Moisture retarder installed The ground is properly graded to prevent water accumulation HVAC ducts are supported off the ground and connected tightly to collars at all ends Fireplace combustion air intake free and unrestricted No holes or tears in bottom board Skirting has been installed per manufacturer's instructions with proper vent- ing and provision for frost heave Dryer vent,range/cook top exhaust,water heater temperature and pressure overflow pipe and AC condensate drain installed to perimeter of crawl space EXTERIOR a Shingled roofs are free of visible damage and serious defects and there are no missing or loose shingles Z Shingle close-up and ridge cap have been completed per applicable details Z All hold down straps on shingled roofs have been removed and staple holes O have been properly sealed QPenetrations at roof stacks,vents and chimneys have been properly sealed Siding and trim is free of gaps,voids, missing fasteners,damage,and seri- ous defects.All seams are sealed and hardboard edges are sealed Z Drip edge and fascia is properly installed and free of damage and serious de- Z fects 0 Gutters and downspouts are installed properly such that water is diverted Qaway from the home QTrees and bushes have been trimmed to prevent brushing against the home 1L in windy conditions or under snow loads W O The HUD label is exposed,intact and legible U w The exterior of the home and immediate surroundings is clean,clear of con- Z struction materials,dust,and debris Y Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 100 Complete Checklist INTERIOR PFS#°5 Ceilings,walls,and floor coverings are free from damage and serious defects Conforms to Carpeting is properly stretched and seamed sun rlxcss 1/15/09 All trim and molding is installed properly and free of damage and defects All cabinets,countertops,plumbing fixtures,appliances,furnishings,and window coverings are free of damage or serious defects All cabinet doors and drawers work properly All interior and exterior doors and windows open,close,and latch properly One window in each bedroom meets emergency egress requirements,has operating instruction labels on it,and operates properly All temporary shipping hardware has been removed Floors are level The data plate is intact and legible Smoke alarms have been tested The interior of the home is clean,clear of materials,dust,and debris WATER AND DRAIN SYSTEMS Crossover and service connection and splices have been properly made with correct materials Water and drain lines are insulated or otherwise protected from freezing Pipe supports are installed and properly spaced Proper slope has been maintained on all drain lines All necessary inspections and tests have been performed All sinks,basins,tubs,and toilets operate properly ` All hot and cold water lines are properly connected to fixtures,dispense wa- ter as labeled,and operate properly cn ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A The panel amperage matches the connection to the home r_ The home has been properly grounded Z m The main power supply has been properly connected and tested by a li- 0 censed electrician 0 All electrical crossovers have been connected 0 O All receptacles,switches,and light fixtures operate properly D Ground fault circuit interrupters operate properly O All exterior lights have been properly installed Z GAS/FUEL OIL SYSTEMS (n The gas system pressure test has been conducted n Connections between units are properly made with access as required D The main fuel line has been properly connected and tested by a qualified technician O Z APPLIANCE OPERATING AND VENTING D Al appliances are working properly Z Appliance venting is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions y Fresh air intakes are properly installed r Whole house, kitchen,and bath exhaust fan operation are correct Fireplace chimney stack extension and roof cap have been installed in ac- cordance with the manufacturer's instructions 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation(4-48 PG. 1) 101 , Complete Checklist PFS#0$ Air conditioner/heat pump is sized properly conro.m.to MISCELLANEOUS HUD MHCSS Installation/anchoring certificates or seals have been issued and installed(if 1/15/09 required) Owner's and operation manuals are available for all appliances This installation manual is left with home J Q D Z Q Z O J a U) z z 0 F- a 0 a. M O U w z J Y Skyline Corporation(4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 102 Indexof - • Q7rose*05Index of Steps00 qP HCSS 1/15/09 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................3 IMPORTANTNOTICES.............................................................................................................................3 SAFETY.....................................................................................................................................................3 RESOURCES............................................................................................................................................4 FEDERALPREEMPTION..........................................................................................................................4 DEFINITIONS............................................................................................................................................4 ENGINEER'S STAMP................................................................................................................................6 SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL.........................................................................................................6 ABBREVIATIONS......................................................................................................................................6 ALTERNATIVE FOUNDATION SYSTEMS...............................................................................................6 DISPLAY AND STORAGE OF THE HOME..............................................................................................6 GETTINGSTARTED.................................................................................................8 STEP 1.LOCATE THE DATA PLATE......................................................................................................8 STEP2.CONFIRM WIND ZONE...............................................................................................................8 STEP 3.CONFIRM THERMAL ZONE.......................................................................................................9 STEP 4.CONFIRM ROOF-LOAD ZONE...................................................................................................10 STEP 5.CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS....................................................................12 PREPARETHE SITE................................................................................................13 STEP1.PLAN SITE ACCESS..................................................................................................................13 STEP 2.DETERMINE HOME LOCATION AND LAYOUT........................................................................13 STEP 3.CLEAR AND GRADE THE SITE.................................................................................................14 STEP 4.DETERMINE SOIL CONDITION.................................................................................................14 STEP 5.DETERMINE SOIL-BEARING CAPACITY AND FROST LINE...................................................15 STEP 6.DETERMINE GROUND ANCHOR HOLDING CAPACITY..........................................................16 INSTALL FOOTINGS............................... 18 Cn STEP 1.DESIGN POINT LOAD SUPPORTS.......................................................................18 < STEP 2.DESIGN FRAME SUPPORTS(Homes Without Perimeter Blocking)......................................21 1:z STEP 3.DESIGN FRAME AND PERIMETER SUPPORTS Homes With Perimeter Blocking) 22 m ( 9)............. n STEP 4.SELECT FOOTING MATERIALS................................................................................................23 O STEP5.SIZE FOOTINGS.........................................................................................................................23 a STEP6.INSTALL FOOTINGS..................................................................................................................26 O CONSTRUCT FOUNDATIONS.................................................................................28 STEP 1.OBTAIN A FOUNDATION DESIGN............................................................................................28 O STEP2.EXCAVATE.................................................................................................................................28 zZ STEP 3.CONSTRUCT THE FOOTING OR SLAB....................................................................................28 N STEP 4.CONSTRUCT THE PERIMETER WALL.....................................................................................28 D r STEP 5.INSTALL INTERIOR SUPPORTS...............................................................................................29 r STEP 6.WATERPROOF FOUNDATION WALL.......................................................................................29 _ STEP 7.BACKFILL AND GRADE O ............................................................................................29 z SET THE HOME........................................................................................................30 > n STEP1.PREPARE FOR SET...................................................................................................................30 z c STEP 2.POSITION HOME SECTION.......................................................................................................30 D r STEP3. LIFT HOME..................................................................................................................................30 STEP4.CONSTRUCT PIERS...................................................................................................................32 COMPLETE MULTI-SECTION SET..........................................................................36 STEP 1.INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE ANCHORS.....................................................................................36 1/9/2Q09 9:, Skyline i;Orporation (4-48 PG. 1) 103 #OS . - - a 4KOOO onro.ms to HUD MHCSS STEP 2.REMOVE PROTECTIVE SHIPPING MATERIALS......................................................................36 1/15/09 STEP 3.COMPLETE HINGED ROOF.......................................................................................................36 STEP 4.REPAIR OR INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE GASKET...................................................................38 STEP 5.POSITION ADDITIONAL HOME SECTIONS..............................................................................39 STEP6.CONNECT FLOORS...................................................................................................................39 STEP7.CONNECT ROOF........................................................................................................................41 STEP8.CONNECT WALLS.....................................................................................................................43 STEP9.ATTACH TAG UNITS..................................................................................................................45 STEP 10.REMOVE TEMPORARY ITEMS................................................................................................46 STEP 11,FASTEN HOME TO FOUNDATION..........................................................................................46 STEP 12.BACKFILL AND GRADE..........................................................................................................46 STEP 13.BUILD STAIRS..........................................................................................................................46 COMPLETE ROOF AND EXTERIOR WALLS..........................................................47 STEP 1.COMPLETE ROOF......................................................................................................................47 STEP 2.COMPLETE TAG UNIT ROOF....................................................................................................49 STEP 3.COMPLETE SIDE WALLS..........................................................................................................51 CONNECT CROSSOVERS.......................................................................................52 STEP 1.CONNECT DUCTS......................................................................................................................52 STEP 2.CONNECT ELECTRICAL CROSSOVERS.................................................................................56 STEP 3.INSTALL ELECTRICAL BONDING............................................................................................58 STEP 4.CONNECT WATER LINES..........................................................................................................59 STEP 5.CONNECT DRAIN,WASTE,AND VENT LINES........................................................................60 STEP 6.CONNECT GAS LINES...............................................................................................................61 STEP 7.CONNECT TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV WIRING..................................................................62 COMPLETE THE INTERIOR ....................................................................................63 STEP 1.ALIGN MARRIAGE WALLS........................................................................................................63 STEP 2.FINISH GYPSUM BOARD...........................................................................................................63 STEP 3.COMPLETE WALL AND CEILING FINISHES............................................................................64 STEP4.COMPLETE CARPET.................................................................................................................64 STEP 5.COMPLETE TRIM.......................................................................................................................64 STEP 6.INSTALL SHIP LOOSE ITEMS...................................................................................................64 Q z INSTALL STABILIZING SYSTEM .......65 B STEP 1.DETERMINE ANCHOR LOCATIONS.........................................................................................65 2 STEP 2.DETERMINE TIE-DOWN CONFIGURATION..............................................................................71 z O STEP 3.SELECT ANCHORS....................................................................................................................71 ~ STEP 4.INSTALL ANCHORS.................................................... STEP5.INSTALL STRAPS......................................................................................................................73 Q STEP 6.TIGHTEN AND ADJUST STRAPS...................................... cn z CONNECT UTILITIES 77 z STEP 1.CONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICE...........................................................................................77 O �= STEP 2.CONNECT WATER SERVICE....................................................................................................80 STEP 3.CONNECT GAS SERVICE..........................................................................................................83 O a STEP 4.CONNECT OIL SERVICE............................................................................................................84 o PREPARE APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENT..........................................................86 V INSTALL AIR CONDITIONER OR HEAT PUMP 86 W ...................................................... zPREPARE HEATING SYSTEM.................................................................................................................87 INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT..................................................................87 Y PREPARE VENTILATION SYSTEM 88 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/912009 9:22 AM 104 Indexof Steps Huu nn�css 1/15/09 -- PREPARE FUEL-BURNING WATER HEATER........................................................................................88 PREPARECLOTHES DRYER..................................................................................................................89 PREPARESMOKE ALARMS...................................................................................................................90 PREPAREFIREPLACES..........................................................................................................................90 PREPARE KITCHEN AND BATH APPLIANCES/FIXTURES.................................................................92 INSTALL EXTERIOR LIGHTING...............................................................................................................93 INSTALL CEILING FANS AND LIGHTING...............................................................................................93 TESTELECTRICAL SYSTEM...................................................................................................................95 COMPLETE EXTERIOR WORK...............................................................................96 STEP 1.REPAIR AND SEAL BOTTOM BOARD.....................................................................................96 STEP 2.INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER............................................................................96 STEP3.INSTALL SKIRTING....................................................................................................................97 STEP 4.ASSEMBLE OPTIONAL WIND PROTECTION SHUTTERS......................................................97 STEP 5.COMPLETE SITE-BUILT STRUCTURES...................................................................................98 PREPARE HOME FOR OCCUPANCY.....................................................................99 STEP 1.VERIFY ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION(A/C)INSPECTION................................................99 STEP 2.COMPLETE INSPECTION CHECKLIST.....................................................................................99 STEP 3.COMPLETE ENERGY STAR CHECKLIST.................................................................................99 STEP4.CLEAN THE HOME.....................................................................................................................99 COMPLETE INSTALLATION CHECKLIST..............................................................'100 cn r z m 0 O O n O z z U) n r r D O z 3 D z c D r 1/9/2009 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 105 Skyline Corporation P.O. Box 743 Elkhart, Indiana www.skylinecorp.com 4-48 PG. 1 v Cl 91QYd '� z 910? L 0 330 Q 0.001 W '� P9Al9oea 1 3 o e' - 1�•bs '009t g a � g A g ,L t ffd '00,001 ,S1 461 3,Of.ff.WS g 'il•bs 009't S 91 ffd � 1 t � W o; Fa 1jbs OtS6l QYd � •r k V •� � � o, � 3,8t,**'.ZOS O� �1 ��� v� q d Oa' iTYd d `W �0,00 c� c� g 509'19 r ti 3„L0,99.INS p r` Vbs 896 t -cr` N` C Z CL � 19 UYd �, � a fie.8 •� �-► 90 19 01 D 9z'901 °O , 3„SL,LQfOS K31 SA S 71 VW 8Y3N17 F S31117LL 0 'SS380 'SS3&N! 80.4 96*0900196 I-JV ONY oU NnOO HSIMIOHONS 30 1 / '0 n d '*1 POOZS016 / A 51 NJ W rd 3 83ONYO 803 1 N3t SY3 ,00 SZ Permit#: 1231 Permit Date: 12/07/16 Permit Type: MANUFACTURED HOME Project Name: Long Applicant Name: Coach Corral Inc. Applicant Address: 3906 Cedardale Rd Applicant, City, State, Zip: Mount Vernon,WA 98274 Contact: DeAnna Wohlman Phone: 360-424-8448 Email: deanna@coachcorral.com Scope of Work: Mobile Home Installation Valuation: 99000.00 Square Feet: 0 Number of Stories: 0 Construction Type: Occupancy Group: ID Code: Permit Issued: 12/19/2016 Permit Expires: Form Permit Type: Status: COMPLETE Assigned To: Kristin Foster Property Parcel# Address Legal Description Owner Name Owner Phone Zoning 19920 67TH AVE NE SPC 119 Manufactured 00960007901800 18 VACANT SPACE Home(Mobile Home Park) Contractors Contractor Primary Contact Phone Address Contractor Type License License# James Wise James Wise 360-770-9285 5504 Tenneson Rd CONSTRUCTION Labor& WISE*J*055L1 CONTRACTOR Industries Coach Corral,Inc. DeAnna Wohlman 360-424-8448 3906 Cedardale APPLICANT Labor&COACHC*254MJ Rd Industries Inspections Date Inspection Type Description Scheduled Date Completed Date Inspector Status Foundation blocking and 05/01/2017 R02.1 FOOTING tie-downs in place,no 04/28/2017 BUILDING Completed DRAINS/DOWNSPOUTS skirting in place at time of inspection. Plan Reviews Date Review Type Description Assigned To Review Status 12/08/2016 MANUFACTURED HOME BUILDING Fees Fee Description Notes Amount Mobile Home/Modular Office Permit fee $500.00 Total $500.00 Attached Letters Date Letter Description 12/16/2016 Building Permit Payments Date Paid By Description Payment Type Accepted By Amount 12/19/2016 DeAnna Wohlman 62756785 cc $500.00 Outstanding Balance $0.00 Notes Date Note Created By: 12/19/2016 Emailed permit for signature-lp Launa Black Uploaded Files Date File Name 12/19/2016 2016718-1231 Issued Permit.pdf 12/12/2016 2007374-1231 Deck Info.pdf 12/08/2016 2001761-1231 SKYLINE install-manual.pdf 12/08/2016 2001762-1231 Site Plan.pdf 12/08/2016 2001763-1231 Floor Plan.pdf 12/08/2016 2001764-1231 Plat.pdf 12/08/2016 2001750-1231 Application.pdf CITY OF ARLINGTON 238 N. OLYMPIC AVE -ARLINGTON, WA. 98223 PHONE; (360)403-3551 BUILDING PERMIT Address:19920 67th Ave NE,#18 Permit#:1231 Parcel#:00960007901800 Valuation:99000.00 OWNER APPLICANT CONTRACTOR Name:VACANT SPACE Name:Coach Corral Inc. Name:Coach Corral,Inc. Address: 19920 67TH AVE NE SPC 18 Address:3906 Cedardale Rd Address:3906 Cedardale Rd City,State Zip:ARLINGTON,WA 98223 City,State Zip:Mount Vernon,WA 98274 City,State Zip:Mount Vernon,WA 98274 Phone: Phone:360-424-8448 Phone:360424-8448 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR PLUMBING CONTRACTOR Name: Name: Address: Address: City,State,Zip: City,State,Zip: Phone: Phone: LIC#: EXP: LIC#: EXP: JOB DESCRIPTION PERMIT TYPE: Mlsc CODE YEAR: 2015 STORIES: ] CONST.TYPE: DWELLING UNITS: ] OCC GROUP: BUILDINGS: OCC LOAD: PERMIT APPROVAL I AGREE TO COMPLY WITH CITY AND STATE LAWS REGULATING CONSTRUCTION AND IN DOING THE WORK AUTHORIZED THEREBY;NO PERSON WILL BE EMPLOYED IN VIOLATION OF THE LABOR CODE OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON RELATING TO WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE AND RCW 18.27. THIS APPLICATION IS NOT A PERMIT UNTIL SIGNED BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL OR HIS/HER DEPUTY AND ALL FEES ARE PAID. IT IS UNLAWFUL TO USE OR OCCUPY A BUILDING OR STRUCTURE UNTIL A FINAL INSPECTION HAS BEEN MADE AND APPROVAL OR A CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY HAS BEEN GRANTED. IBC 1 IO/IRC I IO. SALES TAX NOTICE:Sales tax relating to construction and construction materials in the City of Arlington must be reported on your sales tax return form and coded City of Arlington#3101. Signature Print Name Date Re cased By Ddic CONDITIONS Approved as submitted. Call for inspection at 360-403-3417. THIS PERMIT AUTHORIZS ONLY THE WORK NOTED.THIS PERMIT COVERS WORK TO BE DONE ON PRIVATE PROPERTY ONLY. ANY CONSTRUCTION ON THE PUBLIC DOMAIN(CURBS,SIDEWALKS,DRIVEWAYS,MARQUEES,ETC.)WILL REQUIRE SEPARATE PERMISSION. PERMIT FEES Date Description Fee Amount 12/16/2016 Mobile Home $500.00 Total Due: $500.00 Total Payment: $0.00 Balance Due: $500.00 CALL FOR INSPECTIONS BUILDING(360)403-3417 When calling for an inspection please leave the following information: Permit Number,Type of Inspection being requested,and whether you prefer morning or afternoon CITY OF ARLINGTON INSPECTION REQUEST PROCEDURE To schedule an inspection: Call the Automated Inspection Line @ (360) 403-3417 before 8am the day of inspection request Provide The Required Information: • Give Permit Number (BLD# or PWD#) Give Inspection Request (Building or Civil) • Give Inspection Time (am or pm) - you may request a specific time. We will,do our best to honor the time requested. Building Inspections: • Building • Fire • Mechanical • Plumbing Civil Inspections: • Grading • TECSP • Storm Drainage • Paving, Signage, Markings • Right-of-Way Work